PHILIPPINE BIDDING DOCUMENTS

(As Harmonized with Development Partners)

Procurement of
INFRASTRUCTURE
PROJECTS
CONSTRUCTION OF DOUBLE TRACK
FROM SUCAT TO ALABANG SECTION
OF THE PHILIPPINE NATIONAL
RAILWAYS [RE-BID]

Government of the Republic of the Philippines

1
2
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION I. INVITATION TO BID ..................................................................................... 4

SECTION II. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ................................................................... 8
SECTION III. BID DATA SHEET ...................................................................................... 36
SECTION IV. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT ........................................... 42
SECTION V. SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT ............................................... 74
SECTION VI. SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................... 77
SECTION VII. DRAWINGS .............................................................................................. 269
SECTION VIII. BILL OF QUANTITIES ......................................................................... 309
SECTION IX. BIDDING FORMS ..................................................................................... 313

3
Section I. Invitation to Bid

4
 Republic of the Philippines
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION AND COMMUNICATIONS

INVITATION TO BID FOR CONSTRUCTION OF

DOUBLE TRACK FROM SUCAT TO ALABANG
SECTION OF THE PHILIPPINE NATIONAL RAILWAYS
[RE-BID]
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________

The Department of Transportation and Communications (DOTC), through its Bids and Awards
Committee (BAC), invites contractors registered with and classified by the Philippine
Contractors Accreditation Board (PCAB) to join in the procurement of the herein project:

Name of Project : CONSTRUCTION OF DOUBLE TRACK FROM SUCAT TO ALABANG

SECTION OF THE PHILIPPINE NATIONAL RAILWAYS [RE-BID]

Formation of embankment, laying/installation of Prestressed Concrete

Brief Description : Sleepers and wood joint ties, installation of rails, ballasting works,
bridge works, drainage and slope protection, construction of Level
Crossings with provisions of stop crossing pavement painting, crossing
barriers and cabins, fencing of PNR Right of Way and other works
necessary for the completion of the project.

PNR Commuter Section from Sucat Station to Alabang station

Location :
GAA C.Y. 2015
Source of Fund :
Php144,377,624.62 / 200 Calendar Days (including unworkable days)
ABC/Duration :
Medium B License Category A for Roads, Highways, Pavement,
PCAB : Railways, Airport Horizontal Structure, and Bridges
Registration
One (1)-Asphalt Distributor One (1)-Payloader
One (1)-Asphalt Paver One (1)-Pnuematice Roller
: One (1)-Cargo Truck One (1)-Rail grinding machine
Minimum One (1)-Crane One (1)-Railmounted Cargo
Equipment One (1)-Crawler tractor with Dozer Truck
Requirement One (1)-Excavator One (1)-Railmounted Truck
(OWNED/LEASED One (1)-Forklift One (1)-Tandem Roller
) One (1)-Generator One (1)-Thermit Welding tools
One (1)-Hauling dump truck & equipment
One (1)-Hauling Truck One (1)-Truck Crane
One (1)-High Bed Trailer Truck One (1)-Truck Mounted Crane
One (1)-Hydraulic Backhoe,
Crawler-Mounted Excavator One (1)-Truck w/ Mounted Lift
One (1)-Job Mixed concrete 4-bagger One (1)-Water truck
One (1)-Mechanized rail weld Two (2)-Dump truck
trimming machine Two (2)-Rail Mounted Cargo

5
 One (1)-Motorized Skates Trucks
One (1)-One Bagger Concrete Mixer Two (2)-Rail Mounted Hauling
Equipment
Two (2)-Smooth Drums

The schedule of procurement activities are shown below:

Issuance of Bid Tender Documents 16 July 2015 to 07 August 2015

Pre-Bidding Conference 24 July 2015, 2:00 PM, at Unit 167, 16th Floor,
The Columbia Tower, Ortigas Ave.,
Mandaluyong City.
Submission and Receipt of Bids The deadline for submission and receipt of bids
is 07 August 2015, 2:00 PM, only at Unit 153,
15th Floor, The Columbia Tower, Ortigas Ave.,
Mandaluyong City.

Prospective bidders must have an experience of having completed at least one (1) contract that
is similar to the contract to be bid, and whose value, adjusted to current prices using NSO
consumer price indices, must be at least fifty percent (50%) of the Approved Budget for the
Contract (ABC) and have key personnel and equipment available for the prosecution of the
contract.

Bidding will be conducted through open competitive bidding procedures using non-
discretionary pass/fail criteria as specified in the Revised Implementing Rules and Regulations
(RIRR) of Republic Act No. 9184 (RA 9184), otherwise known as the “Government
Procurement Reform Act”.

Bidding is restricted to Filipino citizens/sole proprietorships, partnerships, or organizations with

at least seventy-five percent (75%) interest or outstanding capital stock belonging to citizens of
the Philippines.

Interested bidders may obtain further information from DOTC and inspect the Bidding
Documents at the address given below from 8:00 AM – 5:00 PM.

The Bid Documents/Forms will be available at Unit 22, The Columbia Tower Bldg., Ortigas
Avenue, Mandaluyong City, upon payment of a non-refundable amount of Fifty Thousand
Pesos (Php 50,000.00) to the DOTC cashier. It may also be downloaded free of charge from the
website of the Philippine Government Electronic Procurement System (PhilGEPS)
(philgeps.gov.ph) and the DOTC website at www.dotc.gov.ph provided that the bidders shall
pay the fee of the Bidding Documents not later than the submission of bids. The pre-bid
conference is open to all interested parties.

All bids must be accompanied by the bid security in any of the acceptable forms and in the
amount stated in the Instructions to Bidders Clause 18.

Bids will be opened in the presence of the bidders‟ representatives who choose to attend at the
address as stated above. Late bids shall not be accepted.

6
The DOTC reserves the right to reject any or all bids, and accept the offer most advantageous
to the Government. The DOTC assumes no responsibility whatsoever to compensate or
indemnify bidders for any expenses incurred in the preparation of the bid.

For further information, please refer to:

Undersecretary Catherine P Gonzales
Over-all Head, BAC Secretariat
Department of Transportation and Communications
Bids and Awards Committee Office
is" Floor, Unit 153, The Columbia Tower
Ortigas Avenue, Mandaluyong City
Tel. No. 790-8300 local 235 or 272
Fax No. 654-7725
E-mail address:baesee@dote.gov.ph.
Website: www.dote.gov.ph.

~~
ATTY.~SEt !.~RPETUOM. LOTILLA
Chairman, Bids and Awards Committee
and Undersecretary for Legal Affairs
n

7
Section II. Instructions to Bidders

8
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

A. GENERAL..................................................................................................... 11
1. SCOPE OF BID .....................................................................................................11
2. SOURCE OF FUNDS ...........................................................................................11
3. CORRUPT, FRAUDULENT, COLLUSIVE, AND COERCIVE
PRACTICES ..........................................................................................................11
4. CONFLICT OF INTEREST ................................................................................13
5. ELIGIBLE BIDDERS ..........................................................................................14
6. BIDDER’S RESPONSIBILITIES .......................................................................15
7. ORIGIN OF GOODS AND SERVICES .............................................................17
8. SUBCONTRACTS ................................................................................................17
B. CONTENTS OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS ...................................................... 17
9. PRE-BID CONFERENCE ...................................................................................17
10. CLARIFICATION AND AMENDMENT OF BIDDING
DOCUMENTS .......................................................................................................18
C. PREPARATION OF BIDS .............................................................................. 18
11. LANGUAGE OF BIDS .........................................................................................18
12. DOCUMENTS COMPRISING THE BID: ELIGIBILITY AND
TECHNICAL COMPONENTS ...........................................................................19
13. DOCUMENTS COMPRISING THE BID: FINANCIAL
COMPONENT ......................................................................................................21
14. ALTERNATIVE BIDS .........................................................................................22
15. BID PRICES ..........................................................................................................22
16. BID CURRENCIES ..............................................................................................23
17. BID VALIDITY.....................................................................................................23
18. BID SECURITY ....................................................................................................23
19. FORMAT AND SIGNING OF BIDS ..................................................................25
20. SEALING AND MARKING OF BIDS ...............................................................26
D. SUBMISSION AND OPENING OF BIDS ......................................................... 27
21. DEADLINE FOR SUBMISSION OF BIDS .......................................................27
22. LATE BIDS ...........................................................................................................27
23. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS ........................................27
24. OPENING AND PRELIMINARY EXAMINATION OF BIDS .......................27
E. EVALUATION AND COMPARISON OF BIDS ............................................... 29

9
 25. PROCESS TO BE CONFIDENTIAL .................................................................29
26. CLARIFICATION OF BIDS ...............................................................................29
27. DETAILED EVALUATION AND COMPARISON OF BIDS ........................29
28. POST QUALIFICATION ....................................................................................29
29. RESERVATION CLAUSE ..................................................................................31
F. AWARD OF CONTRACT .............................................................................. 32
30. CONTRACT AWARD .........................................................................................32
31. SIGNING OF THE CONTRACT .......................................................................33
32. PERFORMANCE SECURITY............................................................................34
33. NOTICE TO PROCEED......................................................................................34

10
 A. General

1. Scope of Bid
1.1. The Procuring Entity as defined in the BDS, invites bids for the construction
of Works, as described in Section VI. Specifications. The name and
identification number of the Contract is provided in the BDS.

1.2. The successful bidder will be expected to complete the Works by the intended
completion date specified in SCC Clause 0.

2. Source of Funds
The Procuring Entity has a budget or has applied for or received funds from the
Funding Source named in the BDS, and in the amount indicated in the BDS. It
intends to apply part of the funds received for the Project, as defined in the BDS, to
cover eligible payments under the Contract for the Works.

3. Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, and Coercive Practices

3.1. Unless otherwise specified in the BDS, the Procuring Entity, as well as bidders
and contractors, shall observe the highest standard of ethics during the
procurement and execution of the contract. In pursuance of this policy, the
Funding Source:

(a) defines, for purposes of this provision, the terms set forth below as
follows:

(i) "corrupt practice" means behavior on the part of officials in the

public or private sectors by which they improperly and
unlawfully enrich themselves, others, or induce others to do so,
by misusing the position in which they are placed, and includes
the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of anything of value
to influence the action of any such official in the procurement
process or in contract execution; entering, on behalf of the
Procuring Entity, into any contract or transaction manifestly
and grossly disadvantageous to the same, whether or not the
public officer profited or will profit thereby, and similar acts as
provided in Republic Act 3019;

(ii) "fraudulent practice" means a misrepresentation of facts in

order to influence a procurement process or the execution of a
contract to the detriment of the Procuring Entity, and includes
collusive practices among Bidders (prior to or after Bid
submission) designed to establish bid prices at artificial, non-
competitive levels and to deprive the Procuring Entity of the
benefits of free and open competition;

(iii) “collusive practices” means a scheme or arrangement between

two or more bidders, with or without the knowledge of the

11
 Procuring Entity, designed to establish bid prices at artificial,
non-competitive levels; and

(iv) “coercive practices” means harming or threatening to harm,

directly or indirectly, persons, or their property to influence
their participation in a procurement process, or affect the
execution of a contract;

(v) “obstructive practice” is

(aa) deliberately destroying, falsifying, altering or

concealing of evidence material to an administrative
proceedings or investigation or making false statements
to investigators in order to materially impede an
administrative proceedings or investigation of the
Procuring Entity or any foreign government/foreign or
international financing institution into allegations of a
corrupt, fraudulent, coercive or collusive practice;
and/or threatening, harassing or intimidating any party
to prevent it from disclosing its knowledge of matters
relevant to the administrative proceedings or
investigation or from pursuing such proceedings or
investigation; or

(bb) acts intended to materially impede the exercise of the

inspection and audit rights of the Procuring Entity or
any foreign government/foreign or international
financing institution herein.

(b) will reject a proposal for award if it determines that the bidder
recommended for award has engaged in corrupt or fraudulent practices
in competing for the Contract; and

(c) will declare a firm ineligible, either indefinitely or for a stated period
of time, to be awarded Contract funded by the Funding Source if it at
any time determines that the firm has engaged in corrupt or fraudulent
practices in competing or, or in executing, a Contract funded by the
Funding Source.

3.2. Further, the Procuring Entity will seek to impose the maximum civil,
administrative, and/or criminal penalties available under the applicable laws
on individuals and organizations deemed to be involved in any of the practices
mentioned in the Instructions to Bidders (ITB) Clause 3.10.

3.3. Furthermore, the Funding Source and the Procuring Entity reserve the right to
inspect and audit records and accounts of a contractor in the bidding for and
performance of a contract themselves or through independent auditors as
reflected in the GCC Clause 0.

12
4. Conflict of Interest
4.1. All bidders found to have conflicting interests shall be disqualified to
participate in the procurement at hand, without prejudice to the imposition of
appropriate administrative, civil, and criminal sanctions. A Bidder may be
considered to have conflicting interests with another Bidder in any of the
events described in paragraphs (a) through (c) and a general conflict of interest
in any of the circumstances set out in paragraphs (d) through (g) below:

(a) A Bidder has controlling shareholders in common with another Bidder;

(b) A Bidder receives or has received any direct or indirect subsidy from
any other Bidder;

(c) A Bidder has the same legal representative as that of another Bidder
for purposes of this Bid;

(d) A Bidder has a relationship, directly or through third parties, that puts
them in a position to have access to information about or influence on
the bid of another Bidder or influence the decisions of the Procuring
Entity regarding this bidding process. This will include a firm or an
organization who lends, or temporarily seconds, its personnel to firms
or organizations which are engaged in consulting services for the
preparation related to procurement for or implementation of the project
if the personnel would be involved in any capacity on the same project;

(e) A Bidder submits more than one bid in this bidding process. However,
this does not limit the participation of subcontractors in more than one
bid;

(f) A Bidder who participated as a consultant in the preparation of the

design or technical specifications of the goods and related services that
are the subject of the bid; or

(g) A Bidder who lends, or temporary seconds, its personnel to firms or

organizations which are engaged in consulting services for the
preparation related to procurement for or implementation of the
project, if the personnel would be involved in any capacity on the same
project.

4.2. In accordance with Section 47 of the IRR of RA 9184, all Bidding Documents
shall be accompanied by a sworn affidavit of the Bidder that it is not related to
the Head of the Procuring Entity members of the Bids and Awards Committee
(BAC), members of the Technical Working Group (TWG), members of the
BAC Secretariat, the head of the Project Management Office (PMO) or the
end-user unit, and the project consultants, by consanguinity or affinity up to
the third civil degree. On the part of the bidder, this Clause shall apply to the
following persons:

(a) If the Bidder is an individual or a sole proprietorship, to the Bidder

himself;

13
 (b) If the Bidder is a partnership, to all its officers and members;

(c) If the Bidder is a corporation, to all its officers, directors, and

controlling stockholders; and

(d) If the Bidder is a joint venture (JV), the provisions of items (a), (b), or
(c) of this Clause shall correspondingly apply to each of the members
of the said JV, as may be appropriate.

Relationship of the nature described above or failure to comply with this

Clause will result in the automatic disqualification of a Bidder.

5. Eligible Bidders
5.1. Unless otherwise indicated in the BDS, the following persons shall be eligible
to participate in this Bidding:

(a) Duly licensed Filipino citizens/sole proprietorships;

(b) Partnerships duly organized under the laws of the Philippines and of
which at least seventy five percent (75%) of the interest belongs to
citizens of the Philippines;

(c) Corporations duly organized under the laws of the Philippines, and of
which at least seventy five percent (75%) of the outstanding capital
stock belongs to citizens of the Philippines;

(d) Cooperatives duly organized under the laws of the Philippines, and of
which at least seventy five percent (75%) of the interest belongs to
citizens of the Philippines; and

(e) Persons/entities forming themselves into a JV, i.e., a group of two (2)
or more persons/entities that intend to be jointly and severally
responsible or liable for a particular contract: Provided, however, that,
in accordance with Letter of Instructions No. 630, Filipino ownership
or interest of the joint venture concerned shall be at least seventy five
percent (75%): Provided, further, that joint ventures in which Filipino
ownership or interest is less than seventy five percent (75%) may be
eligible where the structures to be built require the application of
techniques and/or technologies which are not adequately possessed by
a person/entity meeting the seventy five percent (75%) Filipino
ownership requirement: Provided, finally, that in the latter case,
Filipino ownership or interest shall not be less than twenty five percent
(25%). For this purpose Filipino ownership or interest shall be based
on the contributions of each of the members of the joint venture as
specified in their JVA.

5.2. The Procuring Entity may also invite foreign bidders when provided for under
any Treaty or International or Executive Agreement as specified in the BDS.

14
 5.3. Government Corporate Entities may be eligible to participate only if they can
establish that they (a) are legally and financially autonomous, (b) operate
under commercial law, and (c) are not dependent agencies of the GOP or the
Procuring Entity.

5.4. (a) Unless otherwise provided in the BDS, the Bidder must have completed a
single contract that is similar to this, equivalent to at least fifty percent (50%)
of the ABC adjusted to current prices using the National Statistics Office
consumer price index. However, contractors under Small A and Small B
categories without similar experience on the contract to be bid may be allowed
to bid if the cost of such contract is not more than fifty percent (50%) of the
Allowable Range on Contract Cost of their registration based on the
guidelines as prescribed by the PCAB.

(b) For Foreign-funded Procurement, the Procuring Entity and the foreign
government/foreign or international financing institution may agree on another
track record requirement, as specified in the BDS.

For this purpose, contracts similar to the Project shall be those described in the
BDS, and completed within the period stated in the Invitation to Bid and ITB
Clause 0.

5.5. The Bidder must submit a computation of its Net Financial Contracting
Capacity (NFCC) which must be at least equal to the ABC to be bid,
calculated as follows:

NFCC = [(Current assets minus current liabilities) (K)] minus the value of
all outstanding or uncompleted portions of the projects under ongoing
contracts, including awarded contracts yet to be started coinciding with the
contract for this Project.

Where:

K = 10 for a contract duration of one year or less, 15 for a contract

duration of more than one year up to two years, and 20 for a contract
duration of more than two years.

The values of the bidder‟s current assets and liabilities shall be based on the
data submitted to the BIR, through its Electronic Filing and Payment System
(EFPS).

6. Bidder’s Responsibilities
6.1. The Bidder or its duly authorized representative shall submit a sworn
statement in the form prescribed in Section IX. Bidding Forms as required in
ITB Clause 0.

6.2. The Bidder is responsible for the following:

(a) Having taken steps to carefully examine all of the Bidding

Documents;

15
 (b) Having acknowledged all conditions, local or otherwise, affecting the
implementation of the contract;

(c) Having made an estimate of the facilities available and needed for the
contract to be bid, if any;

(d) Having complied with its responsibility to inquire or secure

Supplemental/Bid Bulletin/s as provided under ITB Clause 0.

(e) Ensuring that it is not “blacklisted” or barred from bidding by the GOP
or any of its agencies, offices, corporations, or LGUs, including
foreign government/foreign or international financing institution whose
blacklisting rules have been recognized by the GPPB;

(f) Ensuring that each of the documents submitted in satisfaction of the

bidding requirements is an authentic copy of the original, complete,
and all statements and information provided therein are true and
correct;

(g) Authorizing the Head of the Procuring Entity or its duly authorized
representative/s to verify all the documents submitted;

(h) Ensuring that the signatory is the duly authorized representative of the
Bidder, and granted full power and authority to do, execute and
perform any and all acts necessary and/or to represent the Bidder in the
bidding, with the duly notarized Secretary‟s Certificate attesting to
such fact, if the Bidder is a corporation, partnership, cooperative, or
joint venture;

(i) Complying with the disclosure provision under Section 47 of the Act
in relation to other provisions of Republic Act 3019; and

(j) Complying with existing labor laws and standards, if applicable.

Failure to observe any of the above responsibilities shall be at the risk of the
Bidder concerned.

6.3. The Bidder, by the act of submitting its bid, shall be deemed to have inspected
the site, determined the general characteristics of the contract works and the
conditions for this Project and examine all instructions, forms, terms, and
project requirements in the Bidding Documents.

6.4. It shall be the sole responsibility of the prospective bidder to determine and to
satisfy itself by such means as it considers necessary or desirable as to all
matters pertaining to this Project, including: (a) the location and the nature of
the contract, project, or work; (b) climatic conditions; (c) transportation
facilities; (c) nature and condition of the terrain, geological conditions at the
site communication facilities, requirements, location and availability of
construction aggregates and other materials, labor, water, electric power and
access roads; and (d) other factors that may affect the cost, duration and
execution or implementation of the contract, project, or work.

16
 6.5. The Procuring Entity shall not assume any responsibility regarding erroneous
interpretations or conclusions by the prospective or eligible bidder out of the
data furnished by the procuring entity.

6.6. Before submitting their bids, the Bidders are deemed to have become familiar
with all existing laws, decrees, ordinances, acts and regulations of the
Philippines which may affect the contract in any way.

6.7. The Bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission
of his bid, and the Procuring Entity will in no case be responsible or liable for
those costs, regardless of the conduct or outcome of the bidding process.

6.8. Bidders should note that the Procuring Entity will only accept bids only from
those that have paid the nonrefundable fee for the Bidding Documents at the
office indicated in the Invitation to Bid.

7. Origin of GOODS and Services

There is no restriction on the origin of Goods, or Contracting of Works or Services
other than those prohibited by a decision of the United Nations Security Council taken
under Chapter VII of the Charter of the United Nations.

8. Subcontracts
8.1. Unless otherwise specified in the BDS, the Bidder may subcontract portions of
the Works to an extent as may be approved by the Procuring Entity and stated
in the BDS. However, subcontracting of any portion shall not relieve the
Bidder from any liability or obligation that may arise from the contract for this
Project.

8.2. Subcontractors must submit the documentary requirements under ITB Clause
0 and comply with the eligibility criteria specified in the BDS. In the event
that any subcontractor is found by the Procuring Entity to be ineligible, the
subcontracting of such portion of the Works shall be disallowed.

8.3. The Bidder may identify the subcontractor to whom a portion of the Works
will be subcontracted at any stage of the bidding process or during contract
implementation. If the Bidder opts to disclose the name of the subcontractor
during bid submission, the Bidder shall include the required documents as part
of the technical component of its bid.

B. Contents of Bidding Documents

9. Pre-Bid Conference
9.1. (a) If so specified in the BDS, a pre-bid conference shall be held at the venue
and on the date indicated therein, to clarify and address the Bidders‟ questions
on the technical and financial components of this Project.

(b) The pre-bid conference shall be held at least twelve (12) calendar days
before the deadline for the submission of and receipt of bids. If the Procuring

17
 Entity determines that, by reason of the method, nature, or complexity of the
contract to be bid, or when international participation will be more
advantageous to the GOP, a longer period for the preparation of bids is
necessary, the pre-bid conference shall be held at least thirty (30) calendar
days before the deadline for the submission and receipt of bids, as specified in
the BDS.

9.2. Bidders are encouraged to attend the pre-bid conference to ensure that they
fully understand the Procuring Entity‟s requirements. Non-attendance of the
Bidder will in no way prejudice its bid; however, the Bidder is expected to
know the changes and/or amendments to the Bidding Documents as recorded
in the minutes of the pre-bid conference and the Supplemental/Bid Bulletin.

9.3. Any statement made at the pre-bid conference shall not modify the terms of
the bidding documents unless such statement is specifically identified in
writing as an amendment thereto and issued as a Supplemental/Bid Bulletin.

10. Clarification and Amendment of Bidding Documents

10.1. Bidders who have purchased the Bidding Documents may request for
clarification(s) on any part of the Bidding Documents or for an interpretation.
Such a request must be in writing and submitted to the Procuring Entity at the
address indicated in the BDS at least ten (10) calendar days before the
deadline set for the submission and receipt of Bids.

10.2. Supplemental/Bid Bulletins may be issued upon the Procuring Entity‟s

initiative for purposes of clarifying or modifying any provision of the Bidding
Documents not later than seven (7) calendar days before the deadline for the
submission and receipt of Bids. Any modification to the Bidding Documents
shall be identified as an amendment.

10.3. Any Supplemental/Bid Bulletin issued by the BAC shall also be posted on the
Philippine Government Electronic Procurement System (PhilGEPS) and the
website of the Procuring Entity concerned, if available. Unless, otherwise
provided in the BDS, it shall be the responsibility of all Bidders who secure
the Bidding Documents to inquire and secure Supplemental/Bid Bulletins that
may be issued by the BAC. However, bidders who have submitted bids before
the issuance of the Supplemental/Bid Bulletin must be informed and allowed
to modify or withdraw their bids in accordance with ITB Clause 0.

C. Preparation of Bids

11. Language of Bids

The Bid, as well as all correspondence and documents relating to the Bid exchanged
by the Bidder and the Procuring Entity, shall be written in English. Supporting
documents and printed literature furnished by the Bidder may be in another language
provided they are accompanied by an accurate translation in English certified by the
appropriate embassy or consulate in the Philippines, in which case the English
translation shall govern, for purposes of interpretation of the Bid.

18
12. Documents Comprising the Bid: Eligibility and Technical
Components
12.1. Unless otherwise indicated in the BDS, the first envelope shall contain the
following eligibility and technical documents:

(a) Eligibility Documents –

Class "A" Documents:

(i) Registration certificate from the Securities and Exchange

Commission (SEC), Department of Trade and Industry (DTI)
for sole proprietorship, or Cooperative Development Authority
(CDA) for cooperatives, or any proof of such registration as
stated in the BDS;

(ii) Mayor‟s permit issued by the city or municipality where the

principal place of business of the prospective bidder is located;

(iii) Statement of all its ongoing and completed government and

private contracts including contracts awarded but not yet
started, if any, whether similar or not similar in nature and
complexity to the contract to be bid; and

Statement identifying the bidder‟s single largest completed

contract similar to the contract to be bid.

The statement shall include, for each contract, the following:

(iii.1) name of the contract;

(iii.2) date of the contract;

(iii.3) contract duration;

(iii.4) owner‟s name and address;

(iii.5) nature of work;

(iii.6) contractor‟s role (whether sole contractor,

subcontractor, or partner in a JV) and percentage of
participation;

(iii.7) total contract value at award;

(iii.8) date of completion or estimated completion time;

(iii.9) total contract value at completion, if applicable;

(iii.10) percentages of planned and actual accomplishments, if

applicable;

19
 (iii.11) value of outstanding works, if applicable;

(iii.12) the statement shall be supported by the notices of award

and/or notices to proceed issued by the owners; and

(iii.13) the statement shall be supported by the Constructors

Performance Evaluation System (CPES) rating sheets,
and/or certificates of completion and owner‟s
acceptance, if applicable;

(iv) Unless otherwise provided in the BDS, valid Philippine

Contractors Accreditation Board (PCAB) license and
registration for the type and cost of the contract for this Project;

(v) Audited financial statements, showing, among others, the

prospective total and current assets and liabilities, stamped
“received” by the BIR or its duly accredited and authorized
institutions, for the preceding calendar year which should not
be earlier than two (2) years from the date of bid submission;

(vi) NFCC computation in accordance with ITB Clause 5.5; and

(vii) Tax clearance per Executive Order 398, Series of 2005, as

finally reviewed and approved by the BIR.

Class "B" Document:

(viii) If applicable, valid Joint Venture Agreement (JVA) or, in lieu

thereof, duly notarized statements from all the potential joint
venture partners stating that they will enter into and abide by
the provisions of the JVA in the instance that the bid is
successful shall be included in the bid.

(b) Technical Documents –

(i) Bid security as prescribed in ITB Clause 0. If the Bidder opts

to submit the bid security in the form of:

(i.1) a bank draft/guarantee or an irrevocable letter of credit

issued by a foreign bank, it shall be accompanied by a
confirmation from a Universal or Commercial Bank; or

(i.2) a surety bond accompanied by a certification coming

from an authorized Insurance Commission that a surety
or insurance company is authorized to issue such
instrument;

(ii) Project Requirements, which shall include the following:

(ii.1) Organizational chart for the contract to be bid;

20
 (ii.2) List of contractor‟s personnel (viz, project Manager,
Project Engineers, Materials Engineers, and Foremen),
to be assigned to the contract to be bid, with their
complete qualification and experience data; and

(ii.3) List of contractor‟s equipment units, which are owned,

leased, and/or under purchase agreements, supported by
certification of availability of equipment from the
equipment lessor/vendor for the duration of the project;
and

(iii) Sworn statement in accordance with Section 25.2(b)(iv) of the

IRR of RA 9184 and using the form prescribed in Section IX.
Bidding Forms.

13. Documents Comprising the Bid: Financial Component

13.1. Unless otherwise stated in the BDS, the financial component of the bid shall
contain the following:

(a) Financial Bid Form in accordance with the form prescribed in Section
IX. Bidding Forms, and

(b) Any other document related to the financial component of the bid as
stated in the BDS.

13.2. (a) Unless indicated in the BDS, all Bids that exceed the ABC shall not be
accepted.

(b) Unless otherwise indicated in the BDS, for foreign-funded

procurement, a ceiling may be applied to bid prices provided the
following conditions are met:

(i) Bidding Documents are obtainable free of charge on a freely

accessible website. If payment of Bidding Documents is required
by the procuring entity, payment could be made upon the
submission of bids.

(ii) The procuring entity has procedures in place to ensure that the
ABC is based on recent estimates made by the engineer or the
responsible unit of the procuring entity and that the estimates are
based on adequate detailed engineering (in the case of works) and
reflect the quality, supervision and risk and inflationary factors,
as well as prevailing market prices, associated with the types of
works or goods to be procured.

(iii) The procuring entity has trained cost estimators on estimating

prices and analyzing bid variances. In the case of infrastructure
projects, the procuring entity must also have trained quantity
surveyors.

21
 (iv) The procuring entity has established a system to monitor and
report bid prices relative to ABC and engineer‟s/procuring
entity‟s estimate.

(v) The procuring entity has established a monitoring and evaluation

system for contract implementation to provide a feedback on
actual total costs of goods and works.

14. Alternative Bids

14.1. Alternative Bids shall be rejected. For this purpose, alternative bid is an offer
made by a Bidder in addition or as a substitute to its original bid which may be
included as part of its original bid or submitted separately therewith for
purposes of bidding. A bid with options is considered an alternative bid
regardless of whether said bid proposal is contained in a single envelope or
submitted in two (2) or more separate bid envelopes.

14.2. Bidders shall submit offers that comply with the requirements of the Bidding
Documents, including the basic technical design as indicated in the drawings
and specifications. Unless there is a value engineering clause in the BDS,
alternative bids shall not be accepted.

14.3. Each Bidder shall submit only one Bid, either individually or as a partner in a
JV. A Bidder who submits or participates in more than one bid (other than as
a subcontractor if a subcontractor is permitted to participate in more than one
bid) will cause all the proposals with the Bidder‟s participation to be
disqualified. This shall be without prejudice to any applicable criminal, civil
and administrative penalties that may be imposed upon the persons and
entities concerned.

15. Bid Prices

15.1. The contract shall be for the whole Works, as described in ITB Clause 1.1,
based on the priced Bill of Quantities submitted by the Bidder.

15.2. The Bidder shall fill in rates and prices for all items of the Works described in
the Bill of Quantities. Bids not addressing or providing all of the required
items in the Bidding Documents including, where applicable, bill of quantities,
shall be considered non-responsive and, thus, automatically disqualified. In
this regard, where a required item is provided, but no price is indicated, the
same shall be considered as non-responsive, but specifying a "0" (zero) for the
said item would mean that it is being offered for free to the Government.

15.3. All duties, taxes, and other levies payable by the Contractor under the
Contract, or for any other cause, prior to the deadline for submission of bids,
shall be included in the rates, prices, and total bid price submitted by the
Bidder.

15.4. All bid prices for the given scope of work in the contract as awarded shall be
considered as fixed prices, and therefore not subject to price escalation during
contract implementation, except under extraordinary circumstances as

22
 specified in GCC Clause 0.Price escalation may be allowed in extraordinary
circumstances as may be determined by the National Economic and
Development Authority in accordance with the Civil Code of the Philippines,
and upon the recommendation of the Procuring Entity. Furthermore, in cases
where the cost of the awarded contract is affected by any applicable new laws,
ordinances, regulations, or other acts of the GOP, promulgated after the date

of bid opening, a contract price adjustment shall be made or appropriate relief

shall be applied on a no loss-no gain basis.

16. Bid Currencies

16.1. All bid prices shall be quoted in Philippine Pesos unless otherwise provided in
the BDS. However, for purposes of bid evaluation, bids denominated in
foreign currencies shall be converted to Philippine currency based on the
exchange rate prevailing on the day of the Bid opening.

16.2. If so allowed in accordance with ITB Clause 0, the Procuring Entity for
purposes of bid evaluation and comparing the bid prices will convert the
amounts in various currencies in which the bid price is expressed to Philippine
Pesos at the exchange rate as published in the BSP reference rate bulletin on
the day of the bid opening.

16.3. Unless otherwise specified in the BDS, payment of the contract price shall be
made in Philippine Pesos.

17. Bid Validity

17.1. Bids shall remain valid for the period specified in the BDS which shall not
exceed one hundred twenty (120) calendar days from the date of the opening
of bids.

17.2. In exceptional circumstances, prior to the expiration of the bid validity period,
the Procuring Entity may request Bidders to extend the period of validity of
their bids. The request and the responses shall be made in writing. The bid
security described in ITB Clause 0 should also be extended corresponding
tothe extension of the bid validity period at the least. A Bidder may refuse the
request without forfeiting its bid security, but his bid shall no longer be
considered for further evaluation and award. A Bidder granting the request
shall not be required or permitted to modify its bid.

18. Bid Security

18.1. The bid security in the amount stated in the BDS shall be equal to the
percentage of the ABC in accordance with the following schedule:

Amount of Bid Security

Form of Bid Security
(Equal to Percentage of the ABC)
(a) Cash or cashier‟s/manager‟s check
issued by a Universal or Commercial Two percent (2%)
Bank.

23
 (b) Bank draft/guarantee or irrevocable
letter of credit issued by a Universal or
Commercial Bank: Provided, however,
that it shall be confirmed or
authenticated by a Universal or
Commercial Bank, if issued by a
foreign bank.
(c) Surety bond callable upon demand
issued by a surety or insurance
company duly certified by the Five percent (5%)
Insurance Commission as authorized to
issue such security; and/or
(d) Any combination of the foregoing. Proportionate to share of form
with respect to total amount of
security

For biddings conducted by local government units, the Bidder may also submit
bid securities in the form of cashier‟s/manager‟s check, bank draft/guarantee,
or irrevocable letter of credit from other banks certified by the BSP as
authorized to issue such financial statement.

18.2. The bid security should be valid for the period specified in the BDS. Any bid
not accompanied by an acceptable bid security shall be rejected by the
Procuring Entity as non-responsive.

18.3. No bid securities shall be returned to bidders after the opening of bids and
before contract signing, except to those that failed or declared as post-
disqualified, upon submission of a written waiver of their right to file a motion
for reconsideration and/or protest. Without prejudice on its forfeiture, Bid
Securities shall be returned only after the bidder with the Lowest Calculated
Responsive Bid has signed the contract and furnished the Performance
Security, but in no case later than the expiration of the Bid Security validity
period indicated in ITB Clause 0.

18.4. Upon signing and execution of the contract, pursuant to ITB Clause 0, and the
posting of the performance security, pursuant to ITB Clause 0, the successful
Bidder‟s Bid security will be discharged, but in no case later than the Bid
security validity period as indicated in ITB Clause 0.

18.5. The bid security may be forfeited:

(a) if a Bidder:

(i) withdraws its bid during the period of bid validity specified in
ITB Clause 17;

(ii) does not accept the correction of errors pursuant to ITB Clause
0;

(iii) fails to submit the requirements within the prescribed period, or

a finding against their veracity, as stated in ITB Clause 0;

24
 (iv) submission of eligibility requirements containing false
information or falsified documents;

(v) submission of bids that contain false information or falsified

documents, or the concealment of such information in the bids
in order to influence the outcome of eligibility screening or any
other stage of the public bidding;

(vi) allowing the use of one‟s name, or using the name of another
for purposes of public bidding;

(vii) withdrawal of a bid, or refusal to accept an award, or enter into

contract with the Government without justifiable cause, after
the Bidder had been adjudged as having submitted the Lowest
Calculated and Responsive Bid;

(viii) refusal or failure to post the required performance security

within the prescribed time;

(ix) refusal to clarify or validate in writing its bid during post-

qualification within a period of seven (7) calendar days from
receipt of the request for clarification;

(x) any documented attempt by a bidder to unduly influence the

outcome of the bidding in his favor;

(xi) failure of the potential joint venture partners to enter into the
joint venture after the bid is declared successful; or

(xii) all other acts that tend to defeat the purpose of the competitive
bidding, such as habitually withdrawing from bidding,
submitting late Bids or patently insufficient bid, for at least
three (3) times within a year, except for valid reasons.

(b) if the successful Bidder:

(i) fails to sign the contract in accordance with ITB Clause0;

(ii) fails to furnish performance security in accordance with ITB

Clause0.

19. Format and Signing of Bids

19.1. Bidders shall submit their bids through their duly authorized representative
using the appropriate forms provided in Section IX. Bidding Forms on or
before the deadline specified in the ITB Clause 0 in two (2) separate sealed
bid envelopes, and which shall be submitted simultaneously. The first shall
contain the technical component of the bid, including the eligibility
requirements under ITB Clause 0, and the second shall contain the financial
component of the bid.

25
 19.2. Forms as mentioned in ITB Clause 0 must be completed without any
alterations to their format, and no substitute form shall be accepted. All blank
spaces shall be filled in with the information requested.

19.3. The Bidder shall prepare an original of the first and second envelopes as
described in ITB Clauses 0 and 0. In addition, the Bidder shall submit copies
of the first and second envelopes. In the event of any discrepancy between the
original and the copies, the original shall prevail.

19.4. The bid, except for unamended printed literature, shall be signed, and each and
every page thereof shall be initialed, by the duly authorized representative/s of
the Bidder.

19.5. Any interlineations, erasures, or overwriting shall be valid only if they are
signed or initialed by the duly authorized representative/s of the Bidder.

20. Sealing and Marking of Bids

20.1. Bidders shall enclose their original eligibility and technical documents
described in ITB Clause 0, in one sealed envelope marked “ORIGINAL -
TECHNICAL COMPONENT”, and the original of their financial component
in another sealed envelope marked “ORIGINAL - FINANCIAL
COMPONENT”, sealing them all in an outer envelope marked “ORIGINAL
BID”.

20.2. Each copy of the first and second envelopes shall be similarly sealed duly
marking the inner envelopes as “COPY NO. ___ - TECHNICAL
COMPONENT” and “COPY NO. ___ – FINANCIAL COMPONENT” and
the outer envelope as “COPY NO. ___”, respectively. These envelopes
containing the original and the copies shall then be enclosed in one single
envelope.

20.3. The original and the number of copies of the Bid as indicated in the BDS shall
be typed or written in indelible ink and shall be signed by the bidder or its duly
authorized representative/s.

20.4. All envelopes shall:

(a) contain the name of the contract to be bid in capital letters;

(b) bear the name and address of the Bidder in capital letters;

(c) be addressed to the Procuring Entity‟s BAC identified in ITB Clause

0;

(d) bear the specific identification of this bidding process indicated in the
Invitation to Bid; and

(e) bear a warning “DO NOT OPEN BEFORE…” the date and time for
the opening of bids, in accordance with ITB Clause 0.

26
 20.5. If bids are not sealed and marked as required, the Procuring Entity will assume
no responsibility for the misplacement or premature opening of the bid.

D. Submission and Opening of Bids

21. Deadline for Submission of Bids

Bids must be received by the Procuring Entity‟s BAC at the address and on or before
the date and time indicated in the BDS.

22. Late Bids

Any bid submitted after the deadline for submission and receipt of bids prescribed by
the Procuring Entity, pursuant to ITB Clause 0, shall be declared “Late” and shall not
be accepted by the Procuring Entity.

23. Modification and Withdrawal of Bids

23.1. The Bidder may modify its bid after it has been submitted; provided that the
modification is received by the Procuring Entity prior to the deadline
prescribed for submission and receipt of bids. The Bidder shall not be allowed
to retrieve its original bid, but shall be allowed to submit another bid equally
sealed, properly identified, linked to its original bid marked as “TECHNICAL
MODIFICATION” or “FINANCIAL MODIFICATION” and stamped
“received” by the BAC. Bid modifications received after the applicable
deadline shall not be considered and shall be returned to the Bidder unopened.

23.2. A Bidder may, through a letter of withdrawal, withdraw its bid after it has
been submitted, for valid and justifiable reason; provided that the letter of
withdrawal is received by the Procuring Entity prior to the deadline prescribed
for submission and receipt of bids.

23.3. Bids requested to be withdrawn in accordance with ITB Clause 0 shall be

returned unopened to the Bidders. A Bidder may also express its intention not
to participate in the bidding through a letter which should reach and be
stamped by the BAC before the deadline for submission and receipt of bids. A
Bidder that withdraws its bid shall not be permitted to submit another bid,
directly or indirectly, for the same contract.

23.4. No bid may be modified after the deadline for submission of bids. No bid may
be withdrawn in the interval between the deadline for submission of bids and
the expiration of the period of bid validity specified by the Bidder on the
Financial Bid Form. Withdrawal of a bid during this interval shall result in the
forfeiture of the Bidder‟s bid security, pursuant to ITB Clause 0, and the
imposition of administrative, civil, and criminal sanctions as prescribed by RA
9184 and its IRR.

24. Opening and Preliminary Examination of Bids

24.1. The BAC shall open the first bid envelopes of Bidders in public as specified in
the BDS to determine each Bidder‟s compliance with the documents

27
 prescribed in ITB Clause 0. For this purpose, the BAC shall check the
submitted documents of each bidder against a checklist of required documents
to ascertain if they are all present, using a non-discretionary “pass/fail”
criterion. If a bidder submits the required document, it shall be rated “passed”
for that particular requirement. In this regard, bids that fail to include any
requirement or are incomplete or patently insufficient shall be considered as
“failed”. Otherwise, the BAC shall rate the said first bid envelope as “passed”.

24.2. Unless otherwise specified in the BDS, immediately after determining

compliance with the requirements in the first envelope, the BAC shall
forthwith open the second bid envelope of each remaining eligible bidder
whose first bid envelope was rated “passed”. The second envelope of each
complying bidder shall be opened within the same day. In case one or more of
the requirements in the second envelope of a particular bid is missing,
incomplete or patently insufficient, and/or if the submitted total bid price
exceeds the ABC unless otherwise provided in ITB Clause 0, the BAC shall
rate the bid concerned as “failed”. Only bids that are determined to contain all
the bid requirements for both components shall be rated “passed” and shall
immediately be considered for evaluation and comparison.

24.3. Letters of withdrawal shall be read out and recorded during bid opening, and
the envelope containing the corresponding withdrawn bid shall be returned to
the Bidder unopened. If the withdrawing Bidder‟s representative is in
attendance, the original bid and all copies thereof shall be returned to the
representative during the bid opening. If the representative is not in
attendance, the Bid shall be returned unopened by registered mail. The Bidder
may withdraw its bid prior to the deadline for the submission and receipt of
bids, provided that the corresponding letter of withdrawal contains a valid
authorization requesting for such withdrawal, subject to appropriate
administrative sanctions.

24.4. If a Bidder has previously secured a certification from the Procuring Entity to
the effect that it has previously submitted the above-enumerated Class “A”
Documents, the said certification may be submitted in lieu of the requirements
enumerated in ITB Clause 0, items (i) to (vi).

24.5. In the case of an eligible foreign Bidder as described in ITB Clause 0, the
Class “A” Documents enumerated in ITB Clause 0may be substituted with the
appropriate equivalent documents, if any, issued by the country of the foreign
Bidder concerned.

24.6. Each partner of a joint venture agreement shall likewise submit the documents
required in ITB Clauses 0 and 0. Submission of documents required under
ITB Clauses 0 to 0by any of the joint venture partners constitutes compliance.

24.7. A Bidder determined as “failed” has three (3) calendar days upon written
notice or, if present at the time of bid opening, upon verbal notification within
which to file a request for reconsideration with the BAC: Provided, however,
that the request for reconsideration shall not be granted if it is established that
the finding of failure is due to the fault of the Bidder concerned: Provided,
further, that the BAC shall decide on the request for reconsideration within

28
 seven (7) calendar days from receipt thereof. If a failed Bidder signifies his
intent to file a request for reconsideration, the BAC shall keep the bid
envelopes of the said failed Bidder unopened and/or duly sealed until such
time that the request for reconsideration or protest has been resolved.

E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids

25. Process to be Confidential

25.1. Members of the BAC, including its staff and personnel, as well as its
Secretariat and TWG, are prohibited from making or accepting any kind of
communication with any bidder regarding the evaluation of their bids until the
issuance of the Notice of Award, unless n the case of ITB Clause 26.

25.2. Any effort by a bidder to influence the Procuring Entity in the Procuring
Entity‟s decision in respect of Bid evaluation, Bid comparison or contract
award will result in the rejection of the Bidder‟s Bid.

26. Clarification of Bids

To assist in the evaluation, comparison and post-qualification of the bids, the
Procuring Entity may ask in writing any Bidder for a clarification of its bid. All
responses to requests for clarification shall be in writing. Any clarification submitted
by a Bidder in respect to its bid and that is not in response to a request by the
Procuring Entity shall not be considered

27. Detailed Evaluation and Comparison of Bids

27.1. The Procuring Entity will undertake the detailed evaluation and comparison of
Bids which have passed the opening and preliminary examination of Bids,
pursuant to ITB Clause 24, in order to determine the Lowest Calculated Bid.

27.2. In evaluating the Bids to get the Lowest Calculated Bid, the Procuring Entity
shall undertake the following:

(a) The detailed evaluation of the financial component of the bids, to

establish the correct calculated prices of the bids; and

(b) The ranking of the total bid prices as so calculated from the lowest to
highest. The bid with the lowest price shall be identified as the Lowest
Calculated Bid.

27.3. The Procuring Entity's BAC shall immediately conduct a detailed evaluation
of all bids rated “passed,” using non-discretionary “pass/fail” criterion. The
BAC shall consider the following in the evaluation of bids:

(a) Completeness of the bid. Unless the ITB specifically allows partial
bids, bids not addressing or providing all of the required items in the
Schedule of Requirements including, where applicable, bill of
quantities, shall be considered non-responsive and, thus, automatically
disqualified. In this regard, where a required item is provided, but no

29
 price is indicated, the same shall be considered as non-responsive, but
specifying a "0" (zero) for the said item would mean that it is being
offered for free to the Procuring Entity; and

(b) Arithmetical corrections. Consider computational errors and omissions

to enable proper comparison of all eligible bids. It may also consider
bid modifications if expressly allowed in the BDS. Any adjustment
shall be calculated in monetary terms to determine the calculated
prices.

27.4. Based on the detailed evaluation of bids, those that comply with the above-
mentioned requirements shall be ranked in the ascending order of their total
calculated bid prices, as evaluated and corrected for computational errors,
discounts and other modifications, to identify the Lowest Calculated Bid.
Total calculated bid prices, as evaluated and corrected for computational
errors, discounts and other modifications, which exceed the ABC shall not be
considered, unless otherwise indicated in the BDS.

27.5. The Procuring Entity‟s evaluation of bids shall only be based on the bid price
quoted in the Financial Bid Form

27.6. Bids shall be evaluated on an equal footing to ensure fair competition. For
this purpose, all bidders shall be required to include in their bids the cost of all
taxes, such as, but not limited to, value added tax (VAT), income tax, local
taxes, and other fiscal levies and duties which shall be itemized in the bid form
and reflected in the detailed estimates. Such bids, including said taxes, shall
be the basis for bid evaluation and comparison.

28. Post Qualification

28.1. The Procuring Entity shall determine to its satisfaction whether the Bidder that
is evaluated as having submitted the Lowest Calculated Bid (LCB) complies
with and is responsive to all the requirements and conditions specified in ITB
Clauses 5, 0, and 0.

28.2. Within a non-extendible period of three (3) calendar days from receipt by the
Bidder of the notice from the BAC that it submitted the LCB, the Bidder shall
submit the following documentary requirements:

(a) Latest income and business tax return in the form specified in the BDS;

(b) Certificate of PhilGEPS Registration; and

(c) Other appropriate licenses and permits required by law and stated in
the BDS.

Failure of the Bidder declared as LCB to duly submit the requirements under
this Clause or a finding against the veracity of such, shall be ground for
forfeiture of the bid security and disqualification of the Bidder for award.

30
 28.3. The determination shall be based upon an examination of the documentary
evidence of the Bidder‟s qualifications submitted pursuant to ITB Clauses
0and 0, as well as other information as the Procuring Entity deems necessary
and appropriate, using a non-discretionary “pass/fail” criterion.

28.4. If the BAC determines that the Bidder with the Lowest Calculated Bid passes
all the criteria for post-qualification, it shall declare the said bid as the Lowest
Calculated Responsive Bid, and recommend to the Head of the Procuring
Entity the award of contract to the said Bidder at its submitted price or its
calculated bid price, whichever is lower, subject to ITB Clause 0.

28.5. A negative determination shall result in rejection of the Bidder‟s Bid, in which
event the Procuring Entity shall proceed to the next Lowest Calculated Bid to
make a similar determination of that Bidder‟s capabilities to perform
satisfactorily. If the second Bidder, however, fails the post qualification, the
procedure for post qualification shall be repeated for the Bidder with the next
Lowest Calculated Bid, and so on until the Lowest Calculated and Responsive
Bid is determined for contract award.

28.6. Within a period not exceeding seven (7) calendar days from the date of receipt
of the recommendation of the BAC, the Head of the Procuring Entity shall
approve or disapprove the said recommendation. In the case of government
owned and government-owned and/or -controlled corporations (GOCCs) and
government financial institutions (GFIs), the period provided herein shall be
fifteen (15) calendar days.

29. Reservation Clause

29.1. Notwithstanding the eligibility or post-qualification of a bidder, the Procuring
Entity concerned reserves the right to review its qualifications at any stage of
the procurement process if it has reasonable grounds to believe that a
misrepresentation has been made by the said bidder, or that there has been a
change in the Bidder‟s capability to undertake the project from the time it
submitted its eligibility requirements. Should such review uncover any
misrepresentation made in the eligibility and bidding requirements, statements
or documents, or any changes in the situation of the Bidder which will affect
its capability to undertake the project so that it fails the preset eligibility or bid
evaluation criteria, the Procuring Entity shall consider the said Bidder as
ineligible and shall disqualify it from submitting a bid or from obtaining an
award or contract.

29.2. Based on the following grounds, the Procuring Entity reserves the right to
reject any and all Bids, declare a Failure of Bidding at any time prior to the
contract award, or not to award the contract, without thereby incurring any
liability, and make no assurance that a contract shall be entered into as a result
of the bidding:

(a) if there is prima facie evidence of collusion between appropriate public

officers or employees of the Procuring Entity, or between the BAC and
any of the bidders, or if the collusion is between or among the bidders
themselves, or between a bidder and a third party, including any act

31
 which restricts, suppresses or nullifies or tends to restrict, suppress or
nullify competition;

(b) if the Procuring Entity‟s BAC is found to have failed in following the
prescribed bidding procedures; or

(c) for any justifiable and reasonable ground where the award of the
contract will not redound to the benefit of the Government as follows:

(i) If the physical and economic conditions have significantly

changed so as to render the project no longer economically,
financially or technically feasible as determined by the head of
the procuring entity;

(ii) If the project is no longer necessary as determined by the head

of the procuring entity; and

(iii) If the source of funds for the project has been withheld or
reduced through no fault of the Procuring Entity.

29.3. In addition, the Procuring Entity may likewise declare a failure of bidding
when:

(a) No bids are received;

(b) All prospective bidders are declared ineligible;

(c) All bids fail to comply with all the bid requirements or fail post-
qualification; or

(d) The bidder with the Lowest Calculated Responsive Bid refuses,
without justifiable cause to accept the award of contract, and no award
is made.

F. Award of Contract
30. Contract Award
30.1. Subject to ITB Clause 0, the Procuring Entity shall award the contract to the
Bidder whose Bid has been determined to be the Lowest Calculated and
Responsive Bid (LCRB).

30.2. Prior to the expiration of the period of Bid validity, the Procuring Entity shall
notify the successful Bidder in writing that its Bid has been accepted, through
a Notice of Award received personally or sent by registered mail or
electronically, receipt of which must be confirmed in writing within two (2)
days by the LCRB and submitted personally or sent by registered mail or
electronically to the Procuring Entity.

30.3. Notwithstanding the issuance of the Notice of Award, award of contract shall
be subject to the following conditions:

32
 (a) Submission of the following documents within the prescribed period
from receipt by the Bidder of the notice that it has the Lowest
Calculated and Responsive Bid:

(i) Valid JVA, if applicable, within ten (10) calendar days;

(ii) Valid PCAB license and registration for the type and cost of the
contract to be bid for foreign bidders, within thirty (30)
calendar days, if allowed under a Treaty or International or
Executive Agreement mentioned in ITB Clause 0;

(b) Posting of the performance security in accordance with ITB Clause 0;

(c) Signing of the contract as provided in ITB Clause 0; and

(d) Approval by higher authority, if required.

31. Signing of the Contract

31.1. At the same time as the Procuring Entity notifies the successful Bidder that its
Bid has been accepted, the Procuring Entity shall send the Contract Form to
the Bidder, which Contract has been provided in the Bidding Documents,
incorporating therein all agreements between the parties.

31.2. Within ten (10) calendar days from receipt of the Notice of Award, the
successful Bidder shall post the required performance security, sign and date
the contract and return it to the Procuring Entity.

31.3. The Procuring Entity shall enter into contract with the successful Bidder
within the same ten (10) calendar day period provided that all the documentary
requirements are complied with.

31.4. The following documents shall form part of the contract:

(a) Contract Agreement;

(b) Bidding Documents;

(c) Winning bidder‟s bid, including the Technical and Financial Proposals,
and all other documents/statements submitted;

(d) Performance Security;

(e) Credit line in accordance with ITB Clause 0, if applicable;

(f) Notice of Award of Contract; and

(g) Other contract documents that may be required by existing laws and/or
specified in the BDS.

33
32. Performance Security
32.1. To guarantee the faithful performance by the winning Bidder of its obligations
under the contract, it shall post a performance security within a maximum
period of ten (10) calendar days from the receipt of the Notice of Award from
the Procuring Entity and in no case later than the signing of the contract.

32.2. The performance security shall be denominated in Philippine Pesos and posted
in favor of the Procuring Entity in an amount equal to the percentage of the
total contract price as stated in the BDS in accordance with the following
schedule:

Amount of Performance Security

Form of Performance Security (Equal to Percentage of the Total
Contract Price)
(a) Cash or cashier‟s/manager‟s check
issued by a Universal or
Commercial Bank.
(b) Bank draft/guarantee or irrevocable
letter of credit issued by a Universal
Ten percent (10%)
or Commercial Bank: Provided,
however, that it shall be confirmed
or authenticated by a Universal or
Commercial Bank, if issued by a
foreign bank.
(c) Surety bond callable upon demand
issued by a surety or insurance Thirty percent (30%)
company duly certified by the
Insurance Commission as authorized
to issue such security; and/or
(d) Any combination of the foregoing. Proportionate to share of form with
respect to total amount of security

32.3. Failure of the successful Bidder to comply with the above-mentioned

requirement shall constitute sufficient ground for the annulment of the award
and forfeiture of the bid security, in which event the Procuring Entity shall
initiate and complete the post qualification of the second Lowest Calculated
Bid. The procedure shall be repeated until the Lowest Calculated and
Responsive Bid is identified and selected for contract award. However if no
Bidder passed post-qualification, the BAC shall declare the bidding a failure
and conduct a re-bidding with re-advertisement.

33. Notice to Proceed

33.1. Within three (3) calendar days from the date of approval of the Contract by the
appropriate government approving authority, the Procuring Entity shall issue
its Notice to Proceed to the Bidder.

34
33.2. The contract effectivity date shall be provided in the Notice to Proceed by the
Procuring Entity, which date shall not be later than seven (7) calendar days
from the issuance of the Notice to Proceed.

35
Section III. Bid Data Sheet

36
 Bid Data Sheet
ITB Clause
1.1 The PROCURING ENTITY is the Department of Transportation and
Communications (DOTC).

The name of the Contract is Construction of Double Track from Sucat to

Alabang Section of the Philippine National Railways.

2 The Funding Source is:

The Government of the Philippines (GOP) through the General

Appropriations Act of CY 2015, intends to apply the sum of One Hundred
Forty-Four Million Three Hundred Seventy-Seven Thousand Six Hundred
Twenty-Four Pesos and Sixty-Two Centavos (Php144,377,624.62) being
the Approved Budget for the Contract (ABC), inclusive of all applicable
taxes, duties, fees and/or other charges.

The name of the Project is Construction of Double Track from Sucat to

Alabang Section of the Philippine National Railways

3.1 No further instructions.

5.1 No further instructions.

5.2 No further instructions.

5.4 The Bidder must have completed, within the period specified in the
Invitation to Bid and ITB Clause 12.1(a)(iii), at least one (1) contract that
5.4(a) is similar to this Project, equivalent to at least fifty percent (50%) of the
ABC.

For this purpose, similar contracts shall refer to Construction of Railway

8.1 Subcontracting is not allowed.

8.2 Not applicable.

9.1 DOTC will hold a pre-bid conference for this Project on 24 July 2015,
2:00 PM, at the 16th Floor, DOTC Multi-purpose Room, The Columbia
Tower Ortigas Avenue, Mandaluyong City

10.1 The Procuring Entity‟s address is:

Department of Transportation and Communications

Primary Bids and Awards Committee Office (BAC)
The Columbia Tower, Ortigas Avenue, Mandaluyong City
Tel. No. 790-8300 local 235 or 272

37
10.3 No further instructions.

12.1 No further instructions.

12.1 (a)(i) No other acceptable proof of registration is recognized.

No further instructions.
12.1 (a)(i)

12.1(a)(iii) 1. Duly signed Statement of all Ongoing Government and Private

Construction Contracts including contracts awarded but not yet started
(SF-INFR-15).

2. Duly signed Statement showing at least one (1) Completed Government

& Private Construction Contract which is similar in nature (SF-INFR-16).

12.1(a)(iv) The PCAB

Registration for this project is Medium B for Roads, Highways, Pavement,

Railways, Airport Horizontal Structure, and Bridges.

For joint venture bidders, a Joint License issued by the PCAB pursuant to
Section 38 of RA4566, and not a PCAB license and registration individually
issued to each joint venture partner must be submitted. Failure of the joint
venture bidder, to submit a Joint License may be a ground for
disqualification despite the submission of the individual licenses of each
joint venture partner.

12.1(b) (ii)(ii.2) List of Contractor‟s Personnel to be assigned to the contract to be bid with
their respective curriculum vitae showing, among others, their educational
attainment, professional qualification and experiences (SF-INFR-48), as
follows:

1. Project Manager
2. Civil Engineer (licensed)
3. Materials Engineer (duly accredited by DPWH)
4. Safety Officer (with certificate of training in occupational safety and
health
Duly signed statement of Availability of Key Personnel and Equipment
(SF-INFR-18)
12.1(b) (ii)(ii.3) List of Contractor‟s Equipment OWNED/LEASED assigned to the
Proposed Contract (SF-INFR-49), as indicated in the Invitation to Bid:

 One (1)-Asphalt Distributor

 One (1)-Asphalt Paver
 One (1)-Cargo Truck
 One (1)-Crane
 One (1)-Crawler tractor with Dozer
 One (1)-Excavator
 One (1)-Forklift

38
  One (1)-Generator
 One (1)-Hauling dump truck
 One (1)-Hauling Truck
 One (1)-High Bed Trailer Truck
 One (1)-Hydraulic Backhoe, Crawler-Mounted Excavator
 One (1)-Job Mixed concrete 4-bagger
 One(1)-Mechanized rail weld trimming machine
 One (1)-Motorized Skates
 One (1)-One Bagger Concrete Mixer
 One (1)-Payloader
 One (1)-Pnuematice Roller
 One (1)-Rail grinding machine
 One (1)-Railmounted Cargo Truck
 One (1)-Railmounted Truck
 One (1)-Tandem Roller
 One (1)-Thermit Welding tools & equipment
 One (1)-Truck Crane
 One (1)-Truck Mounted Crane
 One (1)-Truck w/ Mounted Lift
 One (1)-Water truck
 Two (2)-Dump truck
 Two (2)-Rail Mounted Cargo Trucks
 Two (2)-Rail Mounted Hauling Equipment
 Two (2)-Smooth Drums
13.1 Checklist of Financial Components

1. Bid Prices in the Bill of Quantities in the prescribed form;

2. Detailed Estimates;
3. Summary sheet indicating the unit prices of construction materials,
labor rates and equipment (OWNED/LEASED) (Pls. see Invitation to
Bid) used in coming up with the bid; and
4. Cash flow by quarter and payment schedules.

13.1(b) The ABC is One Hundred Forty-Four Million Three Hundred Seventy-
Seven Thousand Six Hundred Twenty-Four Pesos and Sixty-Two
Centavos (Php 144,377,624.62). Any bid with a financial component
exceeding this amount shall not be accepted.
14.2 No further instructions.

15.4 No further instruction.

16.1 The bid prices shall be quoted in Philippine Pesos.

17.1 Bids will be valid until One Hundred Twenty (120) calendar days from
the date of the opening of bids.
18.1 The bid security shall be in the following amount:

1. The amount of Two Million Eight Hundred Eighty Seven Thousand

Five Hundred Fifty Two Pesos and 49/100 (Php 2,887,552.49), or two

39
 percent (2%) of the ABC if bid security is in cash, cashier‟s/manager‟s
check, bank draft/guarantee or irrevocable letter of credit;

2. The amount Seven Million Two Hundred Eighteen Thousand Eight

Hundred Eighty One Pesos and 23/100 (Php 7,218,881.23), or five
percent (5%) of the ABC if bid security is in Surety Bond;

3. Any combination of the foregoing proportionate to the share of form

with respect to total amount of security; or

4. Bid Securing Declaration.

18.2 The bid security shall be valid until One Hundred Twenty (120)
calendar days from the date of the opening of bids.
20.3 Each Bidder shall submit One (1) original and Two (2) copies of the first
and second components of its bid.
21 The address for submission of bids is:

Department of Transportation and Communications

Bids and Awards Committee Office
15th Floor, Unit 153. The Columbia Tower,
Ortigas Avenue, Mandaluyong City
Tel. No. : 790-8300 local 235 or 272
Fax No.: 654-7725

The deadline for submission of bids is 07 August 2015, 2:00 PM.

24.1 The place of bid opening is DOTC, Unit 167, The Columbia Tower,
Ortigas Avenue, Mandaluyong City.

The date and time of bid opening is 07 August 2015, 2:00 PM.

24.2 No further instructions.

27.3(b) Bid modifications are not allowed.

27.4 No further instructions

28.2(a) Only tax returns filed and taxes paid through the BIR Electronic Filing and
Payment System (EFPS) shall be accepted.

NOTE: The latest income and business tax returns are those within the
last six months preceding the date of bid submission.

28.2(c) Additional document:

Valid Certificate of Registration including the Tax Identification Number

and photocopy of TIN Card.

40
31.4(g) Construction schedule and S-curve, manpower schedule, construction
methods, equipment utilization schedule, construction safety and health
program approved by the Department of Labor and Employment, and
PERT/CPM.

Company must be ISO Certified by accredited certification body/ies.

32.2 The performance security shall be in the following amount:

1. The amount of (10% of the total contract amount),if performance

security is in cash, cashier‟s/manager‟s check, bank draft/guarantee or
irrevocable letter of credit;

2. The amount of (30% of the total contract amount), if performance

security is in Surety Bond; or

3. Any combination of the foregoing proportionate to the share of form

with respect to total amount of security.

41
Section IV. General Conditions of Contract

42
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................45
2. INTERPRETATION ......................................................................................................47
3. GOVERNING LANGUAGE AND LAW .....................................................................47
4. COMMUNICATIONS ...................................................................................................47
5. POSSESSION OF SITE .................................................................................................48
6. THE CONTRACTOR’S OBLIGATIONS ...................................................................48
7. PERFORMANCE SECURITY .....................................................................................48
8. SUBCONTRACTING ....................................................................................................49
9. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ...........................................................................................49
10. SITE INVESTIGATION REPORTS ............................................................................50
11. THE PROCURING ENTITY, LICENSES AND PERMITS .....................................50
12. CONTRACTOR’S RISK AND WARRANTY SECURITY .......................................50
13. LIABILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR .......................................................................52
14. PROCURING ENTITY’S RISK ...................................................................................52
15. INSURANCE...................................................................................................................53
16. TERMINATION FOR DEFAULT OF CONTRACTOR ...........................................54
17. TERMINATION FOR DEFAULT OF PROCURING ENTITY ...............................55
18. TERMINATION FOR OTHER CAUSES ...................................................................55
19. PROCEDURES FOR TERMINATION OF CONTRACTS ......................................57
20. FORCE MAJEURE, RELEASE FROM PERFORMANCE .....................................59
21. RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES.....................................................................................60
22. SUSPENSION OF LOAN, CREDIT, GRANT, OR APPROPRIATION .................60
23. PROCURING ENTITY’S REPRESENTATIVE’S DECISIONS..............................61
24. APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS AND TEMPORARY WORKS BY THE
PROCURING ENTITY’S REPRESENTATIVE ........................................................61
25. ACCELERATION AND DELAYS ORDERED BY THE PROCURING
ENTITY’S REPRESENTATIVE ..................................................................................61
26. EXTENSION OF THE INTENDED COMPLETION DATE ....................................61
27. RIGHT TO VARY ..........................................................................................................62
28. CONTRACTORS RIGHT TO CLAIM .......................................................................62
29. DAYWORKS ..................................................................................................................62
30. EARLY WARNING .......................................................................................................62
31. PROGRAM OF WORK.................................................................................................63

43
32. MANAGEMENT CONFERENCES .............................................................................63
33. BILL OF QUANTITIES ................................................................................................64
34. INSTRUCTIONS, INSPECTIONS AND AUDITS .....................................................64
35. IDENTIFYING DEFECTS ............................................................................................64
36. COST OF REPAIRS ......................................................................................................65
37. CORRECTION OF DEFECTS .....................................................................................65
38. UNCORRECTED DEFECTS........................................................................................65
39. ADVANCE PAYMENT .................................................................................................65
40. PROGRESS PAYMENTS .............................................................................................66
41. PAYMENT CERTIFICATES .......................................................................................66
42. RETENTION ..................................................................................................................67
43. VARIATION ORDERS .................................................................................................68
44. CONTRACT COMPLETION .......................................................................................69
45. SUSPENSION OF WORK.............................................................................................69
46. PAYMENT ON TERMINATION.................................................................................70
47. EXTENSION OF CONTRACT TIME .........................................................................71
48. PRICE ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................................72
49. COMPLETION...............................................................................................................72
50. TAKING OVER..............................................................................................................72
51. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS....................................................72

44
1. Definitions
For purposes of this Clause, boldface type is used to identify defined terms.

1.1. The Arbiter is the person appointed jointly by the Procuring Entity and the
Contractor to resolve disputes in the first instance, as provided for in GCC
Clause 0.

1.2. Bill of Quantities refers to a list of the specific items of the Work and their
corresponding unit prices, lump sums, and/or provisional sums.

1.3. The Completion Date is the date of completion of the Works as certified by
the Procuring Entity‟s Representative, in accordance with GCC Clause 0.

1.4. The Contract is the contract between the Procuring Entity and the Contractor
to execute, complete, and maintain the Works.

1.5. The Contract Price is the price stated in the Letter of Acceptance and
thereafter to be paid by the Procuring Entity to the Contractor for the
execution of the Works in accordance with this Contract.

1.6. Contract Time Extension is the allowable period for the Contractor to
complete the Works in addition to the original Completion Date stated in this
Contract.

1.7. The Contractor is the juridical entity whose proposal has been accepted by
the Procuring Entity and to whom the Contract to execute the Work was
awarded.

1.8. The Contractor’s Bid is the signed offer or proposal submitted by the
Contractor to the Procuring Entity in response to the Bidding Documents.

1.9. Days are calendar days; months are calendar months.

1.10. Dayworks are varied work inputs subject to payment on a time basis for the
Contractor‟s employees and Equipment, in addition to payments for associated
Materials and Plant.

1.11. A Defect is any part of the Works not completed in accordance with the
Contract.

1.12. The Defects Liability Certificate is the certificate issued by Procuring

Entity‟s Representative upon correction of defects by the Contractor.

1.13. The Defects Liability Period is the one year period between contract
completion and final acceptance within which the Contractor assumes the
responsibility to undertake the repair of any damage to the Works at his own
expense.

1.14. Drawings are graphical presentations of the Works. They include all
supplementary details, shop drawings, calculations, and other information
provided or approved for the execution of this Contract.

45
1.15. Equipment refers to all facilities, supplies, appliances, materials or things
required for the execution and completion of the Work provided by the
Contractor and which shall not form or are not intended to form part of the
Permanent Works.

1.16. The Intended Completion Date refers to the date specified in the SCC when
the Contractor is expected to have completed the Works. The Intended
Completion Date may be revised only by the Procuring Entity‟s
Representative by issuing an extension of time or an acceleration order.

1.17. Materials are all supplies, including consumables, used by the Contractor for
incorporation in the Works.

1.18. The Notice to Proceed is a written notice issued by the Procuring Entity or the
Procuring Entity‟s Representative to the Contractor requiring the latter to
begin the commencement of the work not later than a specified or
determinable date.

1.19. Permanent Works all permanent structures and all other project features and
facilities required to be constructed and completed in accordance with this
Contract which shall be delivered to the Procuring Entity and which shall
remain at the Site after the removal of all Temporary Works.

1.20. Plant refers to the machinery, apparatus, and the like intended to form an
integral part of the Permanent Works.

1.21. The Procuring Entity is the party who employs the Contractor to carry out
the Works stated in the SCC.

1.22. The Procuring Entity’s Representative refers to the Head of the Procuring
Entity or his duly authorized representative, identified in the SCC, who shall
be responsible for supervising the execution of the Works and administering
this Contract.

1.23. The Site is the place provided by the Procuring Entity where the Works shall
be executed and any other place or places which may be designated in the
SCC, or notified to the Contractor by the Procuring Entity‟s Representative as
forming part of the Site.

1.24. Site Investigation Reports are those that were included in the Bidding
Documents and are factual and interpretative reports about the surface and
subsurface conditions at the Site.

1.25. Slippage is a delay in work execution occurring when actual accomplishment

falls below the target as measured by the difference between the scheduled and
actual accomplishment of the Work by the Contractor as established from the
work schedule. This is actually described as a percentage of the whole Works.

1.26. Specifications mean the description of Works to be done and the qualities of
materials to be used, the equipment to be installed and the mode of
construction.

46
 1.27. The Start Date, as specified in the SCC, is the date when the Contractor is
obliged to commence execution of the Works. It does not necessarily coincide
with any of the Site Possession Dates.

1.28. A Subcontractor is any person or organization to whom a part of the Works

has been subcontracted by the Contractor, as allowed by the Procuring Entity,
but not any assignee of such person.

1.29. Temporary Works are works designed, constructed, installed, and removed
by the Contractor that are needed for construction or installation of the
Permanent Works.

1.30. Work(s)refer to the Permanent Works and Temporary Works to be executed

by the Contractor in accordance with this Contract, including (i) the furnishing
of all labor, materials, equipment and others incidental, necessary or
convenient to the complete execution of the Works; (ii) the passing of any
tests before acceptance by the Procuring Entity‟s Representative; (iii) and the
carrying out of all duties and obligations of the Contractor imposed by this
Contract as described in the SCC.

2. Interpretation
2.1. In interpreting the Conditions of Contract, singular also means plural, male
also means female or neuter, and the other way around. Headings have no
significance. Words have their normal meaning under the language of this
Contract unless specifically defined. The Procuring Entity‟s Representative
will provide instructions clarifying queries about the Conditions of Contract.

2.2. If sectional completion is specified in the SCC, references in the Conditions of

Contract to the Works, the Completion Date, and the Intended Completion Date
apply to any Section of the Works (other than references to the Completion Date
and Intended Completion Date for the whole of the Works).

3. Governing Language and Law

3.1. This Contract has been executed in the English language, which shall be the
binding and controlling language for all matters relating to the meaning or
interpretation of this Contract. All correspondence and other documents
pertaining to this Contract which are exchanged by the parties shall be written
in English.

3.2. This Contract shall be interpreted in accordance with the laws of the Republic
of the Philippines.

4. Communications
Communications between parties that are referred to in the Conditions shall be
effective only when in writing. A notice shall be effective only when it is received by
the concerned party.

47
5. Possession of Site
5.1. On the date specified in the SCC, the Procuring Entity shall grant the
Contractor possession of so much of the Site as may be required to enable it to
proceed with the execution of the Works. If the Contractor suffers delay or
incurs cost from failure on the part of the Procuring Entity to give possession
in accordance with the terms of this clause, the Procuring Entity‟s
Representative shall give the Contractor a Contract Time Extension and certify
such sum as fair to cover the cost incurred, which sum shall be paid by
Procuring Entity.

5.2. If possession of a portion is not given by the date stated in the SCC Clause 0,
the Procuring Entity will be deemed to have delayed the start of the relevant
activities. The resulting adjustments in contact time to address such delay
shall be in accordance with GCC Clause 0.

5.3. The Contractor shall bear all costs and charges for special or temporary right-
of-way required by it in connection with access to the Site. The Contractor
shall also provide at his own cost any additional facilities outside the Site
required by it for purposes of the Works.

5.4. The Contractor shall allow the Procuring Entity‟s Representative and any
person authorized by the Procuring Entity‟s Representative access to the Site
and to any place where work in connection with this Contract is being carried
out or is intended to be carried out.

6. The Contractor’s Obligations

6.1. The Contractor shall carry out the Works properly and in accordance with this
Contract. The Contractor shall provide all supervision, labor, Materials, Plant
and Contractor's Equipment, which may be required. All Materials and Plant
on Site shall be deemed to be the property of the Procuring Entity.

6.2. The Contractor shall commence execution of the Works on the Start Date and
shall carry out the Works in accordance with the Program of Work submitted
by the Contractor, as updated with the approval of the ProcuringEntity‟s
Representative, and complete them by the Intended Completion Date.

6.3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all activities on the Site.

6.4. The Contractor shall carry out all instructions of the Procuring Entity‟s
Representative that comply with the applicable laws where the Site is located.

6.5. The Contractor shall employ the key personnel named in the Schedule of Key
Personnel, as referred to in the SCC, to carry out the supervision of the
Works. The Procuring Entity will approve any proposed replacement of key
personnel only if their relevant qualifications and abilities are equal to or
better than those of the personnel listed in the Schedule.

6.6. If the Procuring Entity‟s Representative asks the Contractor to remove a

member of the Contractor‟s staff or work force, for justifiable cause, the

48
 Contractor shall ensure that the person leaves the Site within seven (7) days
and has no further connection with the Work in this Contract.

6.7. During Contract implementation, the Contractor and his subcontractors shall
abide at all times by all labor laws, including child labor related enactments,
and other relevant rules.

6.8. The Contractor shall submit to the Procuring Entity for consent the name and
particulars of the person authorized to receive instructions on behalf of the
Contractor.

6.9. The Contractor shall cooperate and share the Site with other contractors,
public authorities, utilities, and the Procuring Entity between the dates given
in the schedule of other contractors particularly when they shall require access
to the Site. The Contractor shall also provide facilities and services for them
during this period. The Procuring Entity may modify the schedule of other
contractors, and shall notify the Contractor of any such modification thereto.

6.10. Should anything of historical or other interest or of significant value be

unexpectedly discovered on the Site, it shall be the property of the Procuring
Entity. The Contractor shall notify the Procuring Entity‟s Representative of
such discoveries and carry out the Procuring Entity‟s Representative‟s
instructions in dealing with them.

7. Performance Security
7.1. Within ten (10) calendar days from receipt of the Notice of Award from the
Procuring Entity but in no case later than the signing of the contract by both
parties, the Contractor shall furnish the performance security in any the forms
prescribed in ITB Clause 0.

7.2. The performance security posted in favor of the Procuring Entity shall be
forfeited in the event it is established that the Contractor is in default in any of
its obligations under the Contract.

7.3. The performance security shall remain valid until issuance by the Procuring
Entity of the Certificate of Final Acceptance.

7.4. The performance security may be released by the Procuring Entity and
returned to the Contractor after the issuance of the Certificate of Final
Acceptance subject to the following conditions:

(a) There are no pending claims against the Contractor or the surety
company filed by the Procuring Entity;

(b) The Contractor has no pending claims for labor and materials filed
against it; and

(c) Other terms specified in the SCC.

7.5. The Contractor shall post an additional performance security following the
amount and form specified in ITB Clause 0 to cover any cumulative increase

49
 of more than ten percent (10%) over the original value of the contract as a
result of amendments to order or change orders, extra work orders and
supplemental agreements, as the case may be. The Contractor shall cause the
extension of the validity of the performance security to cover approved
contract time extensions.

7.6. In case of a reduction in the contract value or for partially completed Works
under the contract which are usable and accepted by the Procuring Entity the
use of which, in the judgment of the implementing agency or the Procuring
Entity, will not affect the structural integrity of the entire project, the
Procuring Entity shall allow a proportional reduction in the original
performance security, provided that any such reduction is more than ten
percent (10%) and that the aggregate of such reductions is not more than fifty
percent (50%) of the original performance security.

7.7. Unless otherwise indicated in the SCC, the Contractor, by entering into the
Contract with the Procuring Entity, acknowledges the right of the Procuring
Entity to institute action pursuant to Act 3688 against any subcontractor be
they an individual, firm, partnership, corporation, or association supplying the
Contractor with labor, materials and/or equipment for the performance of this
Contract.

8. Subcontracting
8.1. Unless otherwise indicated in the SCC, the Contractor cannot subcontract
Works more than the percentage specified in ITB Clause 0.

8.2. Subcontracting of any portion of the Works does not relieve the Contractor of
any liability or obligation under this Contract. The Contractor will be
responsible for the acts, defaults, and negligence of any subcontractor, its
agents, servants or workmen as fully as if these were the Contractor‟s own
acts, defaults, or negligence, or those of its agents, servants or workmen.

8.3. Subcontractors disclosed and identified during the bidding may be changed
during the implementation of this Contract, subject to compliance with the
required qualifications and the approval of the Procuring Entity.

9. Liquidated Damages
9.1. The Contractor shall pay liquidated damages to the Procuring Entity for each
day that the Completion Date is later than the Intended Completion Date. The
applicable liquidated damages is at least one-tenth (1/10) of a percent of the
cost of the unperformed portion for every day of delay. The total amount of
liquidated damages shall not exceed ten percent (10%) of the amount of the
contract. The Procuring Entity may deduct liquidated damages from payments
due to the Contractor. Payment of liquidated damages shall not affect the
Contractor. Once the cumulative amount of liquidated damages reaches ten
percent (10%) of the amount of this Contract, the Procuring Entity shall
rescind this Contract, without prejudice to other courses of action and
remedies open to it.

50
 9.2. If the Intended Completion Date is extended after liquidated damages have
been paid, the Engineer of the Procuring Entity shall correct any overpayment
of liquidated damages by the Contractor by adjusting the next payment
certificate. The Contractor shall be paid interest on the overpayment,
calculated from the date of payment to the date of repayment, at the rates
specified in GCC Clause 0.

10. Site Investigation Reports

The Contractor, in preparing the Bid, shall rely on any Site Investigation Reports
referred to in the SCC supplemented by any information obtained by the Contractor.

11. The Procuring Entity, Licenses and Permits

The Procuring Entity shall, if requested by the Contractor, assist him in applying for
permits, licenses or approvals, which are required for the Works.

12. Contractor’s Risk and Warranty Security

12.1. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the Works from the time
project construction commenced up to final acceptance by the Procuring
Entity and shall be held responsible for any damage or destruction of the
Works except those occasioned by force majeure. The Contractor shall be
fully responsible for the safety, protection, security, and convenience of his
personnel, third parties, and the public at large, as well as the Works,
Equipment, installation, and the like to be affected by his construction work.

12.2. The defects liability period for infrastructure projects shall be one year from
contract completion up to final acceptance by the Procuring Entity. During
this period, the Contractor shall undertake the repair works, at his own
expense, of any damage to the Works on account of the use of materials of
inferior quality within ninety (90) days from the time the Head of the
Procuring Entity has issued an order to undertake repair. In case of failure or
refusal to comply with this mandate, the Procuring Entity shall undertake such
repair works and shall be entitled to full reimbursement of expenses incurred
therein upon demand.

12.3. Unless otherwise indicated in the SCC, in case the Contractor fails to comply
with the preceding paragraph, the Procuring Entity shall forfeit its
performance security, subject its property (ies) to attachment or garnishment
proceedings, and perpetually disqualify it from participating in any public
bidding. All payables of the GOP in his favor shall be offset to recover the
costs.

12.4. After final acceptance of the Works by the Procuring Entity, the Contractor
shall be held responsible for “Structural Defects”, i.e., major
faults/flaws/deficiencies in one or more key structural elements of the project
which may lead to structural failure of the completed elements or structure, or
“Structural Failures”, i.e., where one or more key structural elements in an
infrastructure facility fails or collapses, thereby rendering the facility or part

51
 thereof incapable of withstanding the design loads, and/or endangering the
safety of the users or the general public:

(a) Contractor – Where Structural Defects/Failures arise due to faults

attributable to improper construction, use of inferior
quality/substandard materials, and any violation of the contract plans
and specifications, the contractor shall be held liable;

(b) Consultants – Where Structural Defects/Failures arise due to faulty

and/or inadequate design and specifications as well as construction
supervision, then the consultant who prepared the design or undertook
construction supervision for the project shall be held liable;

(c) Procuring Entity‟s Representatives/Project Manager/Construction

Managers and Supervisors – The project owner‟s representative(s),
project manager, construction manager, and supervisor(s) shall be held
liable in cases where the Structural Defects/Failures are due to his/their
willful intervention in altering the designs and other specifications;
negligence or omission in not approving or acting on proposed changes
to noted defects or deficiencies in the design and/or specifications; and
the use of substandard construction materials in the project;

(d) Third Parties - Third Parties shall be held liable in cases where
Structural Defects/Failures are caused by work undertaken by them
such as leaking pipes, diggings or excavations, underground cables and
electrical wires, underground tunnel, mining shaft and the like, in
which case the applicable warranty to such structure should be levied
to third parties for their construction or restoration works.

(e) Users - In cases where Structural Defects/Failures are due to

abuse/misuse by the end user of the constructed facility and/or non–
compliance by a user with the technical design limits and/or intended
purpose of the same, then the user concerned shall be held liable.

12.5. The warranty against Structural Defects/Failures, except those occasioned on

force majeure, shall cover the period specified in the SCC reckoned from the
date of issuance of the Certificate of Final Acceptance by the Procuring Entity.

12.6. The Contractor shall be required to put up a warranty security in the form of
cash, bank guarantee, letter of credit, GSIS or surety bond callable on demand,
in accordance with the following schedule:

Minimum Amount in
Form of Warranty Percentage (%) of Total
Contract Price
(a) Cash or letter of credit issued by Universal
or Commercial bank: provided, however,
that the letter of credit shall be confirmed
Five Percent (5%)
or authenticated by a Universal or
Commercial bank, if issued by a foreign
bank

52
 (b) Bank guarantee confirmed by Universal or
Commercial bank: provided, however, that
the letter of credit shall be confirmed or
Ten Percent (10%)
authenticated by a Universal or
Commercial bank, if issued by a foreign
bank
(c) Surety bond callable upon demand issued
by GSIS or any surety or insurance
Thirty Percent (30%)
company duly certified by the Insurance
Commission

12.7. The warranty security shall be stated in Philippine Pesos and shall remain
effective for one year from the date of issuance of the Certificate of Final
Acceptance by the Procuring Entity, and returned only after the lapse of said
one year period.

12.8. In case of structural defects/failure occurring during the applicable warranty

period provided in GCC Clause 0, the Procuring Entity shall undertake the
necessary restoration or reconstruction works and shall be entitled to full
reimbursement by the parties found to be liable for expenses incurred therein
upon demand, without prejudice to the filing of appropriate administrative,
civil, and/or criminal charges against the responsible persons as well as the
forfeiture of the warranty security posted in favor of the Procuring Entity.

13. Liability of the Contractor

Subject to additional provisions, if any, set forth in the SCC, the Contractor‟s liability
under this Contract shall be as provided by the laws of the Republic of the
Philippines.

14. Procuring Entity’s Risk

14.1. From the Start Date until the Certificate of Final Acceptance has been issued,
the following are risks of the Procuring Entity:

(a) The risk of personal injury, death, or loss of or damage to property

(excluding the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment), which are due
to:

(i) any type of use or occupation of the Site authorized by the

Procuring Entity after the official acceptance of the works; or

(ii) negligence, breach of statutory duty, or interference with any

legal right by the Procuring Entity or by any person employed
by or contracted to him except the Contractor.

(b) The risk of damage to the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment to
the extent that it is due to a fault of the Procuring Entity or in the
Procuring Entity‟s design, or due to war or radioactive contamination
directly affecting the country where the Works are to be executed.

53
15. Insurance
15.1. The Contractor shall, under his name and at his own expense, obtain and
maintain, for the duration of this Contract, the following insurance coverage:

(a) Contractor‟s All Risk Insurance;

(b) Transportation to the project Site of Equipment, Machinery, and

Supplies owned by the Contractor;

(c) Personal injury or death of Contractor‟s employees; and

(d) Comprehensive insurance for third party liability to Contractor‟s direct

or indirect act or omission causing damage to third persons.

15.2. The Contractor shall provide evidence to the Procuring Entity‟s

Representative that the insurances required under this Contract have been
effected and shall, within a reasonable time, provide copies of the insurance
policies to the Procuring Entity‟s Representative. Such evidence and such
policies shall be provided to the Procuring Entity‟s through the Procuring
Entity‟s Representative.

15.3. The Contractor shall notify the insurers of changes in the nature, extent, or
program for the execution of the Works and ensure the adequacy of the
insurances at all times in accordance with the terms of this Contract and shall
produce to the Procuring Entity‟s Representative the insurance policies in
force including the receipts for payment of the current premiums.

The above insurance policies shall be obtained from any reputable insurance
company approved by the Procuring Entity‟s Representative.

15.4. If the Contractor fails to obtain and keep in force the insurances referred to
herein or any other insurance which he may be required to obtain under the
terms of this Contract, the Procuring Entity may obtain and keep in force any
such insurances and pay such premiums as may be necessary for the purpose.
From time to time, the Procuring Entity may deduct the amount it shall pay for
said premiums including twenty five percent (25%) therein from any monies
due, or which may become due, to the Contractor, without prejudice to the
Procuring Entity exercising its right to impose other sanctions against the
Contractor pursuant to the provisions of this Contract.

15.5. In the event the Contractor fails to observe the above safeguards, the
Procuring Entity may, at the Contractor‟s expense, take whatever measure is
deemed necessary for its protection and that of the Contractor‟s personnel and
third parties, and/or order the interruption of dangerous Works. In addition,
the Procuring Entity may refuse to make the payments under GCC Clause 0
until the Contractor complies with this Clause.

15.6. The Contractor shall immediately replace the insurance policy obtained as
required in this Contract, without need of the Procuring Entity‟s demand, with

54
 a new policy issued by a new insurance company acceptable to the Procuring
Entity for any of the following grounds:

(a) The issuer of the insurance policy to be replaced has:

(i) become bankrupt;

(ii) been placed under receivership or under a management

committee;

(iii) been sued for suspension of payment; or

(iv) been suspended by the Insurance Commission and its license to

engage in business or its authority to issue insurance policies
cancelled; or

(v) Where reasonable grounds exist that the insurer may not be
able, fully and promptly, to fulfill its obligation under the
insurance policy.

16. Termination for Default of Contractor

16.1. The Procuring Entity shall terminate this Contract for default when any of the
following conditions attend its implementation:

16.2. Due to the Contractor‟s fault and while the project is on-going, it has incurred
negative slippage of fifteen percent (15%) or more in accordance with
Presidential Decree 1870, regardless of whether or not previous warnings and
notices have been issued for the Contractor to improve his performance;

16.3. Due to its own fault and after this Contract time has expired, the Contractor
incurs delay in the completion of the Work after this Contract has expired; or

16.4. The Contractor:

(a) abandons the contract Works, refuses or fails to comply with a valid
instruction of the Procuring Entity or fails to proceed expeditiously and
without delay despite a written notice by the Procuring Entity;

(b) does not actually have on the project Site the minimum essential
equipment listed on the Bid necessary to prosecute the Works in
accordance with the approved Program of Work and equipment
deployment schedule as required for the project;

(c) does not execute the Works in accordance with this Contract or
persistently or flagrantly neglects to carry out its obligations under this
Contract;

(d) neglects or refuses to remove materials or to perform a new Work that

has been rejected as defective or unsuitable; or

55
 (e) sub-lets any part of this Contract without approval by the Procuring
Entity.

16.5. All materials on the Site, Plant, Equipment, and Works shall be deemed to be
the property of the Procuring Entity if this Contract is rescinded because of the
Contractor‟s default.

17. Termination for Default of Procuring Entity

The Contractor may terminate this Contract with the Procuring Entity if the works are
completely stopped for a continuous period of at least sixty (60) calendar days
through no fault of its own, due to any of the following reasons:

(a) Failure of the Procuring Entity to deliver, within a reasonable time, supplies,
materials, right-of-way, or other items it is obligated to furnish under the terms
of this Contract; or

(b) The prosecution of the Work is disrupted by the adverse peace and order
situation, as certified by the Armed Forces of the Philippines Provincial
Commander and approved by the Secretary of National Defense.

18. Termination for Other Causes

18.1. The Procuring Entity may terminate this Contract, in whole or in part, at any
time for its convenience. The Head of the Procuring Entity may terminate this
Contract for the convenience of the Procuring Entity if he has determined the
existence of conditions that make Project Implementation economically,
financially or technically impractical and/or unnecessary, such as, but not
limited to, fortuitous event(s) or changes in law and National Government
policies.

18.2. The Procuring Entity or the Contractor may terminate this Contract if the other
party causes a fundamental breach of this Contract.

18.3. Fundamental breaches of Contract shall include, but shall not be limited to, the
following:

(a) The Contractor stops work for twenty eight (28) days when no
stoppage of work is shown on the current Program of Work and the
stoppage has not been authorized by the Procuring Entity‟s
Representative;

(b) The Procuring Entity‟s Representative instructs the Contractor to delay

the progress of the Works, and the instruction is not withdrawn within
twenty eight (28) days;

(c) The Procuring Entity shall terminate this Contract if the Contractor is
declared bankrupt or insolvent as determined with finality by a court of
competent jurisdiction. In this event, termination will be without
compensation to the Contractor, provided that such termination will
not prejudice or affect any right of action or remedy which has accrued

56
 or will accrue thereafter to the Procuring Entity and/or the Contractor.
In the case of the Contractor's insolvency, any Contractor's Equipment
which the Procuring Entity instructs in the notice is to be used until the
completion of the Works;

(d) A payment certified by the Procuring Entity‟s Representative is not

paid by the Procuring Entity to the Contractor within eighty four (84)
days from the date of the Procuring Entity‟s Representative‟s
certificate;

(e) The Procuring Entity‟s Representative gives Notice that failure to

correct a particular Defect is a fundamental breach of Contract and the
Contractor fails to correct it within a reasonable period of time
determined by the Procuring Entity‟s Representative;

(f) The Contractor does not maintain a Security, which is required;

(g) The Contractor has delayed the completion of the Works by the
number of days for which the maximum amount of liquidated damages
can be paid, as defined in the GCC Clause 0; and

(h) In case it is determined prima facie by the Procuring Entity that the
Contractor has engaged, before or during the implementation of the
contract, in unlawful deeds and behaviors relative to contract
acquisition and implementation, such as, but not limited to, the
following:

(i) corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, coercive, and obstructive

practices as defined in ITB Clause 3.10, unless otherwise
specified in the SCC;

(ii) drawing up or using forged documents;

(iii) using adulterated materials, means or methods, or engaging in

production contrary to rules of science or the trade; and

(iv) any other act analogous to the foregoing.

18.4. The Funding Source or the Procuring Entity, as appropriate, will seek to
impose the maximum civil, administrative and/or criminal penalties available
under the applicable law on individuals and organizations deemed to be
involved with corrupt, fraudulent, or coercive practices.

18.5. When persons from either party to this Contract gives notice of a fundamental
breach to the Procuring Entity‟s Representative in order to terminate the
existing contract for a cause other than those listed under GCC Clause 0, the
Procuring Entity‟s Representative shall decide whether the breach is
fundamental or not.

18.6. If this Contract is terminated, the Contractor shall stop work immediately,
make the Site safe and secure, and leave the Site as soon as reasonably
possible.

57
19. Procedures for Termination of Contracts
19.1. The following provisions shall govern the procedures for the termination of
this Contract:

(a) Upon receipt of a written report of acts or causes which may constitute
ground(s) for termination as aforementioned, or upon its own initiative,
the Procuring Entity shall, within a period of seven (7) calendar days,
verify the existence of such ground(s) and cause the execution of a
Verified Report, with all relevant evidence attached;

(b) Upon recommendation by the Procuring Entity, the Head of the

Procuring Entity shall terminate this Contract only by a written notice
to the Contractor conveying the termination of this Contract. The
notice shall state:

(i) that this Contract is being terminated for any of the ground(s)
afore-mentioned, and a statement of the acts that constitute the
ground(s) constituting the same;

(ii) the extent of termination, whether in whole or in part;

(iii) an instruction to the Contractor to show cause as to why this

Contract should not be terminated; and

(iv) special instructions of the Procuring Entity, if any.

The Notice to Terminate shall be accompanied by a copy of the

Verified Report;

(c) Within a period of seven (7) calendar days from receipt of the Notice
of Termination, the Contractor shall submit to the Head of the
Procuring Entity a verified position paper stating why the contract
should not be terminated. If the Contractor fails to show cause after
the lapse of the seven (7) day period, either by inaction or by default,
the Head of the Procuring Entity shall issue an order terminating the
contract;

(d) The Procuring Entity may, at anytime before receipt of the Bidder‟s
verified position paper described in item (c) above withdraw the Notice
to Terminate if it is determined that certain items or works subject of
the notice had been completed, delivered, or performed before the
Contractor‟s receipt of the notice;

(e) Within a non-extendible period of ten (10) calendar days from receipt
of the verified position paper, the Head of the Procuring Entity shall
decide whether or not to terminate this Contract. It shall serve a
written notice to the Contractor of its decision and, unless otherwise
provided in the said notice, this Contract is deemed terminated from
receipt of the Contractor of the notice of decision. The termination

58
 shall only be based on the ground(s) stated in the Notice to Terminate;
and

(f) The Head of the Procuring Entity may create a Contract Termination
Review Committee (CTRC) to assist him in the discharge of this
function. All decisions recommended by the CTRC shall be subject to
the approval of the Head of the Procuring Entity.

19.2. Pursuant to Section 69(f) of RA 9184 and without prejudice to the imposition
of additional administrative sanctions as the internal rules of the agency may
provide and/or further criminal prosecution as provided by applicable laws,
the procuring entity shall impose on contractors after the termination of the
contract the penalty of suspension for one (1) year for the first offense,
suspension for two (2) years for the second offense from participating in the
public bidding process, for violations committed during the contract
implementation stage, which include but not limited to the following:

(a) Failure of the contractor, due solely to his fault or negligence, to

mobilize and start work or performance within the specified period in
the Notice to Proceed (“NTP”);

(b) Failure by the contractor to fully and faithfully comply with its
contractual obligations without valid cause, or failure by the contractor
to comply with any written lawful instruction of the procuring entity or
its representative(s) pursuant to the implementation of the contract.
For the procurement of infrastructure projects or consultancy contracts,
lawful instructions include but are not limited to the following:

(i) Employment of competent technical personnel, competent

engineers and/or work supervisors;

(ii) Provision of warning signs and barricades in accordance with

approved plans and specifications and contract provisions;

(iii) Stockpiling in proper places of all materials and removal from

the project site of waste and excess materials, including broken
pavement and excavated debris in accordance with approved
plans and specifications and contract provisions;

(iv) Deployment of committed equipment, facilities, support staff

and manpower; and

(v) Renewal of the effectivity dates of the performance security

after its expiration during the course of contract
implementation.

(c) Assignment and subcontracting of the contract or any part thereof or

substitution of key personnel named in the proposal without prior
written approval by the procuring entity.

59
 (d) Poor performance by the contractor or unsatisfactory quality and/or
progress of work arising from his fault or negligence as reflected in the
Constructor's Performance Evaluation System (“CPES”) rating sheet.
In the absence of the CPES rating sheet, the existing performance
monitoring system of the procuring entity shall be applied. Any of the
following acts by the Contractor shall be construed as poor
performance:

(i) Negative slippage of 15% and above within the critical path of
the project due entirely to the fault or negligence of the
contractor; and

(ii) Quality of materials and workmanship not complying with the

approved specifications arising from the contractor's fault or
negligence.

(e) Willful or deliberate abandonment or non-performance of the project

or contract by the contractor resulting to substantial breach thereof
without lawful and/or just cause.

In addition to the penalty of suspension, the performance security posted by

the contractor shall also be forfeited.

20. Force Majeure, Release from Performance

20.1. For purposes of this Contract the terms “force majeure” and “fortuitous event”
may be used interchangeably. In this regard, a fortuitous event or force
majeure shall be interpreted to mean an event which the Contractor could not
have foreseen, or which though foreseen, was inevitable. It shall not include
ordinary unfavorable weather conditions; and any other cause the effects of
which could have been avoided with the exercise of reasonable diligence by
the Contractor.

20.2. If this Contract is discontinued by an outbreak of war or by any other event

entirely outside the control of either the Procuring Entity or the Contractor, the
Procuring Entity‟s Representative shall certify that this Contract has been
discontinued. The Contractor shall make the Site safe and stop work as
quickly as possible after receiving this certificate and shall be paid for all
works carried out before receiving it and for any Work carried out afterwards
to which a commitment was made.

20.3. If the event continues for a period of eighty four (84) days, either party may
then give notice of termination, which shall take effect twenty eight (28) days
after the giving of the notice.

20.4. After termination, the Contractor shall be entitled to payment of the unpaid
balance of the value of the Works executed and of the materials and Plant
reasonably delivered to the Site, adjusted by the following:

(a) any sum to which the Contractor is entitled under GCC Clause 0;

60
 (b) the cost of his suspension and demobilization;

(c) any sum to which the Procuring Entity is entitled.

20.5. The net balance due shall be paid or repaid within a reasonable time period
from the time of the notice of termination.

21. Resolution of Disputes

21.1. If any dispute or difference of any kind whatsoever shall arise between the
parties in connection with the implementation of the contract covered by the
Act and this IRR, the parties shall make every effort to resolve amicably such
dispute or difference by mutual consultation.

21.2. If the Contractor believes that a decision taken by the PROCURING

ENTITY‟s Representative was either outside the authority given to the
PROCURING ENTITY‟s Representative by this Contract or that the decision
was wrongly taken, the decision shall be referred to the Arbiter indicated in
the SCC within fourteen (14) days of the notification of the PROCURING
ENTITY‟s Representative‟s decision.

21.3. Any and all disputes arising from the implementation of this Contract covered
by the R.A. 9184 and its IRR shall be submitted to arbitration in the
Philippines according to the provisions of Republic Act No. 876, otherwise
known as the “ Arbitration Law” and Republic Act 9285, otherwise known as
the “Alternative Dispute Resolution Act of 2004”: Provided, however, That,
disputes that are within the competence of the Construction Industry
Arbitration Commission to resolve shall be referred thereto. The process of
arbitration shall be incorporated as a provision in this Contract that will be
executed pursuant to the provisions of the Act and its IRR: Provided, further,
That, by mutual agreement, the parties may agree in writing to resort to other
alternative modes of dispute resolution.

22. Suspension of Loan, Credit, Grant, or Appropriation

In the event that the Funding Source suspends the Loan, Credit, Grant, or
Appropriation to the Procuring Entity, from which part of the payments to the
Contractor are being made:

(a) The Procuring Entity is obligated to notify the Contractor of such suspension
within seven (7) days of having received the suspension notice.

If the Contractor has not received sums due it for work already done within forty five
(45) days from the time the Contractor‟s claim for payment has been certified
by the Procuring Entity‟s Representative, the Contractor may immediately
issue a suspension of work notice in accordance with GCC Clause 0.(b)

23. Procuring Entity’s Representative’s Decisions

61
 23.1. Except where otherwise specifically stated, the Procuring Entity‟s
Representative will decide contractual matters between the Procuring Entity
and the Contractor in the role representing the Procuring Entity.

23.2. The Procuring Entity‟s Representative may delegate any of his duties and
responsibilities to other people, except to the Arbiter, after notifying the
Contractor, and may cancel any delegation after notifying the Contractor.

24. Approval of Drawings and Temporary Works by the Procuring

Entity’s Representative
24.1. All Drawings prepared by the Contractor for the execution of the Temporary
Works, are subject to prior approval by the Procuring Entity‟s Representative
before its use.

24.2. The Contractor shall be responsible for design of Temporary Works.

24.3. The Procuring Entity‟s Representative‟s approval shall not alter the
Contractor‟s responsibility for design of the Temporary Works.

24.4. The Contractor shall obtain approval of third parties to the design of the
Temporary Works, when required by the Procuring Entity.

25. Acceleration and Delays Ordered by the Procuring Entity’s

Representative
25.1. When the Procuring Entity wants the Contractor to finish before the Intended
Completion Date, the Procuring Entity‟s Representative will obtain priced
proposals for achieving the necessary acceleration from the Contractor. If the
Procuring Entity accepts these proposals, the Intended Completion Date will
be adjusted accordingly and confirmed by both the Procuring Entity and the
Contractor.

25.2. If the Contractor‟s Financial Proposals for an acceleration are accepted by the
Procuring Entity, they are incorporated in the Contract Price and treated as a
Variation.

26. Extension of the Intended Completion Date

26.1. The Procuring Entity‟s Representative shall extend the Intended Completion
Date if a Variation is issued which makes it impossible for the Intended
Completion Date to be achieved by the Contractor without taking steps to
accelerate the remaining work, which would cause the Contractor to incur
additional costs. No payment shall be made for any event which may warrant
the extension of the Intended Completion Date.

26.2. The Procuring Entity‟s Representative shall decide whether and by how much
to extend the Intended Completion Date within twenty one (21) days of the
Contractor asking the Procuring Entity‟s Representative for a decision thereto
after fully submitting all supporting information. If the Contractor has failed
to give early warning of a delay or has failed to cooperate in dealing with a

62
 delay, the delay by this failure shall not be considered in assessing the new
Intended Completion Date.

27. Right to Vary

27.1. The Procuring Entity‟s Representative with the prior approval of the Procuring
Entity may instruct Variations, up to a maximum cumulative amount of ten
percent (10%) of the original contract cost.

27.2. Variations shall be valued as follows:

(a) At a lump sum price agreed between the parties;

(b) where appropriate, at rates in this Contract;

(c) in the absence of appropriate rates, the rates in this Contract shall be
used as the basis for valuation; or failing which

(d) at appropriate new rates, equal to or lower than current industry rates
and to be agreed upon by both parties and approved by the Head of the
Procuring Entity.

28. Contractor's Right to Claim

If the Contractor incurs cost as a result of any of the events under GCC Clause 0, the
Contractor shall be entitled to the amount of such cost. If as a result of any of the said
events, it is necessary to change the Works, this shall be dealt with as a Variation.

29. Dayworks
29.1. Subject to GCC Clause 0 on Variation Order, and if applicable as indicated in
the SCC, the Dayworks rates in the Contractor‟s Bid shall be used for small
additional amounts of work only when the Procuring Entity‟s Representative
has given written instructions in advance for additional work to be paid for in
that way.

29.2. All work to be paid for as Dayworks shall be recorded by the Contractor on
forms approved by the Procuring Entity‟s Representative. Each completed
form shall be verified and signed by the Procuring Entity‟s Representative
within two days of the work being done.

29.3. The Contractor shall be paid for Dayworks subject to obtaining signed
Dayworks forms.

30. Early Warning

30.1. The Contractor shall warn the Procuring Entity‟s Representative at the earliest
opportunity of specific likely future events or circumstances that may
adversely affect the quality of the work, increase the Contract Price, or delay
the execution of the Works. The Procuring Entity‟s Representative may
require the Contractor to provide an estimate of the expected effect of the

63
 future event or circumstance on the Contract Price and Completion Date. The
estimate shall be provided by the Contractor as soon as reasonably possible.

30.2. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Procuring Entity‟s Representative in
making and considering proposals for how the effect of such an event or
circumstance can be avoided or reduced by anyone involved in the work and
in carrying out any resulting instruction of the Procuring Entity‟s
Representative.

31. Program of Work

31.1. Within the time stated in the SCC, the Contractor shall submit to the
Procuring Entity‟s Representative for approval a Program of Work showing
the general methods, arrangements, order, and timing for all the activities in
the Works.

31.2. An update of the Program of Work shall the show the actual progress achieved
on each activity and the effect of the progress achieved on the timing of the
remaining work, including any changes to the sequence of the activities.

31.3. The Contractor shall submit to the Procuring Entity‟s Representative for
approval an updated Program of Work at intervals no longer than the period
stated in the SCC. If the Contractor does not submit an updated Program of
Work within this period, the PROCURING ENTITY‟s Representative may
withhold the amount stated in the SCC from the next payment certificate and
continue to withhold this amount until the next payment after the date on
which the overdue Program of Work has been submitted.

31.4. The Procuring Entity‟s Representative‟s approval of the Program of Work

shall not alter the Contractor‟s obligations. The Contractor may revise the
Program of Work and submit it to the Procuring Entity‟s Representative again
at any time. A revised Program of Work shall show the effect of any approved
Variations.

31.5. When the Program of Work is updated, the Contractor shall provide the
Procuring Entity‟s Representative with an updated cash flow forecast. The
cash flow forecast shall include different currencies, as defined in the
Contract, converted as necessary using the Contract exchange rates.

31.6. All Variations shall be included in updated Program of Work produced by the
Contractor.

32. Management Conferences

32.1. Either the Procuring Entity‟s Representative or the Contractor may require the
other to attend a Management Conference. The Management Conference shall
review the plans for remaining work and deal with matters raised in
accordance with the early warning procedure.

32.2. The Procuring Entity‟s Representative shall record the business of

Management Conferences and provide copies of the record to those attending

64
 the Conference and to the Procuring Entity . The responsibility of the parties
for actions to be taken shall be decided by the PROCURING ENTITY‟s
Representative either at the Management Conference or after the Management
Conference and stated in writing to all who attended the Conference.

33. Bill of Quantities

33.1. The Bill of Quantities shall contain items of work for the construction,
installation, testing, and commissioning of work to be done by the Contractor.

33.2. The Bill of Quantities is used to calculate the Contract Price. The Contractor
is paid for the quantity of the work done at the rate in the Bill of Quantities for
each item.

33.3. If the final quantity of any work done differs from the quantity in the Bill of
Quantities for the particular item and is not more than twenty five percent
(25%) of the original quantity, provided the aggregate changes for all items do
not exceed ten percent (10%) of the Contract price, the Procuring Entity‟s
Representative shall make the necessary adjustments to allow for the changes
subject to applicable laws, rules, and regulations.

33.4. If requested by the Procuring Entity‟s Representative, the Contractor shall

provide the Procuring Entity‟s Representative with a detailed cost breakdown
of any rate in the Bill of Quantities.

34. Instructions, Inspections and Audits

34.1. The Procuring Entity‟s personnel shall at all reasonable times during
construction of the Work be entitled to examine, inspect, measure and test the
materials and workmanship, and to check the progress of the construction.

34.2. If the Procuring Entity‟s Representative instructs the Contractor to carry out a
test not specified in the Specification to check whether any work has a defect
and the test shows that it does, the Contractor shall pay for the test and any
samples. If there is no defect, the test shall be a Compensation Event.

34.3. The Contractor shall permit the Funding Source named in the SCC to inspect
the Contractor‟s accounts and records relating to the performance of the
Contractor and to have them audited by auditors appointed by the Funding
Source, if so required by the Funding Source.

35. Identifying Defects

The Procuring Entity‟s Representative shall check the Contractor‟s work and notify
the Contractor of any defects that are found. Such checking shall not affect the
Contractor‟s responsibilities. The Procuring Entity‟s Representative may instruct the
Contractor to search uncover defects and test any work that the Procuring Entity‟s
Representative considers below standards and defective.

36. Cost of Repairs

65
 Loss or damage to the Works or Materials to be incorporated in the Works between
the Start Date and the end of the Defects Liability Periods shall be remedied by the
Contractor at the Contractor‟s cost if the loss or damage arises from the Contractor‟s
acts or omissions.

37. Correction of Defects

37.1. The Procuring Entity‟s Representative shall give notice to the Contractor of
any defects before the end of the Defects Liability Period, which is One (1)
year from project completion up to final acceptance by the Procuring Entity‟s.

37.2. Every time notice of a defect is given, the Contractor shall correct the notified
defect within the length of time specified in the Procuring Entity‟s
Representative‟s notice.

37.3. The Contractor shall correct the defects which he notices himself before the
end of the Defects Liability Period.

37.4. The Procuring Entity shall certify that all defects have been corrected. If the
Procuring Entity considers that correction of a defect is not essential, he can
request the Contractor to submit a quotation for the corresponding reduction in
the Contract Price. If the Procuring Entity accepts the quotation, the
corresponding change in the SCC is a Variation.

38. Uncorrected Defects

38.1. The Procuring Entity shall give the Contractor at least fourteen (14) days
notice of his intention to use a third party to correct a Defect. If the Contractor
does not correct the Defect himself within the period, the Procuring Entity
may have the Defect corrected by the third party. The cost of the correction
will be deducted from the Contract Price.

38.2. The use of a third party to correct defects that are uncorrected by the
Contractor will in no way relieve the Contractor of its liabilities and warranties
under the Contract.

39. Advance Payment

39.1. The Procuring Entity shall, upon a written request of the contractor which
shall be submitted as a contract document, make an advance payment to the
contractor in an amount not exceeding fifteen percent (15%) of the total
contract price, to be made in lump sum or, at the most two, installments
according to a schedule specified in the SCC.

39.2. The advance payment shall be made only upon the submission to and
acceptance by the Procuring Entity of an irrevocable standby letter of credit of
equivalent value from a commercial bank, a bank guarantee or a surety bond
callable upon demand, issued by a surety or insurance company duly licensed
by the Insurance Commission and confirmed by the Procuring Entity.

66
 39.3. The advance payment shall be repaid by the Contractor by an amount equal to
the percentage of the total contract price used for the advance payment.

39.4. The contractor may reduce his standby letter of credit or guarantee instrument
by the amounts refunded by the Monthly Certificates in the advance payment.

39.5. The Procuring Entity will provide an Advance Payment on the Contract Price
as stipulated in the Conditions of Contract, subject to the maximum amount
stated in SCC Clause 0.

40. Progress Payments

40.1. The Contractor may submit a request for payment for Work accomplished.
Such request for payment shall be verified and certified by the Procuring
Entity‟s Representative/Project Engineer. Except as otherwise stipulated in
the SCC, materials and equipment delivered on the site but not completely put
in place shall not be included for payment.

40.2. The Procuring Entity shall deduct the following from the certified gross
amounts to be paid to the contractor as progress payment:

(a) Cumulative value of the work previously certified and paid for.

(b) Portion of the advance payment to be recouped for the month.

(c) Retention money in accordance with the condition of contract.

(d) Amount to cover third party liabilities.

(e) Amount to cover uncorrected discovered defects in the works.

40.3. Payments shall be adjusted by deducting therefrom the amounts for advance
payments and retention. The Procuring Entity shall pay the Contractor the
amounts certified by the Procuring Entity‟s Representative within twenty eight
(28) days from the date each certificate was issued. No payment of interest for
delayed payments and adjustments shall be made by the Procuring Entity.

40.4. The first progress payment may be paid by the Procuring Entity to the
Contractor provided that at least twenty percent (20%) of the work has been
accomplished as certified by the Procuring Entity‟s Representative.

40.5. Items of the Works for which a price of “0” (zero) has been entered will not be
paid for by the Procuring Entity and shall be deemed covered by other rates
and prices in the Contract.

41. Payment Certificates

41.1. The Contractor shall submit to the Procuring Entity‟s Representative monthly
statements of the estimated value of the work executed less the cumulative
amount certified previously.

67
 41.2. The Procuring Entity‟s Representative shall check the Contractor‟s monthly
statement and certify the amount to be paid to the Contractor.

41.3. The value of Work executed shall:

(a) be determined by the Procuring Entity‟s Representative;

(b) comprise the value of the quantities of the items in the Bill of
Quantities completed; and

(c) include the valuations of approved variations.

41.4. The Procuring Entity‟s Representative may exclude any item certified in a
previous certificate or reduce the proportion of any item previously certified in
any certificate in the light of later information.

42. Retention
42.1. The Procuring Entity shall retain from each payment due to the Contractor an
amount equal to a percentage thereof using the rate as specified in ITB Sub-
Clause 0.

42.2. Progress payments are subject to retention of ten percent (10%), referred to as
the “retention money.” Such retention shall be based on the total amount due
to the Contractor prior to any deduction and shall be retained from every
progress payment until fifty percent (50%) of the value of Works, as
determined by the Procuring Entity, are completed. If, after fifty percent
(50%) completion, the Work is satisfactorily done and on schedule, no
additional retention shall be made; otherwise, the ten percent (10%) retention
shall again be imposed using the rate specified therefor.

42.3. The total “retention money” shall be due for release upon final acceptance of
the Works. The Contractor may, however, request the substitution of the
retention money for each progress billing with irrevocable standby letters of
credit from a commercial bank, bank guarantees or surety bonds callable on
demand, of amounts equivalent to the retention money substituted for and
acceptable to the Procuring Entity, provided that the project is on schedule and
is satisfactorily undertaken. Otherwise, the ten (10%) percent retention shall
be made. Said irrevocable standby letters of credit, bank guarantees and/or
surety bonds, to be posted in favor of the Government shall be valid for a
duration to be determined by the concerned implementing office/agency or
Procuring Entity and will answer for the purpose for which the ten (10%)
percent retention is intended, i.e., to cover uncorrected discovered defects and
third party liabilities.

42.4. On completion of the whole Works, the Contractor may substitute retention
money with an “on demand” Bank guarantee in a form acceptable to the
Procuring Entity.

43. Variation Orders

68
43.1. Variation Orders may be issued by the Procuring Entity to cover any
increase/decrease in quantities, including the introduction of new work items
that are not included in the original contract or reclassification of work items
that are either due to change of plans, design or alignment to suit actual field
conditions resulting in disparity between the preconstruction plans used for
purposes of bidding and the “as staked plans” or construction drawings
prepared after a joint survey by the Contractor and the Procuring Entity after
award of the contract, provided that the cumulative amount of the Variation
Order does not exceed ten percent (10%) of the original project cost. The
addition/deletion of Works should be within the general scope of the project as
bid and awarded. The scope of works shall not be reduced so as to
accommodate a positive Variation Order. A Variation Order may either be in
the form of a Change Order or Extra Work Order.

43.2. A Change Order may be issued by the Procuring Entity to cover any
increase/decrease in quantities of original Work items in the contract.

43.3. An Extra Work Order may be issued by the Procuring Entity to cover the
introduction of new work necessary for the completion, improvement or
protection of the project which were not included as items of Work in the
original contract, such as, where there are subsurface or latent physical
conditions at the site differing materially from those indicated in the contract,
or where there are duly unknown physical conditions at the site of an unusual
nature differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally
recognized as inherent in the Work or character provided for in the contract.

43.4. Any cumulative Variation Order beyond ten percent (10%) shall be subject of
another contract to be bid out if the works are separable from the original
contract. In exceptional cases where it is urgently necessary to complete the
original scope of work, the Head of the Procuring Entity may authorize a
positive Variation Order go beyond ten percent (10%) but not more than
twenty percent (20%) of the original contract price, subject to the guidelines to
be determined by the GPPB: Provided, however, That appropriate sanctions
shall be imposed on the designer, consultant or official responsible for the
original detailed engineering design which failed to consider the Variation
Order beyond ten percent (10%).

43.5. In claiming for any Variation Order, the Contractor shall, within seven (7)
calendar days after such work has been commenced or after the circumstances
leading to such condition(s) leading to the extra cost, and within twenty-eight
(28) calendar days deliver a written communication giving full and detailed
particulars of any extra cost in order that it may be investigated at that time.
Failure to provide either of such notices in the time stipulated shall constitute a
waiver by the contractor for any claim. The preparation and submission of
Variation Orders are as follows:

(a) If the Procuring Entity‟s representative/Project Engineer believes that a

Change Order or Extra Work Order should be issued, he shall prepare
the proposed Order accompanied with the notices submitted by the
Contractor, the plans therefore, his computations as to the quantities of
the additional works involved per item indicating the specific stations

69
 where such works are needed, the date of his inspections and
investigations thereon, and the log book thereof, and a detailed
estimate of the unit cost of such items of work, together with his
justifications for the need of such Change Order or Extra Work Order,
and shall submit the same to the Head of the Procuring Entity for
approval.

(b) The Head of the Procuring Entity or his duly authorized representative,
upon receipt of the proposed Change Order or Extra Work Order shall
immediately instruct the technical staff of the Procuring Entity‟s to
conduct an on-the-spot investigation to verify the need for the Work to
be prosecuted. A report of such verification shall be submitted directly
to the Head of the Procuring Entity or his duly authorized
representative.

(c) The, Head of the Procuring Entity or his duly authorized

representative, after being satisfied that such Change Order or Extra
Work Order is justified and necessary, shall review the estimated
quantities and prices and forward the proposal with the supporting
documentation to the Head of Procuring Entity for consideration.

(d) If, after review of the plans, quantities and estimated unit cost of the
items of work involved, the proper office of the procuring entity
empowered to review and evaluate Change Orders or Extra Work
Orders recommends approval thereof, Head of the Procuring Entity or
his duly authorized representative, believing the Change Order or Extra
Work Order to be in order, shall approve the same.

(e) The timeframe for the processing of Variation Orders from the
preparation up to the approval by the Head of the Procuring Entity
concerned shall not exceed thirty (30) calendar days.

44. Contract Completion

Once the project reaches an accomplishment of ninety five (95%) of the total contract
amount, the Procuring Entity may create an inspectorate team to make preliminary
inspection and submit a punch-list to the Contractor in preparation for the final
turnover of the project. Said punch-list will contain, among others, the remaining
Works, Work deficiencies for necessary corrections, and the specific duration/time to
fully complete the project considering the approved remaining contract time. This,
however, shall not preclude the claim of the Procuring Entity for liquidated damages.

45. Suspension of Work

45.1. The Procuring Entity shall have the authority to suspend the work wholly or
partly by written order for such period as may be deemed necessary, due to
force majeure or any fortuitous events or for failure on the part of the
Contractor to correct bad conditions which are unsafe for workers or for the
general public, to carry out valid orders given by the Procuring Entity or to
perform any provisions of the contract, or due to adjustment of plans to suit

70
 field conditions as found necessary during construction. The Contractor shall
immediately comply with such order to suspend the work wholly or partly.

45.2. The Contractor or its duly authorized representative shall have the right to
suspend work operation on any or all projects/activities along the critical path
of activities after fifteen (15) calendar days from date of receipt of written
notice from the Contractor to the district engineer/regional director/consultant
or equivalent official, as the case may be, due to the following:

(a) There exist right-of-way problems which prohibit the Contractor from
performing work in accordance with the approved construction
schedule.

(b) Requisite construction plans which must be owner-furnished are not

issued to the contractor precluding any work called for by such plans.

(c) Peace and order conditions make it extremely dangerous, if not

possible, to work. However, this condition must be certified in writing
by the Philippine National Police (PNP) station which has
responsibility over the affected area and confirmed by the Department
of Interior and Local Government (DILG) Regional Director.

(d) There is failure on the part of the Procuring Entity to deliver

government-furnished materials and equipment as stipulated in the
contract.

(e) Delay in the payment of Contractor‟s claim for progress billing beyond
forty-five (45) calendar days from the time the Contractor‟s claim has
been certified to by the procuring entity‟s authorized representative
that the documents are complete unless there are justifiable reasons
thereof which shall be communicated in writing to the Contractor.

45.3. In case of total suspension, or suspension of activities along the critical path,
which is not due to any fault of the Contractor, the elapsed time between the
effective order of suspending operation and the order to resume work shall be
allowed the Contractor by adjusting the contract time accordingly.

46. Payment on Termination

46.1. If the Contract is terminated because of a fundamental breach of Contract by
the Contractor, the Procuring Entity‟s Representative shall issue a certificate
for the value of the work done and Materials ordered less advance payments
received up to the date of the issue of the certificate and less the percentage to
apply to the value of the work not completed, as indicated in the SCC.
Additional Liquidated Damages shall not apply. If the total amount due to the
Procuring Entity exceeds any payment due to the Contractor, the difference
shall be a debt payable to the Procuring Entity.

46.2. If the Contract is terminated for the Procuring Entity‟s convenience or because
of a fundamental breach of Contract by the Procuring Entity, the Procuring
Entity‟s Representative shall issue a certificate for the value of the work done,

71
 Materials ordered, the reasonable cost of removal of Equipment, repatriation
of the Contractor‟s personnel employed solely on the Works, and the
Contractor‟s costs of protecting and securing the Works, and less advance
payments received up to the date of the certificate.

46.3. The net balance due shall be paid or repaid within twenty eight (28) days from
the notice of termination.

46.4. If the Contractor has terminated the Contract under GCC Clauses 0 or 0, the
Procuring Entity shall promptly return the Performance Security to the
Contractor.

47. Extension of Contract Time

47.1. Should the amount of additional work of any kind or other special
circumstances of any kind whatsoever occur such as to fairly entitle the
contractor to an extension of contract time, the Procuring Entity shall
determine the amount of such extension; provided that the Procuring Entity is
not bound to take into account any claim for an extension of time unless the
Contractor has, prior to the expiration of the contract time and within thirty
(30) calendar days after such work has been commenced or after the
circumstances leading to such claim have arisen, delivered to the Procuring
Entity notices in order that it could have investigated them at that time. Failure
to provide such notice shall constitute a waiver by the Contractor of any claim.
Upon receipt of full and detailed particulars, the Procuring Entity shall
examine the facts and extent of the delay and shall extend the contract time
completing the contract work when, in the Procuring Entity‟s opinion, the
findings of facts justify an extension.

47.2. No extension of contract time shall be granted the Contractor due to (a)
ordinary unfavorable weather conditions and (b) inexcusable failure or
negligence of Contractor to provide the required equipment, supplies or
materials.

47.3. Extension of contract time may be granted only when the affected activities
fall within the critical path of the PERT/CPM network.

47.4. No extension of contract time shall be granted when the reason given to
support the request for extension was already considered in the determination
of the original contract time during the conduct of detailed engineering and in
the preparation of the contract documents as agreed upon by the parties before
contract perfection.

47.5. Extension of contract time shall be granted for rainy/unworkable days

considered unfavorable for the prosecution of the works at the site, based on
the actual conditions obtained at the site, in excess of the number of
rainy/unworkable days pre-determined by the Procuring Entity in relation to
the original contract time during the conduct of detailed engineering and in the
preparation of the contract documents as agreed upon by the parties before
contract perfection, and/or for equivalent period of delay due to major
calamities such as exceptionally destructive typhoons, floods and earthquakes,

72
 and epidemics, and for causes such as non-delivery on time of materials,
working drawings, or written information to be furnished by the Procuring
Entity, non-acquisition of permit to enter private properties within the right-of-
way resulting in complete paralyzation of construction activities, and other
meritorious causes as determined by the Procuring Entity‟s Representative and
approved by the Head of the Procuring Entity. Shortage of construction
materials, general labor strikes, and peace and order problems that disrupt
construction operations through no fault of the Contractor may be considered
as additional grounds for extension of contract time provided they are publicly
felt and certified by appropriate government agencies such as DTI, DOLE,
DILG, and DND, among others. The written consent of bondsmen must be
attached to any request of the Contractor for extension of contract time and
submitted to the Procuring Entity for consideration and the validity of the
Performance Security shall be correspondingly extended.

48. Price Adjustment

Except for extraordinary circumstances as determined by NEDA and approved by the
GPPB, no price adjustment shall be allowed. Nevertheless, in cases where the cost of
the awarded contract is affected by any applicable new laws, ordinances, regulations,
or other acts of the GOP, promulgated after the date of bid opening, a contract price
adjustment shall be made or appropriate relief shall be applied on a no loss-no gain
basis.

49. Completion
The Contractor shall request the Procuring Entity‟s Representative to issue a
certificate of Completion of the Works, and the Procuring Entity‟s Representative will
do so upon deciding that the work is completed.

50. Taking Over

The Procuring Entity shall take over the Site and the Works within seven (7) days
from the date the Procuring Entity‟s Representative issues a certificate of Completion.

51. Operating and Maintenance Manuals

51.1. If “as built” Drawings and/or operating and maintenance manuals are required,
the Contractor shall supply them by the dates stated in the SCC.

51.2. If the Contractor does not supply the Drawings and/or manuals by the dates
stated in the SCC, or they do not receive the Procuring Entity‟s
Representative‟s approval, the Procuring Entity‟s Representative shall
withhold the amount stated in the SCC from payments due to the Contractor.

73
Section V. Special Conditions of Contract

74
 Special Conditions of Contract

GCC Clause
0 The Intended Completion Date is 200 Calendar Days (including
unworkable days).
0 The Procuring Entity is Department of Transportation and Communications
(DOTC), The Columbia Tower, Ortigas Avenue, Mandaluyong City
0 The Procuring Entity‟s Representative is the Undersecretary for Project
Implementation or his representative, The Columbia Tower, Ortigas
Avenue, Mandaluyong City
0 The Site is located at along the PNR Railway Line from Sucat to Alabang,
Muntinlupa City and is defined in the drawings.
0 The Start Date is the 7thcalendar day after the date of the receipt of the
Notice to Proceed.
0 The Works consist of Construction of Double Track from Sucat to Alabang
which includes but not limited to the supply of labor, equipment, and
materials in the formation of embankment, laying/installation of Prestressed
Concrete Sleepers and wood joint ties, installation of rails, ballasting works,
bridge works, drainage and slope protection, construction of Level Crossings
with provisions of stop crossing pavement painting, crossing barriers and
cabins, fencing of PNR Right of Way and other works necessary for the
completion of the project .

(Please see the attached Technical Specifications and Drawings).

0 No further Instructions
0 The DOTC shall give possession of all parts of the Site to the Contractor
upon the effectivity of the Notice to Proceed.
0 The Contractor shall employ the following Key Personnel:

a. Project Manager

b. Project/Civil Engineer (licensed)

c. Materials Engineer (accredited by DPWH)

d. Safety Officer
0 No further instructions.

0 No further instructions.
0 No further instructions.

0 The site investigation reports are: Not Applicable.

0 No further instructions.

75
0 In case of permanent structures, such as buildings of types 4 and 5 as
classified under the National Building Code of the Philippines and other
structures made of steel, iron, or concrete which comply with relevant
structural codes (e.g. DPWH Standard Specifications), such as, but not
limited to steel/concrete bridges, flyovers, aircraft movement area, ports,
dams, tunnels, filtration and treatment plants, sewerage system, power
plants, transmission and communication towers, railway system, and other
similar permanent structures: Fifteen (15) years.

In case of semi-permanent structures, such as building types 1, 2, and 3 as

classified under the National Building Codes of the Philippines,
concrete/asphalt roads, concrete river control, drainage, irrigation lined
canals, river landing, deep wells, rock causeway, pedestrian overpass, and
other similar semi-permanent: Five (5) years.

In case of other structures, such as Bailey and wooden bridges, shallow

wells, spring developments, and other similar structures: Two (2) years.
0 If the Contractor is a joint venture, all partners to the joint venture shall be
jointly and severally liable to the Procuring Entity.
15 Contractor‟s All Risk Insurance (CARI) shall be submitted by the contractor
as part of the requirements for contract facilitation.
18.3(h)(i) No further instructions.
0 The Arbiter is: Construction Industry Arbitration Commission

5th Floor, Executive Building Corner Buendia, Makati City

0 Dayworks are applicable at the rate shown on the Contractor‟s original Bid.

0 The Contractor shall submit the Program of Work to the Procuring Entity‟s
Representative (DOTC Project Manager concerned) within 10 days of
delivery of the Letter of Acceptance.
0 The period between Program of Work updates is 7 to 15 days.

The amount to be withheld for late submission of an updated Program of

Work is 5% of the contract amount.
0 The Funding Source is the Government of the Philippines.
0 The amount of the advance payment is 15% of the Contract Amount.
0 No further instructions.
0 The date by which operating and maintenance manuals are required is
(N/A).

The date of which “as-built” drawings are required is 15 days after project
completion.
0 The amount to be withheld for failing to produce “as built” drawings and/or
operating and maintenance manuals by the date required is 5% of the
contract amount.

76
Section VI. Specifications

77
TABLE OF CONTENTS
I. BACKGROUND ........................................................................................................ 80
II. THE PROJECT ......................................................................................................... 80
PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................. 83
1.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................................... 83
1.2 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR ........................................................................... 86
1.3 SURVEY LAYOUT AND INSTALLATION OF MARKERS, ETC. .......................................... 87
1.4 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ................................................................................ 88
1.5 PROGRAM OF WORK ..................................................................................................... 90
1.6 TEMPORARY WORKS .................................................................................................... 91
1.7 TEST AND INSPECTIONS ............................................................................................... 96
1.8 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................. 98
1.9 QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS.......................................................................... 102
1.10 MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION .................................................................. 108
1.11 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE OF OFFICE AND SERVICE VEHICLE .................. 110

PART 2 EARTHWORKS ................................................................................................... 111

2.1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ........................................................................................ 111
2.2 STRIPPING ................................................................................................................... 116
2.3 EXCAVATION .............................................................................................................. 117
2.4 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION ......................................................................................... 126
2.5 EMBANKMENT ............................................................................................................ 128
2.6 COMPACTION EQUIPMENT AND DENSITY CONTROL STRIPS ...................................... 136

PART 3 DRAINAGE AND SLOPE PROTECTION STRUCTURES ........................... 138

3.1 DRAINAGE DITCHES AND BASINS .............................................................................. 138
3.2 RC PIPES...................................................................................................................... 143
3.3 CLEANING AND REHABILITATION OF EXISTING DRAINAGE EARTH AND CONCRETE
DITCHES ............................................................................................................................. 144
3.4 CONCRETE LINED DITCH ............................................................................................ 145

PART 4 BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................... 148

4.1 CONCRETE WORKS FOR STRUCTURES ........................................................................ 148
4.2 PREFORMED JOINT FILLER AND JOINT SEALING FILLER ............................................ 194

PART 5 TRACKWORKS ................................................................................................... 196

5.1 SCOPE ......................................................................................................................... 196
5.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK .............................................................................................. 196
5.3 TRACK MATERIALS REQUIRED ................................................................................... 196
5.4 PREPARATION AND HANDLING OF TRACK MATERIALS ............................................. 208
5.5 TRANSPORT AND STORAGE OF TRACK MATERIALS ................................................... 210
5.6 USE OF TRACK MATERIALS ........................................................................................ 211
5.7 WELDING OF RAILS .................................................................................................... 214
5.8 TRACK LAYING ........................................................................................................... 217
5.9 STORAGE OF MATERIALS DERIVED FROM THE WORK ............................................... 217
5.10 CONDITIONING OF TRACKS .................................................................................... 217
5.11 TOLERANCE OF TRACK CONSTRUCTION WORK AND TRACK REHABILITATION
WORK 218

78
 5.12 TRIAL TRAIN OPERATION ON NEWLY CONSTRUCTED AND REHABILITATED TRACKS
220
5.13 ADJUSTMENT FOLLOWING RELAYING OF PERMANENT WAYS .............................. 221
5.14 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ............................................................................. 222

PART 6 MISCELLANEOUS WORKS ............................................................................. 224

6.1 FENCING ..................................................................................................................... 224
6.2 CEMENT MORTAR ....................................................................................................... 225
6.3 STONE MASONRY ....................................................................................................... 226
6.4 DEMOLITION WORK .................................................................................................... 229

PART 7 TRACK MATERIALS ......................................................................................... 231

SPECIFICATIONS FOR BALLAST .......................................................................................... 231
SPECIFICATION FOR RAILS (JISE 1101 or Equivalent) ............................................................. 232
SPECIFICATION FOR FISHPLATE FOR ANGLE BARS FOR 37A KG RAIL (JIS E 1102 or equivalent)
............................................................................................................................................ 238
SPECIFICATION FOR TRACKBOLTS (FISHPLATE BOLTS) (JIS E 1107 or equivalent) ................. 241
SPECIFICATION FOR SPRING WASHERS (JIS E 1115 or equivalent) .......................................... 242
SPECIFICATION FOR TRACK SPIKES (PNR SPECS) ............................................................... 244
SPECIFICATION FOR TURNOUT SLEEPERS FOR TURNOUT NO. 10 37 Kg Rails ...................... 245
SPECIFICATION FOR TURNOUT NO.10 37 KG RAIL (JIS E 1303) ............................................. 246
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR FUSHION WELDING OF RAILS BY ALUMINO – THERMIC
PROCESS,SKV – F Process ..................................................................................................... 248
SPECIFICATIONS FOR WOODEN JOINT TIES ........................................................................ 253

PART 8 DPWH STANDARDS FOR ASPHALT PAVEMENT OVERLAY AND

PAVEMENT MARKINGS ................................................................................................. 258
ITEM 306 – BITUMINOUS ROAD MIX SURFACE COURSE ...................................................... 258
ITEM 606 – PAVEMENT MARKINGS ..................................................................................... 264

79
I. BACKGROUND
The Philippine National Railways Metro Manila Commuter Line has an existing line from
Tutuban/Caloocan to Calamba which consist of a double railway track alignment from
Tutuban/Caloocan to Sucat and a single railway track alignment from Sucat to Calamba. At
present PNR is operating its commuter trains here from Tutuban to Calamba City.

In view of the demands for a cheap, safe, fast and reliable mass transport, the Philippine
National Railways is embarking on a project named Double Tracking of Sucat to Alabang
section. The project will redound to the reduction of travel time and increase train operation‟s
capacity.

II. THE PROJECT

The project involves the construction of new track from Sucat to Alabang for the following
items of works but not limited to:

1. Earthworks – Clearing and grubbing, disposal of excavated unsuitable materials and

embankment formation of double track from Sucat Station to Alabang Station
including a 300m each station yard at Sucat and Alabang Station inclusive of the
required survey works. Construction/installation of Embankment and Ballast wall
protection at 2,200 linear meter each.

2. Drainage and Slope Protections – Supply and install concrete lined ditch, U-type ditch
and catch basin on locations to be designated by the Engineer.

3. Trackworks – Supply and install track ballast, 20meter-37kg rails including trackbolts
and angle bars, #10 x 37kg Turnouts and switch ties, pre-stressed concrete sleepers
with rail fastening, wood joint ties with trackspikes and thermit weldings and all other
necessary works.

4. Bridge - Design of One (1) Bridge Slab Deck using E35 Cooper Loading at Alabang
including construction of this Superstructure consisting of the supply/delivery of 2
each pre-stressed concrete girders AASHTO Type IVB, L=21.7m., 4000psi
concreting works on slab with reinforcement(Vol=17.95cu.m., RSB 4,343.84kgs.),
bearing pad & accessories (4 ea. elastomeric bearing pads, 200mm x 600mm x
50mm), 0.08 cu.m. Non-shrink mortar, 2.4mts 75mm dia. PVC Pipe, 3.2sq.m.
premolded expansion joint filler, scaffolding and other works and materials to
complete.

5. Fencing – Supply and install solid fence and see thru fence including survey works
and all coordination on the PNR Right of Way on both sides of the tracks (South and
North bound).

6. Level Crossing – Demolition of existing road crossings affected by the double

tracking including its disposal on locations to be designated by the Engineer, supply
and install asphalt pavement overlay after laying of tracks, railroad crossing lines,
installation of two (2) crossing cabins with manual crossing barriers and other related
works.

80
7. Demolition of Old Alabang Station – Demolition of Old Station, clearing & grubbing,
hauling and disposal of demolished materials, preparation of embankment for
earthworks and trackworks, turn-over of reusable materials to PNR and other works to
complete the project.

8. Construction drawings shall first be prepared by the Contractor and submitted as draft
for review and approval of the Project Engineer and Project Manager. If approved it
will be submitted in a standard size tracing paper for GFC Stamping and signature of
Project Engineer and Project Manager prior to any actual constructions.

9. All measurement for payment shall be referred to in the Bill of Quantities, thus all
other works not specified herein shall be deemed incidental for payment and have
been considered by the contractor in his unit cost estimate for the completion of the
project.

10. Site Investigation information -The Contractor shall be deemed to have acquired and
considered the information critical during the preparation of his bid and have carried
out such further tests as he may consider necessary. No claims for additional payment
will be considered from the Contractor on the grounds that the information acquired
from the Engineer is incorrect or misleading.

11. No work that will in any way adversely affect train operations shall be started until
adequate provision, satisfactory to the Engineer, has been made to allow trains to
operate safely and punctually. No train operations shall be hampered by the
Contractor except by written permission from the Engineer. This condition is further
explained under the General Obligations of the Contractor.

12. The contractor shall ensure that the line is clear from any obstructions that might
cause accidents/derailments. The contractor will be liable for any untoward incidents
that might occur during the project implementation caused by these obstructions
during his daytime and/or nighttime works.

13. As soon as an award has been made for the project, the contractor shall post a
tarpaulin signboard suitably framed for outdoor display at the project location. The
location will be as instructed by the Engineer. The design and format of the tarpaulin
shown below shall have the following specifications: (as per COA Circular No. 2013-
004).

Tarpaulin , white, 8ft x 8ft Font Size : Main Information - 3”

Resolution : 70 dpi Sub-information – 1”
Font : Helvetica Font Color – Black

81
 PHILIPPINE NATIONAL RAILWAYS
PNR Executive Bldg., Mayhaligue St., Tutuban,Tondo, Manila, Philippines

Project : _____________________________ Cost: ________________

Location: ____________________________ Fund Source/s_________

Implementing Agency : Philippine National Railways

Development Partner/s_______________________________________
Contractor/Supplier : ________________________________________
Brief Description of the Project : _______________________________

Project Details :

Project Date Project Status Remarks

Target Date of Percentage of As of Cost Incurred Date
Duration Started
Completion Completion (Date) to Date Completed

For particulars or complaints about this project, please contact the Regional Office or Cluster
which has audit jurisdiction on this project:
COA Regional Office No./Cluster ______________________
Address : _________________________________________
Contact No. : __________or Text COA Citizen‟s Desk at 0915-5391957

Note:
1. The above form shall be filled-up by the Contractor in coordination with the PNR‟s
Representative. It shall be maintained as current as possible and updated as instructed by the
Engineer.

2. No additional payment will be measured for this works since the cost related herein
are included in the Contractor‟s detailed estimate for contingencies.

82
 PART 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 GENERAL

1.1.1 SCOPE OF SPECIFICATIONS

The Specifications define the general requirements for the quality and control
of materials and workmanship for the satisfactory completion of the work
herein described in the following Sections.

1.1.2 COORDINATION OF SPECIFICATIONS WITH OTHER

CONTRACTDOCUMENTS

These Specifications shall be read in conjunction with the other contract

documents. In case of ambiguities or discrepancies, the Specifications shall
have precedence over the Drawings and/or as instructed/resolved by the
Engineer. Any specifications for the works not specified herein shall be
referred to a standard specification and/or approved by the Engineer.

1.1.3 SITE INVESTIGATION INFORMATION

The Contractor shall be deemed to have acquired and considered the

information critical during the preparation of his bid and have carried out such
further tests as he may consider necessary. No claims for additional payment
will be considered from the Contractor on the grounds that the information
acquired from the Engineer is incorrect or misleading.

1.1.4 REFERENCE IN SPECIFICATION

Reference to standard specifications such as AREA, ASTM or AASHTO shall

in every case be deemed to include the latest edition or issue of such
specifications. Such specifications are referred to by abbreviations, for
example AASHTO T 193 means the Standard Specifications for concrete
aggregates.

References to parts, items, clauses or paragraphs which appear in the

following text, but which have no title, shall be parts, items, clauses or
paragraphs in the Specifications.

1.1.5 TESTING

The testing methods and procedures shall be in accordance with ASTM unless
otherwise specified in the particular Section of this Specification or as shown
on the Drawings and as may be directed by the Engineer in writing. When
samples of materials are to be taken for testing, the methods to be utilized are
fully described in the ASTM and shall be followed unless described in this
Specification or referred to in this Specification to other standards or as
directed in writing by the Engineer.

83
 Any material which does not conform to the requirements of these
Specifications will be rejected whether in place or not. Such material shall be
removed immediately from the Site at the Contractor‟s expense.

1.1.6 STANDARDS

In the specifications, references are made to the standards issued by the

following organizations and referred to by abbreviations shown.

AREA - American Railway Engineering Association

AASHTO - American Association of State Highways and

Transportation Officials

ANSI - American National Standards Institute

ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials

AWS - American Welding Society

AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction

AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute

ACI - American Concrete Institute

JIS - Japanese Industrial Standard

PS - Philippine Standard

SSPC - Steel Structure Painting Council

Where one of the above standards is referred to the corresponding other

standards listed above it shall be considered to be equally applicable, provided
that performance and functions of materials, or workmanship or methods of
tests, etc., are equal to or better than those specified in the referred standards
and provided that the quantity of the works will not be increased on account of
the compliance to with the new standard.

The Contractor shall submit proof that, when a standard other than that
specified is proposed, it is in fact equal to or better than the specified standard.
Such reference shall in every case be considered to be made to the latest
edition of the said references.

1.1.7 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT

Throughout the Contract, whenever practicable, the International System of

Units (SI) has been used. Where not practicable, other customary units have
been used like for instance the units board foot/feet (bf).

Measurement and payment shall be as specified only in the Bill of Quantities.

1.1.8 ABBREVIATIONS

84
 In these Technical Specifications, the following abbreviations are used:

(a) millimeter(s) mm(s)

(b) centimeter(s) cm(s)

(c) meter(s) m(s)

(d) Newton(s) N(s)

(e) metric ton(s) t(s)

(f) maximum max.

(g) minimum min.

(h) typical typ.

(i) Drawing(s) DWG(s)

(j) elevation(s) EL(s)

(k) diameter dia

(l) division Div

(m) approximate(ly) approx.

(n) Quantity Qty.

(o) Length(s) Lg(s)

(p) Pascal Pa

(q) Mega Pascal MPa

(r) Linear Meter LM

(s) Square Meter M2 or M2 or sq. m.

(t) Cubic Meter M3 or M3 or cu. M.

1.1.9 DRAWINGS

A list of drawings which accompany these specifications is given in Section

VII - Drawings.

85
1.2 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR

The Contractor shall be responsible in undertaking all the tests required by the
Engineer and conduct the testing of materials from a legitimate testing laboratory in
compliance with the requirements of the Contract.

The Contractor shall prepare all requisite working and shop drawings and submit to
the Engineer for approval.

The Contractor shall, without extra payment, re-establish railway facilities, etc.,
where these have been broken up by him during the execution of the Contract. Power
supply cables, telephone cables, water supply pipes, drain pipes, etc., affected during
the works shall be kept in working condition.

The Contractor shall not disrupt nor interfere with the continuous daily train operation
plying the route where the Contractor proposes his construction operation until the
Contractor‟s proposals have been approved by the Engineer. It shall be the
Contractor‟s responsibility to coordinate and obtain from PNR the daily train
operation schedule prior to commencing the works. The Contractor shall also
coordinate with PNR about the unscheduled train movements or change in train
schedule during the works.

No work that will in any way adversely affect train operation shall be started until
adequate provision, satisfactory to the Engineer, has been made to allow trains to
operate safely and punctually.

No train operation shall be hampered by the Contractor except by written permission

from the Engineer.

When the train route under repair/construction is being used by the traveling public,
special attention shall be paid to such conditions that the train can travel in comfort
and safety without undue delay.

The Contractor shall submit his proposed method of construction for approval and
coordinate with the Engineer prior to commencement of the actual construction
operation.

Materials stored along the railway tracks shall be so placed and the work at all time
shall be conducted as to cause as little obstruction to the train operation as possible.

The Contractor shall bear all expenses that will be incurred for the purpose
particularly over the section of railway undergoing improvement/construction and
maintaining such structures and other features as may be necessary without direct
compensation except otherwise provided and accepted by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall appoint, subject to approval of the Engineer, a responsible

member of his staff to inspect daily all traffic aids and to maintain the proper
effectiveness of these traffic aids at all times.

86
1.3 SURVEY LAYOUT AND INSTALLATION OF MARKERS, ETC.

1.3.1 SCOPE

This Section covers topographic survey including layout and installation of

markers.

1.3.2 TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY

All surveys shall be carried out in reference to Bench Marks of Monuments

and Chart Datum designated by the Engineer.

All survey work specified in this Section shall be carried out by licensed
Surveyors. The Contractor shall submit in advance for the Engineer‟s
approval, true copy of licenses and qualifications of the surveyors to be
employed for the works.

The Contractor shall, when required by the Engineer, carry out the
topographic survey of the job-site by means of traversing, and leveling. The
survey works shall be done in accordance with the site requirements prior to
commencing the works.

1.3.3 LAYOUT AND INSTALLATION OF MARKERS

The Contractor shall layout the Works and shall be solely responsible for the
accuracy of such laying out. The Contractor shall provide, fix and maintain all
stakes, marks or the like which are necessary for the accurate laying out of the
works, and shall take all necessary precautions to prevent their removal or
disturbance, all as approved by the Engineer

Laying out of Work shall include the verification of position of all markers
and the supply and installation of any and all other markers which the
Contractor may require for the proper execution and completion of the Works,
and shall also include the repositioning of the Employer‟s marker if such
repositioning is deemed necessary by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer.

1.3.4 FIELD NOTES, ETC.

Field notes, calculation sheets and all other documents shall be prepared in the
English language and in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. The Contractor
shall submit such notes and other documents on completion of the respective
works or, if so required, during the progress of works for the Engineer‟s
inspection thereof.

1.3.5 SOIL INVESTIGATION

Contractor shall determine the sites for soil investigations based on the
Engineer‟s maps, drawings and instructions. The Contractor shall also
establish the levels of the ground and the various levels of investigation to
which he shall be solely responsible for the accuracy of such location and
elevations.

87
1.4 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

1.4.1 GENERAL

This Section sets forth supplementary and additional provisions relating to

materials, products, equipment and workmanship required under this Contract.

1.4.2 MATERIALS

All materials used in the Works shall be of the best quality of their respective
kinds as specified herein and or described in the Drawings and Bill of
Quantities, obtained from sources and suppliers approved by the Engineer and
shall comply strictly with the current issue of the appropriate standards
published by the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM), Japanese
Industrial Standard (J.I.S.) or other equivalent national or international
standard approved by the Engineer. Reference to American or Japanese
Standards in the Specifications or Bill of Quantities does not imply any bias in
favor of equipment, fittings, finishing, etc. The Contractor may relate his offer
to other National Standards or Codes of Practice but shall explain the system
used and provide the Engineer with all the necessary information and
comparisons in English showing that his proposed standards are equivalent to
the specified ASTM or JIS Standards. Three copies of such alternative
standards in English are to be supplied by the Contractor to the Engineer when
required. Any material not fully specified herein shall be the best of their kind
and be specifically approved by the Engineer.

In all cases where the name of a particular type or make of material or

equipment is referred to on Drawings or elsewhere in these Specifications, is
only intended to indicate the acceptable standard. The Contractor may offer
alternative material or equipment to that specified provided that the
Contractor‟s offer shall be at least of equal quality and capacity. When
alternatives are offered, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for
approval statement detailing the alternatives, and shall include full technical
descriptions, drawings, and specifications, and shall provide such full
information as is required to enable the contractor to demonstrate to the
Engineer that the alternative offered is equivalent to the item specified. Any
further information that the Engineer may require shall be submitted by the
Contractor when called for.

Articles or Materials Prepared Off Site. The Contractor shall supply to the
Engineer detailed drawings of pre-constructed units or parts thereof when such
are to be prepared or manufactured at a place not on the Site. The approval of
the Engineer of such drawings shall be obtained in writing by the Contractor
before preparation or manufacture commences.

1.4.3 NOTICE OF MANUFACTURES

The contractor shall give to the Engineer a written notice of the articles or
materials to be prepared or manufactured off-site, stating the place and time of
the preparation or manufacture, in sufficient time for the Engineer to make

88
 inspection at all stages of the work and not only when any such article or
material is completed.

Any article or material which is prepared or manufactured without giving such

prior written notice to the Engineer may be rejected if the Engineer considers
that inspection was necessary during the progress of the preparation or
manufacture.

1.4.4 WORKMANSHIP

All workmanship shall be of the best quality appropriate to each category of

work in the light of internationally recognized standards of practice. During
its progress, and upon completion, the Works shall conform to the lines,
elevations, and grades as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall
complete the proposed Works in every detail as specified. However, should
there be any detail or details omitted from the Drawings or Specifications
which are essential to the intended completeness of any work, then it shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish and install such details, subject
to approval by the Engineer. Any work or workmanship not conforming to the
best practices shall be subject to rejection.

1.4.5 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

The requirements under materials and workmanship are incidental to other

items of work and will not be measured for payment.

89
1.5 PROGRAM OF WORK

1.5.1 DESCRIPTION

The Contractor shall within seven (7)) calendar days from the date of the
Letter of Acceptance, submit to the Employer thru the Engineer a detailed
working program including among others, Gantt Chart/S-Curve and PERT-
CPM schedule. The program shall, in every respect, comply with the
stipulations regarding the sequence of work stated in the Contract Documents.

All works shall be completed within the Contract Period stated in the Contract
and by elaborating the program, due attention shall be made to all measures
which reasonably can be taken in the order to diminish the inconvenience (for
the common railway traffic) and to coordinate, when required, concurrent
labor operation. The work program shall be approved by the Engineer before
the work starts.

90
1.6 TEMPORARY WORKS

This Section sets forth supplementary and additional provisions relating to

preparatory works, facilities and safeguards required for execution of works for this
Contract.

1.6.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

The Contractor shall be responsible for temporary works, facilities and

safeguards specified or required under the Contract.

The Contractor shall select, arrange for, and if necessary pay for the use of
sites for detours, for all central mixing plants for concrete and for the storage
of equipment, for office buildings, housing, or other uses necessary to the
prosecution of the work:

Before any land belonging to the Employer or to a private landowner is used

for any purpose in connection with the prosecution of the Work, the
Engineer‟s approval shall be obtained.

If any utility for water, electricity, drainage, etc., passing through the site will
be affected by the Works, the contractor shall provide a satisfactory alternative
utility in full working order to the satisfaction of the owner of the utility and
the Engineer, before the cutting of the existing utility.

Temporary Works shall be adequate for intended uses and for all loads
imposed without excessive settlement, deflection or deformation. All parts
and members shall be properly supported, wedged, braced and secured to
prevent displacement or failure.

Temporary and permanent utilities used for construction shall be adequate for
intended uses and not to be overloaded or otherwise used or arranged in any
manner which will endanger persons, properties and premises of the Works.
Connections shall be properly made, lines and wirings securely anchored in
place, and protected against accidents.

Upon completion of the Works, unless otherwise required or directed, all

preparatory structures, installations and utility services shall be disconnected
and removed from the Site.

1.6.2 RIGHT-OF-WAY

The right-of-way is the strip of land acquired for and devoted to the railway.
The right-of-way widths shown on the drawings are approximate only; the
effective widths will be established by the Engineer.

1.6.3 TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND SERVICES

Water: The Contractor shall provide and maintain the necessary pumps,
valves, motors, storage tanks or reservoir and distribution lines to adequately
supply water for the Project.

91
 a) Drinking Water: Provide and maintain canister, coolers or connected
drinking fountains, of sufficient number to reasonable serve the Project.

b) Construction Water: Provide and maintain temporary water service

and distribution of adequate capacity for construction purposes. Include
portable units, lines extensions, hoses, valves, etc., as necessary.

c) Electricity: The Contractor shall provide and maintain supply of

electricity, including a stand-by generator of adequate capacity, to reasonably
serve the Project.

(1) Provide and maintain temporary electric service and distribution of

adequate capacity for power, lighting, and other construction needs including
wiring, transformers, safety devices, connections, etc., as necessary.

(2) Provide temporary lighting as necessary to properly and safely perform

work at enclosed spaces or under hazardous conditions. Likewise, provide
lights for night protection as necessary.

(3) Temporary electrical system shall comply with the Philippine

Electrical Code. The Employer will assist the contractor to secure the
necessary power source and permit prior to the temporary installation of
electric service to site. However, the cost of installation, permits and other
related works for this purpose shall be borne by the Contractor.

d) The Contractor shall undertake or arrange for the regular daily clean-
up and removal of trash, waste, construction debris, etc., from the Site and
Temporary Work Yard to disposal areas designated by the Engineer or in
accordance with local Codes and Regulations.

1.6.4 FIRST-AID AND FIRE PROTECTION

Emergency Calls: Determine locations of nearest available police, hospital or

medical services and maintain their list at the Contractor‟s Site Office. The
copied list shall be furnished to the Engineer.

Fire Protection

a) Establish appropriate emergency routes and procedures and submit

plan to the Engineer.

b) Maintain fire extinguishers and other facilities necessary for reasonable

fire protection deterrent action at the Site and Temporary Work Yard.

Minor Injuries: Provide and maintain at the Contractor‟s Site Office

reasonable bandage and sterilant materials for first-aid treatment of minor
injuries.

1.6.5 CONSTRUCTION SAFEGUARDS

92
 Trenches intersecting thoroughfares shall be provided with bridges or other
crossing with railings, as necessary, suitable for safely carrying the type of
traffic involved.

Open shafts, ramps, platforms and other such conditions shall be protected by
sturdy barricades or railings.

Scaffolds, ladders ramps, hoists, and other facilities shall be provided,

maintained and operated as necessary.

Storage and shop areas shall be provided, arranged and maintained at

approved locations as necessary to properly store, handle and fabricate the
various materials and equipment required.

1.6.6 ACCESS

The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate access to the Project Site
and all areas related to the Works.

(1) The Contractor shall provide, maintain, and remove on completion of

the works for which they are required adequate access to the Project Site
including sleepers, tracks, and stagings over roads, access and service roads,
temporary crossings or bridges over streams or unstable ground, and he shall
make them suitable in every respect for carrying all Constructional Plant
required for the Work, for providing access and traffic for himself or others, or
for any other purpose. Such temporary road works shall be constructed to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, but the Contractor shall nevertheless be
responsible for any damage done to or used by such temporary road works.

(2) Before constructing temporary road works, the Contractor shall make
all necessary arrangements, including payment if required, with the public
authorities or landowners concerned, for the use of the land, and he shall
obtain the approval of the Engineer. Such approval will not, however, relieve
the contractor of his responsibility. Upon completion of the Works, the
contractor shall clean up and restore the land to the satisfaction of the
Engineer or the landowner concerned. If existing roads will be used for access
to the Site, the Contractor shall maintain such road for the duration of its use.

The Contractor shall make all arrangements necessary to permit the passage
along the railway section relating to this Contract of the Constructional Plants,
materials and employees belonging to other Contractors engaged in the
construction of contiguous stretches of railway (if any). For this purpose the
Contractor and the Contractors concerned in the construction of the
stretches contiguous to those through which they pass shall, when necessary
and with at least 15 days notice, request the Engineer for permission to pass
and submit a schedule for passage. After the Engineer has granted such
permission and approved the schedule submitted, both the Contractors
permitting the passage and those requesting it shall undertake to observe the
schedule approved by the Engineer for the passage along the site without any
right to extra payment in consequence of the restrictions on passage or the
necessary temporary suspension of works due to the aforesaid schedule.(3)

93
1.6.7 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC RAMPS

In cases where it is necessary or required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall

construct and maintain temporary traffic ramps, and furnish all the labor and
materials required thereof.

1.6.8 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL

a) In order to facilitate traffic through or around the Works, or whenever

ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall erect and maintain at prescribed
points on the work and at the approaches to the work, traffic signs, lights,
flares, barricades and other facilities as required by the Engineer for the
direction and control of traffic.

b) Where required, or where directed by the Engineer, the Contractor

shall furnish and station competent flagmen whose sole duties shall consist
in directing the movement of traffic through or around the work.

(c) In addition to the requirements of (1) and (2) above, the Contractor
shall furnish and erect, within or in the vicinity of the project area, such
warning and guide signs as may be ordered by the Engineer.

1.6.9 PROTECTION OF DRAINAGE STRUCTURES, ACCESS ROAD, ETC.

1) In the movement of the Contractor‟s equipment and/or material from

one portion of the work to another on the existing road or bridges, spillage
resulting from haulage operation shall be removed immediately at the
Contractor‟s expense.

2) The Contractor shall assume all cost of constructing any and all
temporary bridges and accessory features, and the removal of the same after
the completion of the project.

3) The Contractor shall carry out all temporary control measures as

shown on the plans or ordered by the Engineer during the life of this contract
to control soil erosion and water pollution to protect the existing structures as
well as new structures to be provided under this contract, through use of
beams, dikes, dams, sediment basins, fiber mats, netting, gravel, mulches,
grasses, slope drains, and other erosion control devices or methods. The
temporary erosion control provisions shall be coordinated with the permanent
erosion control features specified elsewhere in the contract to the extent
practical to assure economical, effective and continuous erosion control
throughout the construction and post construction period. At the pre-
construction conference or prior to the start of the applicable construction, the
Contractor shall submit for acceptance his schedules for accomplishment of
temporary and permanent erosion control work, as are applicable for bridges
and other structures at watercourses, lakes, ponds or other areas of water
impoundment.

1.6.10 EXTRAORDINARY TRAFFIC

94
 The Contractor is responsible for carrying out any necessary investigations
and the obtaining of approvals, licenses, escorts and any other necessary
facilities in order to enable extraordinary traffic to be moved on the roads in
the project area. Any expenses arising out of this requirement shall be deemed
to have been included in other item of works.

1.6.11 MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF TRAFFIC

The Contractor shall keep the existing road open to traffic during the
performance of the works, provided that when approved by the Engineer the
Contractor may bypass traffic over a detour.

The contractor shall take necessary care at all times during the execution of
the works to ensure the existing convenience and safety of residents along and
adjacent to the road, and any public highway that may be affected by the
Works. Any failure of the Contractor to meet this requirement will entitle the
Engineer to carry out such work as he deems to be necessary and to charge the
Contractor with the full cost thereof plus ten percent of such cost, which sum
will be deducted from any money due or which may become due to the
Contractor under the Contract. The Engineer shall indicate the number and
type of road crossings involve in this Project.

1.6.12 PARKING

The parking space if any for use of vehicles for the project shall be maintained
by the Contractor.

1.6.13 PROTECTION

The Contractor shall provide barricades as necessary for public protection.

1.6.14 COMMUNICATION FACILITIES

The Contractor shall provide telephone between jobsite and Engineer‟s/

Contractor‟s Office.

1.6.15 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

1.6.15.1 Temporary works

The requirements under Temporary Works are incidental to other items

of work and will not be measured for payment.

95
1.7 TEST AND INSPECTIONS

1.7.1 GENERAL

This Section sets forth general provisions regarding tests and inspections
required under this Contract.

1.7.2 FIELD LABORATORY

The Contractor shall provide all the necessary testing of materials from
legitimate testing laboratory as approved by the Engineer and where
laboratory tests specified under various sections of the Specifications shall be
carried out, all at the Contractor‟s expense.

1.7.3 TESTS

The Contractor shall carry out all tests required under the various Sections of
the Specifications in the presence and under the supervision of the Engineer.

All tests shall generally be carried out in accordance with the requirements and
procedures of the referred standards for the Engineer‟s approval.

The tests shall be considered as particularized if the purpose or normal title

such tests are specified.

1) For the estimation purpose, the requirements of ASTM, AASHTO, JIS or

similar standards shall be taken into account.

2) Where the tests are specified to be carried out in a manner directed by the
Engineer, the requirements of the above mentioned standards for similar tests
shall be taken into account for estimation purpose and the tests shall be
considered also as specified.

Unless otherwise expressly stated, all tests and the works in connection
therewith shall be considered as incidental to the Permanent Works which
require such tests and all costs thereof shall be deemed to be included in and
covered by Pay Items as shown in the Bill of Quantities.

1.7.4 TEST AT THE SITE

Notwithstanding any previous inspections and tests, all materials delivered to

the Site shall be subject to examinations and tests, if so directed by the
Engineer. Should such test be desired by Engineer, Contractor will be advised
in sufficient time to permit such testing.

1) All such examinations and tests shall be carried out by the Contractor at his
cost in the presence of the Engineer in accordance with the normal practice in
respect of such examinations and tests if the same may be carried out by the
Contractor with his staff and equipment available at the Site.

2) Otherwise, the tests shall be made at a laboratory by the Engineer at the

cost to the Contractor.

96
 The Engineer shall be at liberty to reject any materials which do not comply
with the requirements of the Contract notwithstanding any previous approval
thereof.

The Contractor shall not be entitled to any extra payments or extension of time
for completion of the Works on account of the rejection of materials due to
their non-compliance with the requirements of the Contract or of the waiting
time reasonably required for carrying out the examinations and tests.

The Contractor shall furnish test samples as instructed and shall provide
reasonable assistance and cooperation as necessary to permit tests to be
performed on materials or work in place including reasonable stoppage of
Work during testing.

1.7.5 MEASUREMENT OF PAYMENT

Unless otherwise expressly stated, all tests and the works in connection
therewith shall be considered as incidental to the Permanent Works which
required such tests and all costs thereof shall be deemed to be included in and
covered by the Pay Items as shown in the Bill of Quantities.

97
1.8 SUBMITTALS

1.8.1 GENERAL

This Section sets forth general provisions regarding submittals required of the
Contractor.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all construction schedules,

monthly progress reports, final construction report, statement of completion,
final statement, survey data, shop drawings, as-built drawings, product data,
samples, and construction photographs as specified.

Until submittal is reviewed by the Engineer, approved and released for

distribution, work involving relevant product data may not proceed.

Engineer‟s review will be signified by comments as required identifying items

for resubmission and by stamp of Engineer when work is released for
distribution.

1.8.2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES, SURVEY DATA AND SHOP

DRAWINGS

Schedules, data, field drawings and shop drawings shall be originally prepared
by Contractor, Sub-Contractor, Supplier or Distributor which shall illustrate
appropriate portions of work. The work items shall be described in relation to
responsibility, fabrication, layout, setting or erection details as specified in
appropriate Sections.

Submittal drawings to be reproducible transparency with one opaque print.

Maximum sheet size is 610mm x 1070mm (23.5 in. x 33 in.)

1.8.3 PRODUCT DATA

Certain Sections of the Specifications state that manufacturer‟s standard

schematic drawings, catalogue sheets, diagrams, schedules, performance
charts, illustrations and other standard descriptive data will be accepted in lieu
of shop drawings.

From the above and when necessary:

1) Delete information which is not applicable to the project;

2) Supplement standard information to provide additional information
applicable to the project;
3) Show dimensions and clearances required; and
4) Show performance characteristics and capacities.
1.8.4 SAMPLES

Submit samples in sizes and quantities specified.

Where color is a criterion, submit full range of colors.

98
 Construct field samples or mock-ups at locations acceptable to Engineer.

Construct each sample or mock-up complete, including work of all trades

required to finish work.

Reviewed and approved samples or mock-ups will become standards of

workmanship and material against which, installed work will be checked on
the Project.

1.8.5 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

Review shop drawings product data and samples prior to submission.

Verify:

1) Field Measurements
2) Field Construction Criteria
3) Catalogue Numbers and Similar Data
Coordinate each submittal with the Project requirements and Contract
Documents.

Contractor‟s responsibility for errors and omissions on submittals is not

relieved by Engineer‟s review of submittals.

Contractor‟s responsibility for deviations on submittals from requirements of

Contract Documents is not relieved by Engineer‟s review of submittals, unless
Engineer gives written acceptance of specified deviations.

Notify Engineer, in writing at time of submission, of deviation on submittals

from requirements of Contract Documents.

After Engineer‟s review, distribute copies.

The Contractor shall schedule submissions at least 5 working days before

dates reviewed submittals will be needed.

The Contractor shall submit one (1) reproducible transparency and one opaque
print of schedules, survey data and shop drawings, and number of copies of
project data which Contractor requires for distribution plus four (4) copies
which will be retained by Engineer.

The Contractor‟s submittals shall be accompanied with transmittal letter, in

duplicate copies, containing:

1) Date
2) Project title and number
3) Contractor‟s name and address
4) Number of each shop drawing, product data and sample
5) Other pertinent data
Submittals shall include:
1) Data and revision dates
2) Project title and number

99
 3) Name of - Contractor
- Sub-Contractor
- Supplier
- Manufacturer
- Separate retailer when pertinent
4) Identification of product or material
5) Relation to adjacent structure or material
6) Field dimensions, clearly identified as such
7) Specifications Section Number
8) Applicable standards, such as ASTM, JIS numbers
9) Contractor‟s stamp, initialed or signed, certifying review of submittal,
verification of field measurements and compliance with Contract Documents

1.8.6 DISTRIBUTION OF SUBMITTALS AFTER REVIEW

Distribute copies of shop drawings and product data which carry Engineer‟s
stamp, to:
1) Job-site file
2) Record documents file
3) Sub-Contractors
4) Suppliers
5) Fabricators
As appropriate in each case.

1.8.7 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

Provide record progress photographs taken at a fixed point and angle as when
and where directed by the Engineer as intervals of not more than twenty eight
(28) calendar days.

The photographs shall be sufficient in number and location to record the exact
progress of works. Provide one (1) proof print of each photograph taken and
the negative and five (5) colored copies, 245 x 203 mm of any of the
photographs selected by the Engineer. Two (2) copies are to be signed by the
Contractor and the Engineer. Albums to accommodate the selected
photographs shall be supplied by Contractor.

1.8.8 MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORT

The Contractor shall maintain a daily log describing the important events
pertaining to the works, the working hours, the number of laborers employed,
effective operation time of equipment, overtime hours, delays due to
meteorological conditions, the lack of labor, materials or equipment, progress
made and instructions, notifications and recommendations made by the
Engineer.

The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer ten (10) copies of the monthly
progress reports within seven (7) days after the end of every month, indicating
progress made, construction activities, inventories of material used and stored
on jobsite numbers of labors, equipment available and hours utilized, number

100
 of working days, the summary of the daily log of the month and all important
events in relation to the Works.

1.8.9 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS AND FINAL CONSTRUCTION REPORT

Within twenty eight (28) calendar days after the issuance of the Taking Over
Certificate, the Contractor shall prepare and submit two (2) sets of As-Built
Drawings and final construction report as draft. And within fourteen (14) days
after the issuance of the last Taking Over Certificate, the Contractor shall
submit five (5) sets of final construction report and final As-Built Drawings.
As built Drawings of the works consist of one (1) set of original size copy, one
(1) set of original size reproducible, two (2) sets of reduced size copy, one (1)
set of reduced size reproducible and one (1) set of electronic file, which shall
be subject to approval of the Engineer.

101
1.9 QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

1.9.1 GENERAL

This Section sets forth supplementary and additional provisions relating to

quality control and additional provisions relating to quality control and
workmanship required under this Contract.

1.9.2 CONTRACTOR’S SUBMISSION

All shop drawings, certificates of compliance manufacturer‟s literature,

material samples, mix design, guarantees, equipment data, and other
information as called for under the various headings of these specifications
shall be submitted by the Contractor as required. The adequacy and accuracy
of submittals for compliance and so certify them in accordance with the
quality control requirements. Except in cases where approval by the Engineer
is required under the various headings of these specifications or on the
Contract Drawings, certification by the Contractor that a submittal, complies
with the contract requirements shall signify completion of the review process.
However, the Engineer reserves the right to review and require correction of
any submittal, but failure to do so shall not constitute a waiver of any
requirement of the contract drawings or specifications.

a) Within twenty eight (28) calendar days after receipt of Notice to

Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer four (4) copies of
submittals control document listing all submittal items. In preparing the
document adequate time will be allowed for review by the Contractor‟s quality
control organization and a minimum of fourteen (14) calendar days for review
approval, and possible re-submittal of items for which approval by the
Engineer is required and items for which deviation from the requirements of
the contract drawings or specifications is proposed by the Contractor.
Scheduling of submittals on the control document shall be coordinated with
the approved progress schedule. All required submittals must be made in time
to allow for review, certification, approval if required, procurement, delivery
and preparatory inspection of the item before it is needed in construction. It is
the Contractor‟s obligation to comply with the specification requirements for
the items on the Schedule. The Contractor‟s quality control
representative shall review the listing at least every twenty eight (28) calendar
days and take appropriate action to maintain a complete and current listing.
Copies of updated or corrected listing shall be submitted to the Engineer at
least every twenty eight (28) calendar days in four (4) copies. Payment will
not be made for any material or equipment which does not comply with
contract requirements. The Contractor shall submit a preliminary submittal
control document covering submittals required within the first fifty six (56)
calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed prior to making any
submittals.

b) All submittals made under this Section entitled “Shop Drawings” in a

foreign language shall be accompanied by an English translation.

102
c) The Contractor shall maintain a complete file of all submittals which
he has certified and all submittals which have also been approved by the
Engineer. Upon the completion of the work under this Contract, the Contract
shall furnish one complete set of prints of all shop drawings as finally certified
in addition to those furnished in accordance with the Specification
requirements for shop drawings. These drawings shall show changes and
revisions made up to the time the Project is completed and accepted.

d) Submittal control documents and all submittals to the Engineer shall be

addressed to:

The Project Manager

Project Implementation Office

PNR Executive Bldg, Mayhaligue St. Tutuban

Tondo, Metro Manila

e) The Contractor shall perform on the site, and with his own
organization, work equivalent to at least fifty (50) percent of the total amount
of work to be performed under the Contract. If during the progress of the
work hereunder, the Contractor shall request a reduction in such percentage to
the Employer through the Engineer, and the Engineer determines that it would
be to the Employer‟s advantage, the percentage of the work required to be
performed by the Contractor may be reduced, provided, written approval of
such reduction is obtained by the Contractor from the Engineer. If the above
percentage is less than 100%, the successful bidder must furnish to the
engineer within fifteen (15) days after award a description of the items of
work which he will perform with his own forces, the estimated cost of those
items, and the percentage of total work those items represent.

The Employer will furnish to the Contractor some rails available as listed on
the drawings to be incorporated or installed in the work or used in its
performance. Such property will be furnished at the place shown on the
drawings, and the Contractor will be required to accept delivery when made,
paying any demurrage or detention charges incurred, and loading and
transporting the property to the job site at his own expense. All such property
will be installed or incorporated into the work at the expense of the Contractor,
unless otherwise indicated herein. The Contractor shall verify the quantity and
condition of such Government furnished property when delivered to him,
acknowledge receipt thereof in writing to the Engineer, and in case of damage
to or shortage of such property, he shall within 24 hours report in writing such
damage or shortage to the Engineer.

Contractor‟s Quality Control

a) The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective quality control

program.

103
1) The Contractor shall establish a quality control system to review all
submittals made to the Engineer in accordance with the above submission
requirements, and to perform sufficient inspection and/or tests of all items of
work, including that of his subcontractors, to ensure conformance to
applicable specifications and drawings with respect to the materials,
workmanship, construction, with emphasis on the surveillance tests and
submittals required in the technical provisions of the contract specification
including in plant inspection. The Contractor‟s quality control system will be
established to include all construction, except where the technical provisions
of the contract provide for specific Government control by inspections, tests,
or other means. The Contractor‟s quality control system will be keyed to the
proposed construction deficiencies. The Employer reserves the right to direct
the location of the required test. Any of the test that, when performed, do not
indicate compliance with contract requirements will be reported but will not
be considered as a test to satisfy the required number of tests.

2) The Contractor has full responsibility for compliance with all

provisions of the Contract. The burden of proof of Contract compliance is
placed on the Contractor and not assumed by the Employer. The Contractor‟s
quality control without question and the right to inspect or verify at any time is
reserved by the Engineer.

3) The Engineer, reserves the right to inspect at the source supplies or

services not manufactured or performed within the Contractor‟s facility.
Engineer‟s inspection shall not constitute acceptance, or shall it in any way
replace Contractor inspection or otherwise relieve the contractors, or suppliers
plants is performed by the Engineer, such inspection shall not be used by
Contractor as evidence of effective inspection by such subcontractors or
suppliers.

4) The quality control program may be implemented by the Contractor

utilizing his job supervisory staff to insure compliance with the Contract Plans
and Specifications. It will be supplemented as necessary with special
technicians, part-time specialty quality control men, and testing facilities to
provide capability for the reviews, inspection, controls and tests required. The
Contractor‟s quality control personnel shall be experienced and qualified in
the specialty of work they are performing. They will report to the Engineer
when required.

5) The prime Contractor‟s designated quality control representative, will

be required to certify, with each submittal, that it has been reviewed in detail
and that it is correct and in strict conformance with the contract drawings and
specifications, except as may be otherwise explicitly stated.

6) The Contractor‟s inspection system shall for producers which will

assure that the latest applicable contract drawings, specifications, certified
submittals, approved submittals, and instructions required by the contract, as
well as authorized changes thereto, are used for fabrication inspection and
testing.

104
7) The Contractor shall provide and maintain all measuring and testing
devices, laboratory equipment, instruments, transportation, and supplies
necessary to accomplish the required testing and inspection. All measuring
and testing devices shall be calibrated at established intervals against certified
standards which have known valid relationships to national standards. The
Contractor‟s measuring and testing equipment shall be made available for use
by the Engineer for verification of their accuracy and condition as well as for
any inspection or test desired.

b) The Contractor‟s quality control system at the job site shall follow a
three-step procedure.

1) First, to ensure that the plant, materials, equipment, and safety

auxiliaries meet the submittals and contract requirements. The Contractor will
perform preparatory inspections as soon as possible after delivery of plant,
equipment, and material to the site and, in any event, prior to incorporation of
material and equipment in the work. The Contractor will appropriately
annotate his quality control reports for all preparatory inspections with a
detailed list of items of plant, equipment, and material inspected or tested,
findings relative to compliance with approvals, Contractors-certified
submittals and contract requirements, and actions taken where non-compliance
is discovered. In addition, during preparatory inspections, the Contractor will
make an examination of the work area to insure that all preliminary work has
been completed, check to assure that provisions have been completed to
provide required control testing, and take necessary action to insure that all
plant, equipment, and material is properly stored to prevent damage from the
elements and construction operations and will so note on the quality control
reports. Names of all personnel who participate in each preparatory inspection
will be listed on the quality control report.

2) Second, at the start of each new phase of construction to establish that

methods, techniques, and standards of workmanship are in strict compliance
with the contract requirements. The Contractor will appropriately annotate his
quality control reports for all initial inspections to include a detailed
description and location of the segment or phase of work inspected including
checks, tests and measurements made to determine that quality of
construction, tolerances, and workmanship standards are in strict compliance
with the contract requirements. The names of personnel who participate in the
initial inspection will be listed on the quality control reports.

3) Third, follow-up inspections will be performed on a daily or re-curring

basis as necessary to insure that construction is proceeding in accordance with
contract requirements. The Contractor‟s quality control reports will detail the
results of follow-up testing, inspection, and corrective actions.

4) The Contractor‟s quality control representative will advise the

Engineer at least 24 hours prior to all preparatory and initial inspections. The
Engineer will participate in the preparatory and follow-up inspection.

c) The Contractor shall furnish a daily construction quality control report.

The report shall be in accordance with a form as may be proposed by the

105
Contractor and approved by the Engineer. Additional check lists and forms for
specific operations may be required to supplement the daily inspection form.
The report shall include all inspections and tests made. It shall provide factual
evidence that the required inspections or tests have been performed, including
type and number of inspections or rejection and the corrective action taken.
The daily report shall cover both conforming and defective items. It shall
include a statement that all materials and equipment incorporated in the work
are in full compliance with the terms of the contract except as noted. The
report will cover all items and specifically include the items listed in the
quality control paragraphs of the technical provisions. The report will be
verified and signed by the prime Contractor‟s designated quality control
representative. The daily reports will be furnished in two copies (Original and
one duplicate) to the Engineer at the job site. The report will be legibly
handwritten in ink or typewritten. Reports shall be submitted not later than the
close of business on the first working day following the date of the report.
Reports shall have all supporting documents (such as concrete placement
checklists, laboratory reports of compaction tests, sieve analysis, etc.)
attached. Incomplete reports will not be accepted. The Contractor is
responsible for insuring that test reports are prepared and attached to the daily
report for the day that the test was performed. Negative reports are required
for days during which there is no activity on the project site to include a brief
statement as to why there was no activity during a normal workday or
schedule.

d) After the contract is awarded and before field construction operations

are started, the Contractor shall meet the Engineer, and discuss quality control
requirements. The meeting shall develop mutual understanding relative to
details of the system, including the forms to be used for recording the quality
control operations, inspections, administration of the system, and the
interrelationship of Contractor and Engineer inspection.

e) The Contractor will need to give consideration to his quality control

plan prior to bidding. This will assist in the early submission of an acceptable
plan. The Contractor will furnish to the Employer not later than fourteen (14)
calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, a quality control plan which
will include the procedures, instructions, and reports to be used. This
document will include as a minimum.

(1) The quality control organization. This will be in the form of an

organization chart that shows names and specific responsibilities of each of
the quality control personnel.

(2) The qualifications of each person performing submittal review and

certification, and inspection will be summarized not to exceed one (1)
typewritten page, giving education, present job position, and previous work
experience. These may be furnished in phases as the work progresses but in no
cases later than fourteen (14) calendar days before coming on the job.

(3) A copy of a letter of direction to each of the Contractor‟s quality

control representatives, outlining his duties, authority, and responsibilities, and
signed by a responsible officer of the firm.

106
 (4) Proposed methods of performing quality control inspections, including
those for his subcontractors‟ work.

(5) Test methods to include the names and qualifications of technicians

employed by the Contractor as well as specific tests to be performed by each,
the names of all qualified test organization to be used, and the location and
availability of test facilities and equipment.

(6) Procedures for reviewing all shop drawings, samples, certificates, etc.,
for contract compliance and certifying them.

(7) Method of documenting quality control operation, inspection, and

testing. Including samples of proposed forms.

(8) Each copy of the complete plan will be assembled in a folder in the
order listed above. Four (4) copies will be submitted for approval. Revisions
to the plan will be submitted in four (4) copies.

f) Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, no construction shall

be started until the Contractor‟s quality control plan is approved. The approval
will be contingent on satisfactory implementation and results. Payments will
be withheld for all work until the quality control plan has been submitted and
approved.

g) The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any proposed

change in his quality control system or personnel. No such change will be
implemented prior to acceptance by the Engineer.

1.9.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

The requirements under this Section are incidental to other items of work and
will not be measured for payment, unless otherwise specified in the Bill of
Quantities.

107
1.10 MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION

1.10.1 SCOPE

This Section refers to the mobilization in preparation for the execution of the
Works, and demobilization after completion of the Works.

1.10.2 MOBILIZATION

Mobilization includes the following:

1) Plant and Equipment

a) Assembly, preparation and loading for shipment of all plant and

equipment at the Contractor‟s home station or source of supply.

b) Transportation of plant, equipment and materials from home station or

source of supply to the site.

c) Unload and install, ready for use, all plant and equipment and whatever
else required for the execution of the Works.

d) Maintenance of the plant and equipment during the construction which

shall include providing sufficient supply of spare for the construction plant
and equipment.

2) Construction of temporary site office and appurtenant facilities such as

office tables, drafting table and instrument, water, power and sanitary facilities
necessary for an effective and efficient execution of the work.

3) Construction of all temporary access roads for an effective and

efficient execution of the Works.

4) Survey layout and installation of fixed points for the setting out of the
works.

1.10.3 DEMOBILIZATION

Demobilization shall include the following:

1) The dismantling, preparation and loading for removal and shipment of

all Contractor‟s plant and equipment at the Site.

Transportation of all the above plant, equipment and materials of the site to the
home station or somewhere else outside the Site.2)

3) Dismantling and removing of all temporary buildings and structures.

4) Removal of all supplementary markers furnished and installed by the

Contractor, provided that the Engineer has not taken the option to retain the
markers.

108
 5) The clean-up of the Site and Work area, and the removal of material,
debris, waste, etc., and making good damage or temporary alterations.

1.10.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

The requirements under this Section are incidental to other items of work and
will not be measured for payment.

109
1.11 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE OF OFFICE AND SERVICE VEHICLE

1.11.1 OFFICE SUPPLIES

This covers the provisions office supplies on a day to day operating expenses
of the existing PNR‟s Engineer‟s office at Tutuban Manila such as common
stationeries, printer‟s refillable inks and a monthly (Php1,200.00) prepaid cell
cards for the period of two hundred (200) calendar days.

1.11.2 SERVICE VEHICLE

This covers the provision of service vehicle of at least 2009 model pick-up,
air-con, in good running condition and updated registration on owned / lease
basis including driver and twenty (20) liters of fuel per day for the exclusive
use of the PNR Project Engineer supervising the project for the period of two
hundred (200) calendar days. Maintenance and fuel cost for the service
vehicle shall be included under this item.

110
 PART 2
EARTHWORKS

2.1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

2.1.1 SCOPE

The clearing and grubbing shall consist of clearing of all trees, down timber,
snags, brush, other vegetation, rubbish, and all other objectionable material,
including grubbing stumps, roots, and disposing of all spoil material resulting
from the clearing and grubbing in accordance with these Specifications or as
directed by the Engineer. It shall also include the removal and disposal of
structures that obtrude, encroach upon, or otherwise obstruct the works except
where otherwise provided for in these Specifications or ordered by the
Engineer.

2.1.2CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

2.1.2.1 General

The Engineer will establish the limits of work and designate all trees,
shrubs, plants and other things to be cleared. The contractor shall
preserve all objects designated to remain.

2.1.2.2 Clearing and Grubbing

All surface objects and trees, stumps, roots and other protruding
obstructions, not designated to remain, shall be cleared and/or grubbed,
including mowing as required, except as provided below:

1) Removal of undisturbed stumps and roots and non-perishable

solid objects with a minimum of 900 mm (36 inches) below subgrade
or slope of embankments will not be required.

2) In areas outside of the grading limits of cut and embankment

areas, stumps and nonperishable solid objects shall be cut off not more
than 150 mm (6 inches) above the ground line or low water level.

3) In areas to be rounded at the top of cut slopes, stumps shall be

cut off flush with or below the surface of the final slope line.

4) Grubbing of pits, channel changes and ditches will be required

only to the depth necessitated by the proposed excavation within such
areas.

Except in areas to be excavated, stump holes and other holes from

which obstructions are removed shall be backfilled with suitable
material and compacted to the required density.

111
If perishable material is burned, it shall be burned under the constant
care of competent watchmen at such times and in such a manner that
the surrounding vegetation, other adjacent property, or anything
designated to remain on the right of way will not be jeopardized. If
permitted, burning shall be done in accordance with applicable laws,
ordinances, and regulations.

The Contractor shall use high intensity burning procedures, (i.e.,

incinerators, high stacking or pit and ditch burning with forced air
supplements) that produce intense burning with little or no visible
smoke emission during the burning process. At the conclusion of each
burning session, the fire shall be completely extinguished so that no
smoldering debris remains.

In the event that the Contractor is directed by the Engineer not to start
burning operations or to suspend such operations because of hazardous
weather conditions, material to be burned which interferes with
subsequent construction operations shall be moved by the contractor to
temporary locations clear of construction operations and later if
directed by the Engineer, shall be placed on a designated spot and
burned.

Materials and debris which cannot be burned and perishable materials

be disposed off by methods and at locations approved by the Engineer,
on or off the project. If disposal is by burying, the debris shall be
placed in layers with the material so disturbed to avoid nesting. Each
layer shall be covered or mixed with earth material by the land-fill
method to fill all voids. The top layer of material buried shall be
covered with at least 300 mm (12 inches) of earth or other approved
material shall be graded, shaped and compacted to present a pleasing
appearance. If the disposal location is off the project, the contractor
shall make all necessary arrangements with property owners in writing
for obtaining suitable disposal locations which are outside the limits of
view from the project. The cost involved shall be included in the unit
bid price. A copy of such agreement shall be furnished to the
Engineer. The disposal areas shall be seeded, fertilized and mulched at
the Contractor‟s expense.

Woody material may be disposed off by chipping. The wood chips

may be used for mulch, slope erosion control or may be uniformly
spread over selected areas as directed by the Engineer. Wood chips
used as mulch for slope erosion control shall have a maximum
thickness of 12 mm (1/2 inch) and faces not exceeding 3900 sq. mm.
(6 sq. inches) on any individual surface area. Wood chips not
designated for use under other sections shall be spread over the
designated areas in layers not to exceed 75 mm (3 inches) loose
thickness. Diseased trees shall be buried or disposed off as directed by
the Engineer.

All merchantable timber in the clearing area which has not been
removed from the right of way prior to the beginning of

112
 construction, shall become the property of the Employer, unless
otherwise provided.

Low hanging branches and unsound or unsightly branches of trees or

shrubs designated to remain shall be trimmed as directed. Branches of
trees extending over the railway shall be trimmed to give a clear height
of 6 m (20 feet) above the railway surface. All trimming shall be done
by skilled workmen and in accordance with good tree surgery
practices.

Timber cut inside the area staked for clearing shall be felled within the
area to be cleared.

2.1.2.3 Individual Removal of Trees or Stumps

Individual trees or stumps designated by the Engineer for removal and

located in areas other than those established for clearing and grubbing
and roadside cleanup shall be removed and disposed off as specified
under Subsection 2.1.2.2 except trees removed shall be cut as nearly
flush with the ground as practicable without removing stumps.

2.1.2.4 Removal of Stumps, Roots, Topsoil, Etc.

The area occupied by the existing railway is excluded from the strip
considered, and the clearing and grubbing is limited to the surface area
directed by the Engineer.

In cut areas, all stumps and roots shall be removed to a depth of not
less than 50 cm below the finished subgrade level.

In areas under roadbed embankments, from which topsoil or unsuitable

materials are to be removed or which are designated to be compacted,
all stumps and roots shall be removed to a depth of at least 90 cm
below the original ground surface.

Grubbing of channels and ditches will be required only to the depth

necessary for the proposed excavation within such areas.

In areas under roadbed embankments designed by the Engineer, the

Contractor shall remove the topsoil and dispose of it on adjacent land
as directed by the Engineer.

In general, the removal of topsoil should include only the removal of

soil which is sufficiently fertile to encourage or sustain a growth of
vegetation.

No removal of topsoil over any designated area shall be less than 15

cm in depth measured vertically or as directed by the Engineer, and the
topsoil shall be kept separate from other excavated material.

113
 This removal of topsoil shall not be paid for separately as it is a
subsidiary obligation of the Contractor in carrying out the clearing and
grubbing operations.

When the topsoil will be used for dressing of the slopes of the
embankment as directed by the Engineer or as indicated on the
drawings, this work will be considered as formation of embankment
and shall conform to the requirement of Section 2.5 of these
Specifications for construction, measurement and payment. In this
case the removal of topsoil will not be measured for direct payment,
but will be considered as a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor
covered by the Scheduled item “Embankment” with material from
Common or Selected Borrow.

2.1.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

2.1.3.1 Measurement will be by one or more of the following

alternate methods:

a. Area Basis. The work to be paid for shall be the number of

square meters and fractions thereof acceptably cleared and grubbed
within the limits indicated on the Drawings or as may be adjusted in
field staking by the Engineer. Areas not within the clearing and
grubbing limits shown on the Drawings or not staked for clearing and
grubbing will not be measured for payment.

b. Lump Sum Basis. When the Bill of Quantities contains a

Clearing and Grubbing lump sum item, no measurement of area will be
made for such item.

c. Individual Unit Basis (Selective Clearing). The diameter of

trees will be measured at a height of 1.4 m (54 inches) above the
ground. Trees less than 150 mm (6 inches) in diameter will not be
measured for payment.

When Bill of Quantities indicates measurement of trees by individual

unit basis, the units will be designated and measured in accordance
with the following schedule of sizes:

Diameter at height of 1.4 m Pay Item Designation

Over 150 mm to 900 mm Small
Over 900 mm Large

2.1.3.2 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Sub-Section 2.1.3.1

shall be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the Pay Items
listed in the Bill of Quantities, which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Section.

114
115
2.2 STRIPPING

2.2.1 SCOPE

This work shall consist of removing topsoil, transporting and depositing it in

stockpiles and replacing and spreading it where indicated on the Drawings or
where directed by the Engineer.

2.2.2 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

The areas from which stripping of topsoil may be required shall be indicated
on the Drawings. The Contractor shall remove topsoil from such portions of
these areas and to such depth as the Engineer may require. No stripping of
topsoil of any designated area shall be less than 150 mm in depth. The topsoil
removed shall be transported, deposited in stock piles at locations approved by
the Engineer, and/or spread and compacted with a light roller where indicated
on the drawings or where directed by the Engineer. The topsoil shall be kept
separate from other excavated materials and shall be completely removed to
the required depth from any designated area prior to the beginning of regular
excavation or embankment work in the area. No payment will be made for
stripping the topsoil carried out in areas other than those ordered.

2.2.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

2.2.3.1 Method of Measurement

The quantities of stripping to be paid for according to these

Specifications shall be the number of square meters acceptably
stripped in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer and shall
be deemed to be included in the pay Item for Clearing and Grubbing.

2.2.3.2 Basis Of Payment

Unless otherwise provided in the special provisions, stripping shall not

be measured and paid for separately, but the cost thereof shall be
considered as included in the Contract Price for Clearing and
Grubbing.

116
2.3 EXCAVATION

2.3.1 SCOPE

Excavation shall consist of all work necessary for the excavation including
placing or disposal of earth or rock or other material from or to the railway or
adjacent thereto, for construction of waterways, ditches, levees and approaches
for the unclassified excavation, rock excavation or muck excavation, for the
removal of unsuitable material and topsoil, the removal of landslides, all in
accordance with these Specifications and in reasonably close conformity with
the lines, grades, shown on the drawings or as established by the Engineer.

Excavation will be classified as “unclassified excavation”, “rock excavation”,

“common excavation” or “muck excavation” as indicated in the Bill of
Quantities and hereinafter described.

1) Unclassified Excavation. Unclassified excavation shall consist of the

excavation and disposal of all materials regardless of its nature, or not
classified and included in the Bill of Quantities under other pay items.

2) Rock Excavation. Rock Excavation shall consist of igneous,

sedimentary and metamorphic rock which cannot be excavated without
blasting or the use of rippers, and all boulders or other detached stones each
having a volume of one (1) cubic meter or more as determined by physical
measurements or visually by the Engineer.

3) Common Excavation. Common excavation are those not included in

the Bill of Quantities under “rock excavation” or other pay items.

4) Muck Excavation. Muck excavation shall consist of the removal and

disposal of deposits of saturated or unsaturated mixtures of soils and organic
matter not suitable for foundation materials regardless of moisture content.

Excavation shall comprise all excavation except Structure Excavation and

Borrow Excavation.

2.3.2 GENERAL

2.3.2.1 Soil Information

Any information of the properties of the soil that may be shown on the
drawings or obtained by the Contractor as a result of discussions with
the Engineer or others shall be without prejudice and shall not be
considered as a valid basis for the Contractor‟s Tender Prices.

The excavation work will be carried out in accordance with these

Specifications and the specifications for other work items involved,
and in conformity with the lines, grades, section and dimensions shown
on the drawings or required by the Engineer.

2.3.2.2 Horizontal and Vertical Alignment

117
 The Engineer will supply the Contractor with the locations of the
Points of Intersection of Tangents and Grade Lines. The drawings will
indicate the properties of horizontal and vertical curves. The
Contractor shall stake-out the work and obtain the Engineer‟s approval
of his stake-out before proceeding with construction. If, in the opinion
of the Engineer, any modification of the line or grade is advisable,
either before or after stake-out the Engineer will issue detailed
instructions to the Contractor for such modifications, and the
contractor shall revise the stake-out for further approval. These
requirements shall be met without additional payment and all costs
thereof shall be included in the Tender Prices for pay items under the
Contract.

The top of the formation level after compaction shall be accurate to

within plus or minus three centimeter of the level shown on the
drawings.

The profiles shown on the drawings indicate the elevation of the

roadbed at the level of the finished centerline.

2.3.2.3 Quantities

The quantities of the various classes of excavation and embankment to

be measured for payment under the Contract will be limited to the lines
shown on the drawings, and will be indicated on approved profiles and
cross-sections. Excavation beyond the lines shown on the approved
profile and cross-sections will not be paid for. The Engineer may
decide the angle of the slope of cuts and fills or the formation of
benches in the slopes as the work proceeds on the basis of his
evaluation of the soil characteristics. The actual lines of cuts and fills
as made shall be duly measured and recorded by the Contractor. The
Engineer will check these records and will approve the measurements,
if correct, as a basis of payment. Excavation and fill in excess of the
approved cross-section will not be paid for.

Excess of excavation shall be backfilled, as directed by the Engineer,

with approved material without extra payment to the Contractor.
Excess of fill may be either left in place or removed as required by the
Engineer.

2.3.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

2.3.3.1 General

When there is evidence of discrepancies on the actual elevations and

that shown on the Drawings, a pre-construction survey referred to the
datum plane used in the approved Drawing shall be undertaken by the
Contractor under the control of the Engineer to serve as basis for the
computation of the actual volume of the excavated materials.

118
 All excavations shall be finished to reasonably smooth and uniform
surfaces. No materials shall be wasted without authority of the
Engineer. Excavation operations shall be conducted so that material
outside of the limits of slopes will not be disturbed. Prior to
excavation, all necessary clearing and grubbing in that area shall have
been performed in accordance with Section 2.1 Clearing and Grubbing.

2.3.3.2 Conservation of Topsoil

Where provided for on the Drawings all suitable topsoil encountered in

excavation and on areas where embankment is to be placed shall be
removed to such extent and to such depth as the Engineer may direct.
The removed topsoil shall be transported and deposited in storage piles
at locations approved by the Engineer. The topsoil shall be completely
removed to the required depth from any designated area prior to the
beginning of regular excavation or embankment work in the area and
shall be kept separate from other excavated materials for later use.

2.3.3.3 Utilization of Excavated Materials

All suitable material removed from the excavations shall be used in the
formation of the embankment, subgrade, shoulders, slopes, bedding
and backfill for structures, and for other purposes shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

The Engineer will designate as unsuitable those soils that cannot be

properly compacted in embankments. All unsuitable material shall be
disposed off as shown on the Drawings or as directed without delay to
the Contractor.

Only approved materials shall be used in the construction of

embankments and backfills. All unsuitable materials shall be disposed
off as shown on the Drawings or as directed.

All excess material, including rock and boulders that cannot be used in
embankments shall be disposed off as directed.

Material encountered in the excavation and determined by the

Engineer as suitable for topping, slope protection, or other purposes
shall be conserved and utilized as directed by the Engineer.

Borrow materials shall not be placed until after the readily accessible
railway excavation has been placed in the fill, unless otherwise
permitted or directed by the Engineer. If the Contractor places more
borrow than is required and thereby causes a waste of excavation, the
amount of such waste will be deducted from the borrow volume.

2.3.3.4 Pre-watering

Excavation areas and borrow pits may be pre-watered before

excavating the material. When pre-watering is used, the areas to be

119
 excavated shall be moistened to the full depth, from the surface to the
bottom of the excavation. The water shall be controlled so that the
excavated material will contain the proper moisture to permit
compaction to the specified density with the use of standard
compacting equipment. Pre-watering shall be supplemented where
necessary, by truck watering units, to assure that the embankment
material contains the proper moisture at the time of compaction.

The Contractor shall provide drilling equipment capable of suitably

checking the moisture penetration to the full depth of the excavation.

2.3.3.5 Excavation of Ditches. Etc.

All materials excavated from the side ditches, channel changes,

irrigation ditches, inlet and outlet ditches, toe ditches, furrow ditches,
and such other ditches as may be designated on the Drawings or staked
by the Engineer, shall be utilized as provided in Subsection 2.3.3.3.

Ditches shall conform to the slope, grade, and shape of the required
cross-section, with no projections of roots, stumps, rock or similar
matter. The Contractor shall maintain and keep open and free from
leaves, sticks, and other debris all ditches dug by him until final
acceptance of the work.

Furrow ditches shall be formed by plowing a continuous furrow along

the line staked by the Engineer. Methods other than plowing may be
used if acceptable to the Engineer. The ditches shall be cleaned out by
hand shovel work, by ditcher, or by some other suitable method,
throwing all loose materials on the downhill side so that the bottom of
the finished ditch shall be approximately 450 mm (18 inches) below
the crest of the loose material piled on the downhill side. Hand finish
will not be required, but the flow lines shall be in satisfactory shape to
provide drainage without overflow.

2.3.3.6 Construction of Ditches

The Contractor shall construct channels, side, and interception ditches,

inlet and outlet ditches as shown on the drawings or where ordered by
the Engineer, whether for temporary or permanent drainage. In order
to keep water away from the embankment, and/or roadbed during
construction, the Contractor shall at all times insure adequate drainage
by so scheduling ditch and outlet construction that the drainage is
operative before work is begun on the embankment. He shall clean
and trim all such drainage ditches from time to time so that there may
be a free flow of water throughout the whole Contract Period and
Maintenance Period. Damage to the work attributable to wetting
through failure to provide adequate drainage will result in an order to
repair the damage at the Contractor‟s expense. Ditches sections, and
final trimming, including the repair of any damage that may have been
done during the construction work, shall be carried out after the

120
 completion of the construction work and shall be a condition for final
approval and acceptance.

Payment for the excavation of side ditches, interception ditches and

channels for permanent drainage shall be at the unit price for
Excavation, subject to the provisions of this Section.

2.3.3.7 Excavation of Roadbed Level

Rock shall be excavated to a depth of 150 mm (6 inches) below

subgrade within the limits of the roadbed, and the excavation
backfilled with material designated on the Drawings or approved by
the Engineer and compacted to the required density.

When excavation methods employed by the Contractor leave

undrained pockets in the rock surface, the Contractor shall, at his own
expense, properly drain such depression or when permitted by the
Engineer fill the depression with approved impermeable material.

Material below subgrade, other than solid rock shall be thoroughly

scarified to a depth of 150 mm (6 inches) and the moisture content
increased or reduced, as necessary, to bring the material throughout
this 150 mm layer to the moisture content suitable for maximum
compaction. This layer shall then be compacted in accordance with
Subsection 2.5.3.3.

2.3.3.8 Removal of Unsuitable Material

Where the Drawings show the top portion of the roadbed to be selected
topping, all unsuitable materials shall be excavated to the depth
necessary for replacement of the selected topping to the required
compacted thickness.

Where excavation to the finished graded section results in a subgrade

or slopes of unsuitable soil, the Engineer may require the Contractor to
remove the unsuitable material and backfill to the finished graded
section with approved material. The Contractor shall conduct his
operations in such a way that the Engineer can take the necessary
cross-sectional measurements before the backfill is placed.

The excavation of muck shall be handled in a manner that will not

permit the entrapment of muck within the backfill. The material used
for backfilling up to the groundline or water level, whichever is higher,
shall be rock or other suitable granular material selected from the
roadway excavation, if available. If not available, suitable material
shall be obtained from other approved sources. Unsuitable material
removed shall be disposed off in designated areas shown on the
Drawings or approved by the Engineer.

2.3.3.9 Conglomerate

121
 When the material in cuts is conglomerate that, in the opinion of the
Engineer, is not so firmly consolidated as to require drilling, the
Contractor shall use an excavator with suitable steel tines, or other
appropriate equipment for its removal. Such work shall be considered
as Common Excavation.

2.3.3.10 Removal of Existing Obstructions

The Tender Price for all classes of excavation shall include the cost of
removal of all material, regardless of its nature, encountered within the
approved limits for excavation including the removal and disposal, as
required by the Engineer, of existing brick, stone, concrete or masonry,
rock boulders or fragments encountered during excavation.

Only boulders of an individual size greater than 1 cubic meter or

blocks of masonry of an individual size greater than 1 cubic meter will
be paid for under the respective pay item for “Demolition Work”
shown in the Bill of Quantities.

2.3.3.11 Removal or Diversion of Water

Except where provided for Structure Excavation, no separate payment

shall be made for control of or removal of water during or after
excavation. The cost of sheeting, shoring, pumping and draining,
where required in the opinion of the Engineer, shall be included in the
Tender Prices for excavation. The Contractor shall provide necessary
facilities for dewatering and for draining or diverting water courses
when necessary for the execution and protection of the work or where
required by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall provide such drainage outlet ditches as may be

necessary to effect proper drainage before rain is to be expected.
Such drainage ditches for protection of work during construction and
their maintenance and clearing to make them continuously effective
during the Work shall be included in the Tender Price. No separate
payment for such ditches will be made.

2.3.3.12 Use and Disposal of Excavated Material

All suitable material excavated within the limits and scope of the
project shall, unless provision is expressly made to the contrary in
these Specifications, be used in the most effective manner for the
formation of the embankment or for backfill. Any material surplus to
these requirements, or any material declared in writing by the Engineer
to be unsuitable, shall be disposed of and leveled in thin layers by the
Contractor outside the right-of-way or as directed by the Engineer in
accordance with the provisions of these Specifications, and shall be
considered as Common Excavation and paid for at the unit price for
this item subject to the provisions herein, which payment shall include
the cost of obtaining the consent of the owner or tenant of land where

122
 the disposal is made. The use of arable land for this purpose shall be
avoided far as possible.

When unsuitable material is ordered to be removed, the soil left in

place after the removal of the unsuitable material shall be compacted,
to a depth of 15 cm to a density of 90 percent of the maximum dry
density determined according to AASHTO T99. Payment for such
compaction shall be included in the Unit Price for Excavation.

Unsuitable material ordered removed between the project areas shall

be properly disposed of along the side of embankment of this Section
within the PNR right-of-way and to be leveled to the desired elevation
as approved by the Engineer. However, any excess unsuitable material
in the project areas are allowed to be dumped in similar manner along
the PNR right-of-way as directed by the Engineer.

2.3.3.13 Relocation of Stream Channels

Where indicated on the drawings or where required by the Engineer

the Contractor shall take cross-sections of existing stream channels
and, in collaboration with the Engineer, mark them with details of the
excavation required for the relocation of the stream channel. Work
shall not proceed without approval of the marked cross-sections by the
Engineer. The work stream-channel excavation shall be considered as
Common Excavation, and paid for at the Unit Price for this item,
subject to the provisions of this Section.

2.3.3.14 Removal of Loose Earth or Rock

Loose earth or rock shall be removed from slopes when required by the
Engineer. Payment for such removal shall be at the Unit Price as
shown in the Bill of Quantities and subject to the provisions of this
Section.

2.3.3.15 Landslide, Benches, Flattening of Slopes

The Engineer may order the removal of material resulting from

landslide, the construction of Benches in or above the cut slope, or,
where in his opinion the slope, after cutting, shows or instability, and
flattening of the slope. Payment for all such work shall be at the Unit
Price subject to the provisions of this Section.

2.3.3.16 Rehabilitation of Railway Roadbed and Restoration of

Roadbed Shoulders

Existing railway roadbed shall be excavated to the levels indicated on

the drawings below the rail top elevation for the various sectors
described. All excavated materials shall be utilized to restore and
widen the railway to support the full ballast section.

123
 In order to perform this work, the existing railway track shall be
temporarily removed and relocated without disconnecting them, and
restoring the railway to its original alignment at the changed level.

Restoration of the roadbed shoulders (bank widening) is required

before ballast can be placed and retained on the edges of the roadbed.
The excavated material shall be used for the restoration of the
shoulders. The soiled ballast shall be used for restoration of the
shoulders.

The Contractor shall note that there may be insufficient material from
the excavation to complete the fills. All additive materials required
shall be supplied by the Contractor unless other arrangements have
been made. When the Contractor is required to supply fill
material from outside the railway right-of-way, he shall state in his
proposal the locations from which he intends to obtain materials so that
the Engineer can investigate the quality of materials.

Only approved materials shall be used as fill. In the opinion of the

Engineer the quality of any fill materials delivered to the site is
unacceptable in the light of his previous investigation, such material
shall be rejected and disposed of by the Contractor at his own expense.

Borrow areas shall not be excavated before they have been cross-
sectioned if required by the Engineer.

Borrow areas shall be adequately drained during borrow operations.

Removal of earth material shall be planned to minimize erosion and
saturation. Borrow areas shall be excavated to neat and regular shape,
and left in a condition satisfactory to the Engineer.

Planning for shoulder restoration includes the work of extending

culverts to the new limits of fills, and the choice of suitable material
and filling and placement methods. Particular care shall be taken that
the pattern of natural drainage is maintained.

After culverts are extended, vegetation and organic matter should be

cleared from the slope and foundation area on which fresh material is
to be laid.

2.3.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

2.3.4.1 Method of Measurement

The quantities of excavation to be paid for shall be the number of cubic

meters of material acceptably excavated, measured and computed by
the method approved by the Engineer. The material shall be measured
in the original position in the natural ground after clearing and
grubbing.

124
 Profile and cross-sections, to be approved scale and showing the
required details, shall be drawn on transparent tracing paper by the
Contractor, reviewed and checked by the Engineer, and in accordance
with the specified requirements, approved by him. They shall then
become the basis of the quantities to be measured for payment.
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with three copies of the
approved tracings and of the detailed quantity computation sheets.

The measurement shall include the unavoidable overbreakage due to

the slides when not attributable to carelessness of the Contractor.

2.3.4.2 Basis of Payment

Excavation, including work defined as Excavation in other sections

and elsewhere in these Specifications whatever the haulage distance of
the excavated material, shall be paid for separately in the following
cases:

a) When the material resulting from the excavation made for the
construction of the roadbed for railway is declared in writing by the
Engineer to be unsuitable for use in the embankment.

b) When the material resulting from the excavation made for the
construction of the embankment is surplus to the amount required for
the construction of the works, provided, however it is not material
rendered surplus by reason of the Contractor‟s having opened borrow
pits solely for his own convenience.

It is understood that the balance of the Earthworks for the

determination of the quantities of cut that exceed or fall short of the
quantities of fill shall be made by conventionally adopting the value
0.85 for shrinkage factor of earth material, which value allow for the
change in density of the material before excavation and after
incorporation in embankment.

Where the Engineer orders the use of material obtained from

Excavation for the execution of other works (such as stone masonry or
aggregates for concrete) the excavation shall not be paid for separately
but shall be considered as a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor
covered under the unit price paid for the other works in which the
material is employed.

The quantities, determined as provided above, shall be paid for at the

unit price listed in the Bill of Quantities which price and payment
shall be full compensation for all the costs indicated in these
Specifications, and all other costs necessary or usual for the
proper completion of the work prescribed in this Section.

125
2.4 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION

2.4.1 SCOPE

This Section shall consist of the necessary excavation for foundations, wall
footings of structures for ROW fencing, ballast and embankment wall
protection, and drainages The backfilling of completed structures and the
disposal of all excavated materials, shall be in accordance with these
Specifications and in reasonably close conformity with the Drawings or as
established by the Engineer.

It shall also include the furnishing and placing of approved foundation fill
material to replace unsuitable material encountered below the foundation
elevation of structures.

2.4.2 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

2.4.2.1 Clearing and Grubbing

Prior to starting excavation operations in any area, all necessary

clearing and grubbing in that area shall have been performed in
accordance with Section 2.1 Clearing and Grubbing.

2.4.2.2 Excavation

1) General, all structures. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer

sufficiently in advance of the beginning of any excavation so that
cross-sectional elevations and measurements may be taken on the
undisturbed ground. The natural ground adjacent to the structure shall
not be disturbed without permission of the Engineer.

Trenches or foundation pits for structure footings shall be excavated to

the lines and grades or elevations shown on the Drawings or as staked
by the Engineer. They shall be of sufficient size to permit the placing
of structures or structure footings of the full width and length shown.
The elevations of the bottoms of footings, as shown on the Drawings,
shall be considered as approximate only and the Engineer may order,
in writing, such changes in dimensions or elevations of footings as may
be deemed necessary, to secure a satisfactory foundation.

Boulders, logs, and other objectionable materials encountered in

excavation shall be removed.

After each excavation is completed, the Contractor shall notify the

Engineer to that effect and no footing, bedding material or pipe culvert
shall be placed until the Engineer has approved the depth of excavation
and the character of the foundation material.

2) Structures other than pipe culverts. All rock or other hard

foundation materials shall be cleaned of all loose materials, and cut to
a firm surface, either level, stepped, or serrated as directed by the
Engineer. All seams or crevices shall be cleaned and grouted. All

126
 loose and disintegrated rocks and thin strata shall be removed. When
the footing is to rest on material other than rock, excavation to final
grade shall not be made until just before the footing is to be placed.
When the foundation material is soft or mucky or otherwise unsuitable,
as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove the
unsuitable material and backfill with approved granular material. This
foundation fill shall be placed and compacted in 150 mm (6 inches)
layers up to the foundation elevation.

2.4.2.3 Utilization of Excavated Materials

All excavated materials, so far as suitable, shall be utilized as backfill

or embankment. The surplus material shall be disposed off in such
manner as not to obstruct the stream or otherwise impair the efficiency
or appearance of the structure. No excavated material shall be
deposited at any time so as to endanger the partly finished structure.

2.4.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

2.4.3.1 Method of Measurement

Structure excavations shall not be measured for payment since it is all

inclusive in the pay item of works in the Bill of Quantity.

2.4.3.2 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in 2.4.3.1 above shall

be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the particular Pay
Items listed and included in the Bill of Quantities. The payment shall
constitute full compensation for the removal and disposal of excavated
materials including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Section.

127
2.5 EMBANKMENT

2.5.1 SCOPE

This Section consists of the construction of embankment in accordance with

this Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades, and dimensions
shown on the Drawings or established by the Engineer.

2.5.2 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

Embankment shall be constructed so that settlement within the completed

embankment material is minimal, the earthworks are stable and they retain
their shape. Embankment shall not be constructed of unsuitable materials in
consonance with the following definitions.

The Engineer shall specify the suitable material for embankment in

accordance with the result of material tests.

Unsuitable Material – Material other than suitable for embankment in

accordance with the result of material tests.

a) Materials containing detrimental quantities of organic material, such as

grass, roots, and sewage.

b) Highly organic soils such as peat and muck.

c) Soils with liquid limit exceeding 80% and/or plasticity index

exceeding 55%.

d) Soil with a natural water content exceeding 100%.

e) Soil with very low natural density, 800 kg/cu. M. or lower.

f) Soils that cannot be properly compacted as determined by the

Engineer.

2.5.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

2.5.3.1 General

Prior to construction of embankment, all necessary clearing and

grubbing in that area shall have been performed in conformity with
Section 2.1 Clearing and Grubbing.

Embankment construction shall consist of constructing railway

embankments, including preparation of the areas upon which they are
to be placed, the construction of dikes within or adjacent to the
railway, the placing and compacting of approved material within
railway areas where unsuitable material has been removed; and the
placing and compacting of embankment material in holes, pits, and
other depressions within the railway area.

128
 Embankments and backfills shall contain no muck, peat, sod, roots, or
other deleterious matter. Rocks, broken concrete or other solid, bulky
materials shall not be placed in embankment areas where piling is to be
placed or driven.

Where shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer, the surface

of the existing ground shall be compacted to a depth of 150 mm (6
inches) and to the specified requirements of this item.

Where provided on the Drawings and Bill of Quantities the top

portions of the roadbed in both cuts and embankments, as indicated,
shall consist of selected borrow for topping from excavation.

2.5.3.2 Methods of Construction

When there is evidence of discrepancies on the actual elevations and

that shown on the Drawings a preconstruction survey referred to the
datum plane used in the approved Drawing shall be undertaken by the
Contractor under the control of the Engineer to serve as basis for the
computation of the actual volume of the embankment materials.

When embankment is to be placed and compacted on hillsides, or

when new embankments is to be constructed against existing
embankments, or when embankment is built one-half width at a time,
the existing slopes that are steeper than 3:1 when measured at right
angles to the railway shall be continuously benched over those areas
as the work is brought up in layers.

Benching will be subject to the Engineer‟s approval and shall be of

sufficient width to permit operation of placement and compaction
equipment. Each horizontal cut shall begin at the intersection of the
original ground and the vertical sides of the previous cuts. Material
thus excavated shall be placed and compacted along with the
embankment material in accordance with the procedure described in
this Section.

Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings where an embankment of

less than 1.2 m (4 feet) below subgrade is to be made all sod and
vegetable matter shall be removed from the surface upon which the
embankment is to be placed, and the cleared surface shall be
completely broken up by plowing, scarifying, or stepping to a
minimum depth of 150 mm except provided in Subsection 2.3.3.2.
This area shall then be compacted as provided in Subsection 2.5.3.3,
sod not required to be removed shall be thoroughly disc harrowed or
scarified before construction of embankment. Wherever a compacted
railroad surface containing granular materials lies within 900 mm (36
inches) of the subgrade, such old road surface shall be scarified to a
depth of at least 150 mm (6 inches) whenever directed by the Engineer.
This scarified material shall then be compacted as provided in
Subsection 2.5.3.3.

129
When shoulder excavation is specified, the railway shoulder shall be
excavated to the depth and width shown on the drawings. The
shoulder material shall be removed without disturbing the adjacent
existing base course material, and all excess excavated materials shall
be disposed off as provided in Subsection 2.3.3.3. If necessary, the
areas shall be compacted before being backfilled.

Railway embankment in earth material shall be placed in horizontal

layers not exceeding 200 mm (8 inches), loose measurement, and shall
be compacted as specified before the next layer is placed. Effective
spreading equipment shall be used on each lift to obtain uniform
thickness prior to compacting. As the compaction of each layer
progresses, continuous leveling and manipulating will be required to
assure uniform density. Water shall be added or removed, if necessary,
in order to obtain the required density. Removal of water shall be
accomplished through aeration by plowing, blading, discing, or other
methods satisfactory to the Engineer.

Where embankment is to be constructed across low swampy ground

that will not support the mass of trucks or other hauling equipment, the
lower part of the fill may be constructed by dumping successive loads
in a uniformly distributed layer of a thickness not greater than that
necessary to support the hauling equipment while placing subsequent
layers.

When excavated material contains more than 25 mass percent of rock

larger than 150 mm in greatest diameter and cannot be placed in layers
of the thickness prescribed without crushing, pulverizing or further
breaking down the pieces resulting from excavation methods, such
materials may be placed on the embankment in layers not exceeding in
thickness the approximate average size of the larger rocks, but not
greater than 600 mm (24 inches).

Even though the thickness of layers is limited as provided above, the

placing of individual rocks and boulders greater than 600 mm in
diameter will be permitted provided that when placed, they do not
exceed 1200 mm (48 inches) in height and provided they are carefully
distributed, with the interstices filled with finer material to form a
dense and compact mass.

Each layer shall be leveled and smoothed with suitable leveling

equipment and by distribution of spalls and finer fragments of earth.
Lifts of material containing more than 25 mass percent of rock larger
than 150 mm in greatest dimension shall not be constructed above 300
mm (12 inches) below the finished subgrade. The balance of the
embankment shall be composed of suitable material smoothed and
placed in layers not exceeding 200 mm (8 inches) in loose thickness
and compacted as specified for embankments.

130
 Dumping and rolling areas shall be kept separate, and no lift shall be
covered by another until compaction complies with the requirements of
Subsection 2.5.3.3.

Hauling and leveling equipment shall be so routed and distributed over

each layer of the fill in such a manner as to make use of compaction
effort afforded thereby and to minimize rutting and uneven
compaction.

2.5.3.3 Compaction

Compaction Trials

Before commencing the formation of embankments, the Contractor

shall submit in writing to the Engineer for approval his proposals for
the compaction of each type of fill material to be used in the Works.
The proposals shall include the relationship between the types of
compaction equipment, and the number of passes required and the
method of adjusting moisture content. The Contractor shall carry out
full scale compaction trials on areas not less than 10 m wide and 50 m
long as required by the Engineer and using his proposed procedures or
such amendments thereto as may be found necessary to satisfy the
Engineer and using his proposed procedures or such amendments
thereto as may be found necessary to satisfy the Engineer that all the
specified requirements regarding compaction can be consistently
achieved. Compaction trials with the main types of fill material to be
used in the Works shall be completed before work with corresponding
materials will be allowed to commence.

Throughout the periods when compaction of earthwork is in progress,

the Contractor shall adhere to the compaction procedures found from
compaction trials for each type of material being compacted, each type
of compaction equipment and each degree of compaction specified.

Earth

The Contractor shall compact the material placed in all embankment

layers and the material scarified to the designated depth below
subgrade in cut section, until a uniform density of not less than 95
mass percent of the maximum determined by AASHTO T99 Method
C, is attained, at a moisture content determined by the Engineer to be
suitable for such density. Acceptance of compaction may be based on
adherence to an approved roller pattern developed as set forth in
Section 2.7, Compaction Equipment and Density Control Strips.

The Engineer shall during the progress of the Work, make density tests
of compacted material in accordance with AASHTO T 191, T205, or
other approved field density tests, including the use of properly
calibrated nuclear testing devices. A correction for coarse particles
may be made in accordance with AASHTO T224. If, by such tests,
the Engineer determines that the specified density and moisture

131
 conditions have not been attained, the Contractor shall perform
additional work as may be necessary to attain the specified conditions.

At least one group of three in-site density tests shall be carried out for
each 500 sq. m. each compacted fill.

Rock

Density requirements will not apply to portions of embankments

constructed of materials which cannot be tested in accordance with
approved methods.

Embankment materials classified as rock shall be deposited, spread and

leveled the full width of the fill with sufficient earth or other fine
material so deposited to fill the interstices to produce a dense compact
embankment. In addition, the compaction equipment, shall compact
the embankment full width with a minimum depth as required and
shown in the drawings.

2.5.3.4 Protection of Roadbed During Construction

During construction of the railway, the roadbed shall be maintained in

such condition that it will be well drained at all times. Side ditches or
gutters emptying from cuts to embankments or otherwise shall be so
constructed as to avoid damage to embankments by erosion.

2.5.3.5 Protection of Structures

If embankment can be deposited on one side only of abutments, wing

walls, piers or culvert headwalls, care shall be taken that the area
immediately adjacent to the structure is not compacted to the extent
that it will cause overturning of, or excessive pressure against the
structure. When noted on the Drawings, the fill adjacent to the end
bent of a bridge shall not be placed higher than the bottom of the
backwall of the bent until the superstructure is in place. When
embankment is to be placed on both sides of a concrete wall or box
type structure, operations shall be so conducted that the embankment is
always at approximately the same elevation on both sides of the
structure.

2.5.3.6 Rounding and Warping Slopes

Rounding – Except in solid rock, the tops and bottoms of all slopes,
including the slopes of drainage ditches, shall be rounded as indicated
on the Drawings. A layer of earth overlaying rock shall be rounded
above the rock as done in earth slopes.

Warping – Adjustments in slopes shall be made to avoid injury in

standing trees or marring of weathered rock, or to harmonize with
existing landscape features, and the transition to such adjusted slopes
shall be gradual. At intersections of cuts and fills, slopes shall be

132
 adjusted and warped to flow into each other or into the natural ground
surfaces without noticeable break.

2.5.3.7 Finishing Roadbed and Slopes

After the roadbed has been substantially completed, the full width shall
be conditioned by removing any soft or other unstable material that
will not compact properly or serve the intended purpose. The resulting
areas and all other low sections, holes or depressions shall be brought
to grade with suitable selected material. Scarifying, blading, dragging,
rolling, or other methods of work shall be performed or used as
necessary to provide a thoroughly compacted roadbed shaped to the
grades and cross-sections shown on the Drawings or as staked by the
Engineer.

All earth slopes shall be left with roughened surfaces but shall be
reasonably uniform without any noticeable break and in reasonably
close conformity with the Drawings or other surfaces indicated on the
Drawings or as staked by the Engineer, with no variations therefrom
readily discernible as viewed from the road.

2.5.3.8 Serrated Slopes

Cut slopes in rippable material (soft rock) having slope ratios between
0.75:1 and 2:1 shall be constructed so that final slope line shall consist
of a series of small horizontal steps. The step rise and tread
dimensions shall be shown on the Drawings. No scaling shall be
performed on the stepped slopes except for removal of large rocks
which will obviously be a safety hazard if they fail into the ditchline or
railway.

2.5.3.9 Earth Berms

When called for in the Contract permanent earth berms shall be

constructed of well graded materials with no rocks having a diameter
greater than 0.25 the height of the berm. When local material is not
acceptable, acceptable material shall be imported, as directed by the
Engineer.

2.5.3.10 Compacted Berm

Compacted berm construction shall consist of moistening or drying

and placing material as necessary in locations shown on the drawings
or as established by the Engineer. Material shall contain no roots, sod,
or other deleterious materials. Contractor shall take precaution to
prevent material from escaping over the embankment slope. Shoulder
surface beneath berm will be roughened to provide a bond between the
berm and shoulder when completed. The Contractor shall compact the
material placed until at least 90 mass percent of the maximum density
obtained as determined by AASHTO T99, Method C. The cross-

133
 section of the finished compacted bermshall reasonably conform to the
typical cross-section shown on the Drawings.

2.5.3.11Uncompacted Berm

Uncompacted berm construction shall consist of drying, if necessary,

and placing material in locations shown on the Drawings or as
established by the Engineer. Materials shall contain no roots, sod or
other deleterious materials. Contractor shall take precautions to
prevent material from escaping over the embankment slope.

2.5.3.12 Compaction of Existing Ground

This work shall consist of compacting the existing ground or roadbed,

the existing embankment may be leveled by cutting, rooting, or
scarifying with approved mechanical means to a level to be determined
by the Engineer. The earth or other material obtained as a result of this
operation will be declared by the Engineer to be either suitable or
unsuitable for use in the embankment. In the first case it shall be used
in the adjacent embankment as directed by the Engineer, and payment
shall be as provided in this clause for Embankment. In the second case
the material shall be disposed of as provided in Subsection 2.3.3.3,
and payment shall be as provided for Excavation in Subsection 2.3.4.2.
No fill material shall be placed on the existing ground and/or roadbed
until such time that it is thoroughly compacted to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

2.5.3.13Widening of Existing Fills and Embankments

The widths and slopes shall be as shown on the drawings and

designated in the field by the Engineer. Existing pipe and box culverts
will be extended to the dimensions indicated on the drawings within
the PNR right-of-way. Where the right-of-way of the PNR will be
exceeded, the additional right-of-way shall be acquired by PNR.

2.5.3.14 Ensuring Embankment Width

The Contractor shall provide a minimum tolerance of 350 mm width

on both sides of the Embankment after the ballast has been properly
laid and constructed true to grade as shown on the drawings and
approved by the Engineer.

2.5.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

2.5.4.1 Method of Measurement

The quantity of embankment to be paid for shall be the volume of

material compacted in place, accepted by the Engineer and formed
with material obtained from any source.

Material from excavation per Section 2.3 which is used in embankment

and accepted by the Engineer will be paid under embankment and such

134
 payment will be deemed to include the cost of excavating, hauling,
stockpiling and all other costs incidental to the work.

Material for Selected Borrow topping will be measured and paid for
under the same conditions specified in the preceding paragraph.

The quantities to be paid for the Compaction Existing Ground shall be

the number of square meters executed. The area compacted by the
Contractor for service road (temporary access road) built by him for
his own convenience shall not be paid separately.

The quantity of ensuring embankment width shall be measured by the

cubic meter.

2.5.4.2 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 2.5.4.1

shall be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the Pay Items
listed and shown in the Bill of Quantities. The payment shall
constitute full compensation for sourcing, placing and compacting all
materials including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Section.

135
2.6 COMPACTION EQUIPMENT AND DENSITY CONTROL STRIPS

2.6.1 SCOPE

When specified, this procedure will be used to determine density requirements

of selected embankments and subgrade. The procedure will consist of control
strip construction to establish target densities for the specified course plus use
of sand cone method of density testing equipment to determine in-place
density obtained during the construction process.

2.6.2 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

2.6.2.1 Compaction Equipment

Compaction equipment shall be capable of obtaining compaction

requirements without detrimentally affecting the compacted material.
The equipment shall be modern, efficient compacting units approved
by the Engineer. The compacting units may be of any type, provided
they are capable of compacting each lift of material as specified and
shall meet the minimum requirements as required and approved by the
Engineer.

2.6.2.2 Construction of Control Strips and Determination of

Target Density

To determine target density, a control strip shall be constructed at the

beginning of work on each course of material to be compacted. Each
control strip, constructed to acceptable density and surface tolerances
shall remain in place and become a section of the completed railway.
Unacceptable control strip shall be corrected or removed and replaced
at the Contractor‟s expense. A control strip shall have an approximate
area in square meter as required by the Engineer and shall be of the
same depth specified for the construction of the course which it
represents.

The materials used in the construction of the control strip shall

conform to the specification requirements. They shall be furnished
from the same source and shall be of the same type to be used in the
remainder of the course represented by the control strip. The
underlying grade or structure upon which a control strip is to be
constructed shall have the prior approval of the Engineer.

The equipment used in the construction of the control strip shall be

approved by the Engineer and shall be of the same type and mass to be
used on the remainder of the course represented by the control strip.

Compaction of control strips shall commence immediately after the

course has been placed to the specified thickness, and shall be
continuous and uniform over the entire surface. Compaction of the
control strip shall be continued until no discernible increase in density
can be obtained by additional compactive effort.

136
 Upon completion of the compaction, the mean density of the control
strip will be determined by averaging the results of ten in place density
tests taken at randomly selected sites within the control strip. The
mean density of the control strip shall be the target density for the
remainder of the course which it represents.

If the mean density of the control strips is less than 95 percent of the
density of laboratory compacted specimens as determined by testing
procedures appropriate for the material being placed, the Engineer may
order the construction of another control strip.

A new control strip may also be ordered by the Engineer or requested

by the Contractor when:

1.) A change in the material or job mix formula, is made.

2.) Ten days of production have been accepted without

construction of a new control strip.

3.) There is reason to believe that a control strip density is not

representative of the material being placed.

2.6.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

2.6.3.1 Methods of Measurement

No measurement for payment will be made for this item.

2.6.3.2 Basis of Payment

Unless otherwise provided, the cost of constructing the control strip

will be considered incidental to the cost of the work item for which the
control strip is required. Payment for the work item shall be deemed to
include compensation for performing the work herein specified and the
furnishing of all materials, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals
necessary to construct the density control strip. No payment will be
made for any material used in the construction of unacceptable control
strip.

137
 PART 3
DRAINAGE AND SLOPE PROTECTION STRUCTURES

3.1 DRAINAGE DITCHES AND BASINS

3.1.1 SCOPE

This Section shall consist of the construction of concrete lined ditch and U-
type ditches.

The Work shall also include the general items in connection with the
construction of ditches along the slope toes and cut sections, vertical ditches
along the slopes, median strip drains, relating ditches connecting to these
drains, catch basins, drainage pipes, inlet and outlet of drain, connection
between drains. All works shall be done in accordance with these
Specifications and in reasonably close conformity with the lines, levels, grades
and dimensions shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

3.1.2 MATERIAL

Materials for any precast and cast-in-place concrete shall conform to the
requirements of Section 4.1, of these Specifications.

The shape and size of drainage structures shall be as shown on the Drawings.

Joint Mortar – Joint mortar for concrete pipes shall consist of 1 part, by
volume of Portland Cement, and two (2) parts of approved sand with water as
necessary to obtain the required consistency.

Portland cement and sand shall conform to the requirements of Section 4.1,
Concrete Works for Structures. Mortar shall be used within thirty (30)
minutes after its preparation.

Bedding material shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 3.1.3.2,

Bedding.

Backfilling material shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 3.1.3.5,

Backfilling.

When the location of manufacturing plants allows, the plants will be inspected
periodically for compliance with specified manufacturing methods, and
material samples will be obtained for laboratory testing for compliance with
materials quality requirements. This can be the basis for acceptance of
manufacturing lots as to quality.

Prior to and during incorporation of materials in the work, these materials will
be subject to the latest inspection and approval of the Engineer.

3.1.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

3.1.3.1 Excavation

138
 Trenches shall be excavated in accordance with the requirements of
2.3, Excavation, to a width sufficient to allow for proper jointing of the
conduit and thorough compaction of the bedding and backfill material
under and around the conduit. When feasible, trench walls shall be
vertical.

The completed trench bottom shall be firm for its full length and width.
Where required, in the case of crop drains, the trench shall have a
longitudinal camber of the magnitude specified.

When so specified on the Drawings, the excavation for conduits placed

in embankment fill, shall be made after the embankment has been
completed to the specified or directed height above the designed grade
of the conduit.

3.1.3.2 Bedding

The conduit bedding shall conform to one of the classes specified.

When no bedding class is specified, the requirements for Class C
bedding shall apply.

Class A bedding shall consist of a continuous concrete cradle

conforming to the drawing details.

Class B bedding shall consist of bedding the conduit to a depth of not

less than 30 percent of the vertical outside diameter of the conduit.
The minimum thickness of bedding material beneath the pipe shall be
100 mm. The bedding material shall be sand or selected sandy soil all
of which passes a 9.5 mm sieve and not more than 10 percent of which
passes a 0.075 mm sieve. The layer of bedding material shall be
shaped to fit the conduit for at least 15 percent of its total height.
Recesses in the trench bottom shall be shaped to accommodate the bell
when bell and spigot type conduit is used.

Class C bedding shall consist of bedding the conduit to a depth of not

less than 10 percent of its total height. The foundation surface,
completed in accordance with Section 2.3, Excavation, shall be shaped
to fit the conduit and shall have recesses shaped to receive the bells, if
any.

For large diameter structural plate pipe the shaped bed to be used need
not exceed the width of bottom plate.

Foundation for drainage ditches, except waterway pipes and drainage

pipes, shall be filled with cobble 10 cm in diameter with binder sand
and gravel, or with sand gravel or as shown on the Drawings approved
by the Engineer and compacted to the specified line and grade by
means of rammer, etc.

3.1.3.3 Laying Conduit, Drainage Ditch

139
 The conduit laying shall begin at the downstream end of the conduit
line. The lower segment of the conduits shall be in contact with the
shaped bedding throughout its full length.

Paved or partially-lined conduit shall be laid such that the longitudinal

center line of the pave segment coincides with the flow line. Elliptical
and elliptically reinforced conduits shall be placed with the major axis
within 5 degrees of a vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of the
conduit.

Drainage ditches shall be laid out to the exact line and grade as shown
on the Drawings.

Bottom surface of ditches shall be smoothly and uniformly finished.

Unless otherwise specified, joints of precast blocks shall be
constructed so as to resist against sliding effectively by excavating soil
to the shape of hook and placing concrete without disturbing
surrounding soil.

Cast-in-place concrete for drainage ditches, catch basins, inlet and

outlet of drainage ditches and pipes and connection of ditches shall be
cons to the requirements of Section 4.1, Concrete Works for Structures
of these Specifications. These structures shall be exactly as shown on
the Drawings and as directed by the Engineer. The top portions of
catch basins or inlet on which covers are to be placed shall be carefully
and smoothly finished.

3.1.3.4 Jointing Conduit, Construction Joint of Drainage Ditch

a) Jointing Conduit

The method of joining conduit sections shall be such that the ends are
fully entered and the inner surfaces are reasonably flush and even.

Joints shall be made with (a) Portland Cement mortar, (b) Portland
Cement grout, or any other type, as may be specified. Mortar joints
shall be made with an excess of mortar to form a continuous bead
around the outside of the conduit and finished smooth on the inside.
For grouted joints, molds or runners shall be used to retain the poured
grout.

When Portland Cement mixtures are used, the completed joints shall
be protected against rapid drying by any suitable covering material.

Conduits shall be inspected before any backfill is placed. Any pipe

found to be out of alignment, unduly settled, or damaged shall be taken
up and relaid or replaced.

b) Construction Joint of Drainage Ditch

Construction of drainage ditch structure shall be built to the specified

lines, grades and dimensions. The location of all construction joints

140
 shall be as shown on the drawings or as approved by the Engineer. The
contractor shall place and attach to the structure all timber, metal or
other accessories necessary for the completion of drainage ditch as
shown on the Drawings.

3.1.3.5 Backfilling

Materials for backfill on each side of the conduit for the full trench
width and to an elevation of 300 mm above the top of the conduit shall
be fine, readily compactible soil or granular material selected from
excavation or from a source of the Contractor‟s choice, and shall not
contain stones that would be retained on a 50 mm sieve, chunks of
highly plastic clay, or other objectionable material. Granular backfill
material shall have not less than 95 percent passing a 12.5 mm sieve
and not less than 95 percent retained on a 4.75 mm sieve. Oversized
material, if present, shall be removed at the source of the material,
except as directed by the Engineer.

When the top of the conduit is flushed with or below the top of the
trench, backfill material shall be placed at or near optimum moisture
content and compacted in layers not exceeding 1500 mm (compacted)
on both sides of an elevation 300 mm above the 300 mm above the top
of the conduit. Care shall be exercised to thoroughly compact the
backfill under the haunches of the conduit. The backfill shall be
brought up evenly on both sides of the conduit for the full required
length. Except where negative projecting embankment-type
installation is specified, the backfill material shall be placed and
compacted for the full depth of the trench.

When the top of the conduit is above the top of the trench, backfill
shall be placed at or near optimum moisture content and compacted in
layers not exceeding 300 mm (compacted) and shall be brought up
openly on both sides of the conduit for its full length to an elevation
300 mm above the top of the conduit. The width of backfill on each
side of the conduit for the portion above the top of the trench shall be
equal to twice the diameter of the conduit or 3.5 m, whichever is less.
The backfill material used in the trench for a distance on each side of
the conduit equal to the horizontal inside diameter and to 300 mm
above the top of the conduit shall conform to the requirements for
backfill material in this Subsection. The remainder of the backfill shall
consist of material from excavation and borrow that is suitable for
embankment construction.

Compaction to the density specified in Section 2.5, Embankment, shall

be achieved by use of mechanical tampers or by rolling or method
approved by the Engineer.

All conduits after being bedded and backfilled as specified in this

Section shall be protected by one meter cover of fill before equipment
is permitted to cross during construction of the railroad way.

141
 Backfill for ditches or inlets on the railway shall be carefully made so
as to obtain a bearing capacity equal to the adjacent subgrade. Backfill
for vertical ditches along the slopes shall be carefully constructed so as
to prevent erosion by overflow of drain water or rain.

3.1.3.6 Imperfect Trench

Under this method, for rigid conduit, the embankment shall be

completed as described in subsection 3.1.3.5, Backfilling, to a height
above the conduits equal to the vertical outside diameter of the conduit
plus 300 mm. A trench equal in width to the outside horizontal
diameter of the conduit and to the length shown on the Drawings or as
directed by the Engineer shall then be excavated to within 300 mm of
the top of the conduit, trench walls being as nearly vertical as possible.
The trench shall be loosely filled with highly compressible soil. Straw,
hay, corn stalks, leaves brush or sawdust may be used to fill the lower
one-fourth to one-third of the trench. Construction of embankment
above shall then proceed in a normal manner.

3.1.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

3.1.4.1 Method of Measurement

The quantities of drainage for concrete lined ditches and U-type

ditches to be paid for will be the total length of installed, completed
and accepted.

The quantities of catch basins to be paid for will be the number of

units/pieces furnished and installed, complete in place and accepted.

3.1.4.2 Basis of Payment

The quantities of to be paid under drainage and slope protection shall

be as indicated in the bill of quantities including all other works to
complete these item of works.

142
3.2 RC PIPES

3.2.1 SCOPE

The provision for of 300mm RC Pipes shall be as directed by the Engineer on

locations deemed necessary used as cross drains .Materials shall be Extra
strength and standard strength clay pipe AASHTO M65 / DPWH standards or
its equivalent. Granular backfill filter material shall be permeable and shall
meet the requirements of AASHTO M 6, except that soundness tests will not
be required and minor variation in grading and content of deleterious
substances may be approved by the Engineer. Trenches shall be excavated to
the dimensions and grades required as directed by the Engineer. A minimum
of 150 mm bedding layer of granular backfill material shall be placed and
compacted at the bottom of the trench for its full width and length.

143
3.3 CLEANING AND REHABILITATION OF EXISTING DRAINAGE EARTH
AND CONCRETE DITCHES

3.3.1 SCOPE

This Section shall consist of cleaning and rehabilitation of existing earth and
concrete ditches, in reasonably close conformity with this Specification and as
shown on the Drawings.

3.3.2 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

Materials used for repair or replacement under the various Pay Items shall
conform to the requirements of the applicable Sections of this Specification.

3.3.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

The earth and concrete shall be carefully removed and cleaned of foreign
materials.

In such cases where the Contractor damaged the existing ditches, he shall
furnish all materials required to repair the ditches and perform all excavation
and backfill and restore the ditches all at the contract bid price for this Item.

All debris and left outs shall be properly disposed off by the Contractor at the
disposal area designated and approved by the Engineer at no additional cost to
the Employer.

3.3.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

3.3.4.1 Method of Measurement

Measurement will be made by the linear meter of ditches acceptably

cleaned, as designated in the Bill of Quantities.

Ditches cleaned in place will be measured along the flow line of the
center line acceptably cleaned as directed.

3.3.4.2 Basis of Payment

The quantities determined for the ditches as provided in the above

Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract price bid per
unit of measurement for each of the Pay Items listed and appear in the
Bill of Quantities, which price and payment shall be full compensation
for the work of this item except excavation and backfill which is paid
for under Section 2.3, Excavation.

Excavation and backfill necessary shall be done as part of the work of

this Section.

144
3.4 CONCRETE LINED DITCH

3.4.1 SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION

In the construction of embankment of the railway facilities it will be necessary

to line a portion or portions of the canals due to the texture of the soil
uncovered during excavation. In such cases, the Contractor shall construct a
50 mm thick concrete reinforced with wire mesh lining all in accordance with
the lines and grade as shown in the Drawings.

The work shall include the trimming of the foundation and the construction of
the canal lining with the necessary construction joints as specified herein.

3.4.2 METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION

1. Trimming Foundation for concrete Lining

Trimming foundation for concrete lining includes trimming and finishing the
ditch section upon which concrete lining is to be placed.

Where foundation material has been excavated beyond the neat lines of the
underside of the ditch lining, the excess excavation shall be filled with
selected material conforming to the requirements of a compacted
embankment. Where foundation material has been disturbed or loosened
during trimming operations or with selected material as directed by the
Engineer. Selected material placed on ditch side slopes shall be placed in
layers which parallel the foundation. Selected material placed in the invert
shall be placed in layers which parallel the foundation surface. Where the
thickness of the selected material is more than 150 mm, the material shall be
placed in layers not exceeding 150 mm thick before compaction. Selected
material shall be moisture conditioned for proper compaction and compacted
to not less than 90 percent compaction.

2. Canal Lining

Concrete for canal lining shall conform to the provisions of Section 4.1. The
surface of the lining shall be finished as specified for finish under Section 4.1
or as specified herein.

The Contractor may be permitted to over excavate the foundation and increase
the thickness of the lining at his expense to facilitate his construction
operations. However, no abrupt changes in the configuration of the
foundation will be permitted. Such changes shall be gradual and shall be
subject to approval by the Engineer.

When concrete lining operations are stopped for the day because of equipment
breakdown or delayed by other causes, the end of fresh concrete shall be
bulkheaded to a vertical surface and a construction joint be provided as
specified herein.

Construction joints in canal lining shall be provided at every four (4) meters.

145
3.4.3 CONCRETE FINISH FOR LINED DITCH

Allowable deviations from established lines, grades and dimensions shall be as

approved by the Engineer. These allowable deviations are defined as
“tolerance” and are distinguished from surface irregularities in finish as
described herein.

Finishing of concrete surfaces for concrete lined ditch shall be performed only
by skilled workmen. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer as to when
concrete will be finished. Unless inspection is waived in each specific case,
finishing of concrete shall be performed only in the presence of the Engineer.
Concrete surfaces will be tested by the Engineer to determine that surface
irregularities are within the limits hereinafter specified.

Surface irregularities are classified as “abrupt” or “gradual”. Offsets caused

by displaced or misplaced form sheathing or lining or form sections or by
loose knots in forms or otherwise defective form lumber will be considered
abrupt irregularities, and will be tested by direct measurements. All other
irregularities will be considered to be gradual irregularities, and will be
measured as the departure from the testing edge of an approved
template held parallel to and in contact with the surface. The template shall
consist of a straight edge or the equivalent thereof for curved surfaces.

Exterior surfaces for concrete lined ditch will be sloped for drainage where
shown on the Drawings or as directed. The finished surface shall be
equivalent in evenness, smoothness and from freedom from rock pockets and
surface voids to that obtainable by effective use of a long-handled steel trowel.
Light surface fitting and light trowel marks will not be considered
objectionable. Surface irregularities measured as described above shall not
exceed 0.60 cm for bottom slabs and 1.20 cm for side slopes.

Moisture Control For Unformed Surfaces

In warm, dry, or windy weather the moisture control measures specified herein
shall be taken to inhibit loss of moisture from the surface of the concrete.
Such surfaces shall be fog-sprayed, covered completely with white
polyethylene sheet, or otherwise treated as approved. The curing specified in
Section 4.1, shall be started as soon as the concrete hardens, however, the
surface of the concrete shall be kept wet during the change in curing methods.

If surfaces are fog-sprayed, the fog-spray shall maintain a sheet of moisture on

the concrete but shall not displace or create a wet surface during finishing
operations. Surfaces shall be fog-sprayed during and immediately following
finishing operations, and fog spraying shall be interrupted only to enable
finishing operations. Such interruptions shall be of minimum duration and
shall occur only in the immediate area being finished.

Plastic shrinkage cracks which occur before the concrete hardens shall be
closed. Shrinkage cracks shall be closed by working; crack shall not be sealed
by troweling only.

146
3.4.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

3.4.4.1 Method of Measurement

Concrete Lined Ditch will be measured by the cubic meters of

acceptably placed lining computed to the neat lines and dimensions as
shown in the Drawings unless otherwise specified. Concrete or mortar
wasted as directed or used to fill unauthorized over excavation will not
be measured for payment.

3.4.4.2 Basis of Payment

Payment of concrete for canal lining will be made on the contract unit
price per cubic meter, which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, supplies, tools,
equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work and for
subsidiary work called for in the construction including construction
joints.

147
 PART 4
BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

4.1 CONCRETE WORKS FOR STRUCTURES

4.1.1 SCOPE

4.1.1.1

This work shall consist of furnishing, placing and finishing concrete in

all structures in accordance with this Specification and conforming to
the lines, grades, and dimensions shown on the Drawings. Concrete
shall consist of a mixture of Portland Cement, fine aggregate, coarse
aggregate, admixtures when specified, and water mixed in the
proportions specified or approved by the Engineer.

4.1.2 GENERAL PROVISIONS

4.1.2.1

Full cooperation shall be given to the other trades to install embedded

items. Suitable templates or instruction will be provided for setting,
items shall have been inspected, and tests for concrete or other
materials or for mechanical operations shall have been completed and
approved.

4.1.2.2

The following reference standards, listed below, shall become part of

this Specification:

a) American concrete Institute (ACI), Standard

ACI 211.1 Recommended Practice for Selecting
Proportions for Structural Concrete

ACI 214 Recommended Practice for Evaluation of

Compressive Test Results of Field Concrete

ACI 305 Recommended Practice for Hot Weather

Concreting

ACI 315 Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing

Reinforced Concrete Structure

b) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

Publications:
A 82 Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete
Reinforcement

A 185 Welded Steel Wire Fabric Concrete

148
 Reinforcement

A 615 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement

A 616 Rail-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement

A 617 Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement

C 31 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens

In the Field

C 33 Concrete Aggregate

C 39 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens

C 42 Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete,

Obtaining and testing

C 94 Ready-mixed Concrete

C 150 Portland Cement

C 171 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete

C 173 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by

The Volumetric Method

C 192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens

In the Laboratory

C 231 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Pressure Method

C 260 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

C 309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for

Curing Concrete

C 494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

C 1751 Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete

Paving and Structural Construction (Non-
Extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)

c) American Association of State Highway and Transportation

149
 Official (AASHTO)
Sampling of fresh concrete T 141

Weight per cubic meter and

Air content (gravimetric)
Of concrete T 121

Slump of Portland Cement

Concrete T 119

d) American Welding Society (AWS)

D 12.1 Welding Reinforcing Steel, Metal Inserts and

Connections in Reinforced Concrete
Construction

e) Philippine Standard (PS) 681-04; 1975

DSB 275 Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

4.1.2.3 Submittals

1) Refer to Section 1.11, General Requirements of this Volume.

2) Test Reports and Certificates shall be furnished in conformity

with Section 1 and approval received before delivery of certified or
tested materials to the Project Site .

4.1.3 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

4.1.3.1 Concrete and Concrete Ingredients

1. Concrete and concrete materials shall conform to the

requirements of this Section. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings
or required by the Engineer, concrete shall be of Class B.

2. Reinforcing Steel. Reinforcing steel shall conform to the

requirements of Subsection 4.1.2.2 b (ASTMA 615 and 4.1.2.2c.
PS681-04, 198 DSB 275)

3. Structural Steel. Structural steel shall conform to the

requirements of corresponding materials in Section 4.2, Metal
Structures and 4.3.3.1.2a (AASHTO M 183 or JIS 3101, JIS G 3106).

4. Elastomeric Bearing. Elastomeric bearing pads shall conform

to AASHTO M 2312, Laminated Elastomeric Bridge Bearings.

5. Paints. Paints shall conform to the requirements in Item 4.7,

Painting.

150
6. Concrete Curing Compound. Curing compound shall conform
to the requirements of AASHTO M 148 Liquid membrane-forming
compounds for curing concrete.

7. Joint filler. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or

required by the Engineer, materials for expansion joint filler shall
conform to the requirements of the following specifications:

a. AASHTO M 33 Preformed expansion joint filler for concrete.

AASHTO M 153 Preformed sponge rubber and cork expansion b.

joint fillers for concrete paving and structural construction.

c. AASHTO M 173 Concrete joint sealer hot poured elastic type.

d. AASHTO M 213 Preformed expansion joint filler for concrete

paving and structural construction-non-extruding and resilient
bituminous type.

e. AASHTO M 220 Preformed elastomeric compression joint

seals for concrete.

8. Proportioning and Strength of Structural Concrete

This shall be in accordance with the specification requirements

of this section.

9. Sampling and Testing

This shall be in accordance with this specification or as

required by the Engineer.

4.1.3.1.1 Cement

1. Portland Cement and Masonry Cement

Cement shall conform to the requirements of the

following cited Specifications for the type specified or
permitted.

Type Specification

Portland Cement AASHTO M 85 (ASTM

C 150)

Blended Hydraulic Cements AASHTO M 240 (ASTM

595)

Masonry Cement AASHTO M 150 (ASTM

C 91)

151
 When Types IV and V (AASHTO M 85), P and PA (AASHTO
M 150) cements are used, proper recognition shall be given to
the effects of slower strength gain on concrete proportioning
and construction practices. Types S and SA cements will be
permitted only when blended with Portland Cement in
proportions approved by the Engineer.

Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the product of

only one mill of any one brand and type of Portland Cement
shall be used on the project.

Only type I Portland Cement shall be used unless otherwise

mention in other parts of the specification or required by the
Engineer. Different brands or the same brands from the
different mills shall not be mixed nor shall they be used
alternately unless the mix is approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall provide suitable means of storing and

projecting the cement against dampness. Cement which, for
any reason, has become partially set or which contains lumps or
caked cement will be rejected. Cement salvaged from
discarded or used bags shall not be used.

Samples of cement shall be obtained in accordance with

AASHTO T 1217.

4.1.3.2 Admixtures

Admixtures shall conform to the following:

a) Air-Entraining Admixtures

ASTM C 260, AASHTO M 154 or equivalent.

b) Admixture other than air-entraining agent shall conform to

ASTM C 494, AASHTO M 194.

c) Chemical admixture if specified or permitted, shall conform to

the requirements of AASHTO M 194.

d) Admixture containing chloride ions, or other ions producing

deleterious effects, shall not be used.

e) Calcium chloride shall conform to AASHTO M 144, if

specified or permitted by the Engineer.

4.1.3.3 Aggregates

1) Coarse Aggregates

It shall consist of crushed stone, gravel, blast furnace slag, or other

approved inert materials of similar characteristics, or combinations

152
 thereof, having hard, strong, durable pieces and free from any adherent
coatings.

It shall contain not more than one (1) mass percent of material passing
the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve, not more than 0.25 mass percent of clay
lumps, nor more than 3.5 mass percent of soft fragments.

If the coarse aggregate is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium

sulfate soundness test, the weighted loss shall not exceed 12 mass
percent.

It shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 40 when tested by

AASHTO T 96.

If slag is used, its density shall not be less than 1120 kg/m3 (70 lb/cu.
Ft.). The gradation of the coarse aggregate shall conform to Table
4.1.3.4.

Table 4.1.3.4 Grading Requirement for Coarse Aggregate

Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing for

Standard Alternate Class Class Class Class Class Class
mm US Standard A B C D P Seal
63 2 1/2" 100
50 2" 95-100
37.5 1 1/2" 100 95-100 100
25 1" 95-100 35-70 95-100 100
19.0 3/4" 35-70 90-100 100
12.52 1/2" 25-60 10-30 25-60 90-100
9.5 3/8" 10-30 20-55 40-70
4.75 No. 4 0-10+ 0-5 0-5 0-10+ 0-10* 0-15*
*The measured cement content shall be within plus (+) or minus (-) 2
mass percent of the design cement content.

Only one grading specification shall be used from any one source.

2) Fine Aggregates

It shall consist of natural sand, stone screenings or other inert materials

with similar characteristics, or combinations thereof, having hard
strong and durable particles approved by the Engineer. Fine aggregate
from different sources of supply shall not be mixed or stored in the
same pile nor used alternately in the same class of concrete without the
approval of the Engineer.

It shall not contain more than three (3) mass percent of material
passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200 sieve) by washing nor more than one
(1) mass percent each of clay lumps or shale. The use of beach sand
will not be allowed without the approval of the Engineer.

153
 If the fine aggregate is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium
sulfate soundness test, the weighted loss shall not exceed 10 mass
percent.

The fine aggregate shall be free from injurious amounts of organic

impurities. If subjected to the colorimatic test for organic impurities
and a color darker than the standard is produced, it shall be rejected.
However, when tested for the effect of organic impurities of strength or
mortar by AASHTO T 71, the fine aggregate may be used if the
relative strength at 7 and 28 days is not less than 95 mass percent.

The fine aggregate shall be well-graded from coarse to fine and shall
conform to Table 4.1.3.1.

Table 4.1.3.1 Grading Requirements for Fine Aggregates

Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing

9.5 mm (3/8 in) 100
4.75 mm (No. 4) 95-100
1.18 mm (No. 16) 45-80
0.300 mm (No. 50) 5-30
0.150 mm (No. 100) 0-10

4.1.3.4 Water

Water used in mixing, curing or other designated applications shall be

reasonably clean and free of oil, salt, acid, alkali, grass or other
substances injurious to the finished product.

Water will be tested in accordance with and shall meet the

requirements indicated herein. Water which is drinkable may be used
without test. Where the source of water is shallow, the intake shall be
so enclosed as to exclude silt, mud, grass or other foreign materials.

It is required that the mixing water shall be clear and apparently clean.
If it contains quantities or substances that discolor it or make it smell
or taste unusual or objectionable, or cause suspicion, it shall not be
used unless service records or concrete made with it (or other
information) indicate that it is not injurious to the quality, shall be
subject to the acceptance criteria as shown in Table 4.1.3.2 and Table
4.1.3.3 or as designated by the Engineer.

When wash water is permitted, the producer will provide satisfactory

proof or data or non-detrimental effects of potentially reactive
aggregates are to be used. Use of wash water will be discontinued if
undesirable reactions with admixtures or aggregates occur.

Table 4.1.3.2 Acceptance Criteria for Questionable WaterSupplies

Limits
Compressive strength, min. %

154
 control at 7 days 90
Time of Setting deviation from control from 1:00 earlier

Time of Setting (Gillmore Test)

Initial Test No marked change
Final Set No marked change
Appearance Clear
Color Colorless
Odor Odorless
Total Solids 500 parts/million
Max.
pH value 4.5 to 8.5

Table 4.1.3.3 Chemical Limitation for Wash Water

Limits
Chemical Requirements, Minimum Concentration

Chloride as Cl (-1) expressed as a mass

percent of cement when added to
Cl –1 in the other components of the
concrete mixtures shall not exceed the
following levels:

1. Prestressed Concrete 0.06 percent

2. Conventionally reinforced concrete

in a moist environment and
exposed to chloride 0.10 percent

3. Conventionally reinforced concrete

in a moist environment but not
exposed to chloride 0.15 percent

4. Above ground building construction

where the concrete will stay dry No
limit for corrosion

Sulfate as SO4, ppmA 3000

Alkalies as (Na20 + 0.658 K20), ppm 600
Total Solids, ppm 50000

Wash water reused as mixing water in concrete may exceed the listed
concentrations of sulfate if it can be shown that the concentration
calculated in the total mixing water, including mixing water on the
aggregate and other sources, does not exceed the stated limits.

Water will be tested in accordance with, and shall meet the suggested
requirements of AASHTO T 26.

155
 Water known to be of potable quality may be used without test.

4.1.3.5 Curing Materials

1) Impervious sheet materials shall conform to ASTM C 171, or

equivalent except that polyethylene film, if used, shall be white
opaque.

2) Burlap shall be commercial quality, non-staining type

consisting 2 layers minimum.

3) Membrane Forming Curing Compound shall conform to ASTM

C 309, AASHTO M 148 or equivalent.

4.1.3.6

Form materials, coatings and ties are specified in paragraph 4.1.6,

FORMWORKS AND FALSE WORKS.

4.1.3.7

Reinforcement

1) Deformed bars conforming to DSB 275, Bars for reinforcing

concrete of PS 681-04.02 :1975 First Revision, or equivalent.

2) Mesh reinforcement conforming to AASHTO M 55.

4.1.3.8

Expansion Joint Filler

Poured filler for joints shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO

M 173.

Preformed joint filler shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO

M 33 (ASTM D 994), AASHTO M 153 to M 213, AASHTO M 220 or
ASTM D 751, type and class suitable for the use intended and shall be
punched to admit the dowels where called for on the Drawings.

The filler for its joint shall be furnished in a single piece for the depth
and width required for the joint unless otherwise authorized by the
Engineer. When the use of more than one piece is authorized for a
joint, the abutting ends shall be fastened securely, and held accurately
to shape, by stapling or other positive fastening satisfactory to the
Engineer.

4.1.3.9

Vapor Barrier and Sealant

1) Asphalt-saturated waterproof reinforced draft paper.

156
 2) Polyethylene sheeting shall be not less than 0.2 mm nominal
thickness.

4.1.4 SAMPLES AND TESTING

4.1.4.1

Testing except as otherwise specified herein shall be performed by an

approved testing agency as proposed by the Contractor and approved
by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Employer.

1) Cement

Sampled either at the mill or at the site of the work and tested by an
approved independent commercial or national testing laboratory at no
additional cost to the Employer. Certified copies of laboratory test
reports shall be furnished for each lot of cement and shall include all
test data, results, land certificates that the sampling and testing
procedures are in conformity with the Specifications. No cement shall
be used until notice has been given by the Engineer that the test results
are satisfactory. Cement that has been stored, other than in bins at the
mills, for more than 4 months after delivery to the Site shall be
retreated before use. Cement delivered at the Site and later found
under test to be unsuitable shall not be incorporated into the permanent
works.

2) Aggregates

Tested as prescribed in ASTM C 33.

3) Reinforcement

Certified copies of mill certificates of tests shall accompany deliveries

of steel bar reinforcement. If requested by the Engineer, additional
testing of the materials shall be made at the Contractor‟s expense.

4) Concrete Tests

For test purposes, three sets of test specimens shall be taken, under the
instruction of the Engineer, from each 50 cubic meter or fraction
thereof of each class of concrete placed. At least one set of test
specimen shall be provided for each class of concrete placed in each 8-
hour shift.

Each shall consist of two test specimens, and shall be made from a
separate batch. Samples shall be secured in conformity with ASTM C
172. Test specimens shall be made, cured, and packed for shipment in
accordance with ASTM C 31. Cylinders will be tested in accordance
with ASTM C 39 by and at the expense of the contractor. Test
specimens will be evaluated separately by the Engineer for meeting
strength requirements with CONCRETE QUALITY of ACI 318. The
standard age of test shall be 28 days, but 7-day test may be used, with

157
 the permission of the Engineer, provided that the relation between the
7-day and 28-day strengths on the concrete is established by tests for
the materials and proportions used. When samples fail to conform to
the requirements for strength, the Engineer shall have the right to order
a change in the proportions of the concrete mix for the remaining
portions of the work at no additional cost to the Engineer.

5) Test of hardened concrete in or removed from the Structure:

When the result of the strength test of the control specimens indicates
the concrete as placed does not meet the requirements or where there is
other evidence that the quality of the concrete is below the
requirements, test on core of in-place concrete shall be made in
conformity with ASTM C 42.

Core specimens shall be obtained by the Contractor and shall be tested.

Any deficiency shall be corrected. If the Contractor elects a load test,
he may submit a proposal for approval. If the proposal is approved, the
load test shall be made by the Contractor and the test results evaluated
by the Engineer in conformity with Chapter 20 of ACI 318. The cost of
the load test shall be borne by the contractor. If any concrete shows
evidence of failure during the load test or fails the load test, the
deficiency shall be corrected in a manner approved by the Engineer at
no additional cost to the Employer.

6) Admixtures

All admixtures shall be tested and those that have been in storage at the
Project Site for longer than 6 months shall be retest and if found to be
satisfactory, it can be used.

a) Air-Entraining Admixtures

Tested for conformity to the referenced specification under which it is

furnished. The testing shall be conducted with cement and aggregate
proposed for the Project.

b) Other admixtures, if approved, tested for conformity to the

referenced specifications under which it is furnished. The testing shall
be conducted with cement and aggregates proposed for the Project.

4.1.5 STORAGE

4.1.5.1

Storage accommodations for concrete materials shall be subject to

approval and shall afford easy access for inspection and identification
of each shipment in accordance with test reports.

1) Cement

158
 Immediately upon receipt at the Site, the cement shall be stored
separately in a dry weather tight, properly ventilated structure, with
adequate provisions for prevention or absorption of moisture. Cement
bags should not be stacked more than 13 bags high. The cement most
likely to have been exposed to moisture or stored in bags for more than
4 months shall not be used unless proven by tests to be in good
condition.

2) Aggregates

Stored to assure good drainage, to preclude inclusion of foreign

matter, and to preserve the gradation.

3) Reinforcement

All reinforcements shall be stored separately for each grade and

diameter, off the ground in a shed or under a suitable rain-proof cover.

4.1.6 FORMWORKS AND FALSEWORKS

4.1.6.1 Falsework Design And Drawings

Detailed working drawings and supporting calculations of the

falsework shall be furnished by the Contractor to the Engineer. No
falsework construction shall start until the Engineer has reviewed and
approved the design. The Contractor shall provide sufficient time for
the Engineer to complete this review. Such time shall be proportionate
to the complexity of the falsework design and in no case be less than
two weeks.

The Contractor may review the falsework drawings at any time

provided sufficient time is allowed for the Engineer‟s review before
construction is started on the revised portion.

Assumptions used in design of the falsework shall include but not be

limited to the following:

1. The entire superstructure cross-section, except for the railing,

shall be considered to be placed at one time, except when in the
opinion of the Engineer, a portion of the load is carried by members
previously cast and having attained a specified strength.

2. The loading used on timber piles shall not exceed the bearing
value for the pile and shall in no case exceed 20 tons per pile.

3. Soil bearing values and soil condition (wet and dry) shall be
designated by the Contractor on the falsework drawings. Falsework
footings shall be designed to carry the loads imposed upon them
without exceeding estimated soil bearing values or allowable
settlements.

159
 4. The maximum loadings and deflections used on jacks, brackets,
columns and other manufactured devices shall not exceed the
manufacturer‟s recommendations. If requested by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall furnish catalogue or other data verifying these
recommendations.

5. If the concrete is to be pre-stressed, the falsework shall be

designed to support any increased or readjusted loads caused by the
pre-stressing forces.

6. Joints supporting slabs and overhangs shall be considered as

falsework and designed as such.

Anticipated total settlements of falsework and forms shall be indicated

by the Contractor on the falsework drawings. These should include
falsework footing settlements over 20 mm will not be allowed unless
otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Deck slab forms between girders
shall be constructed with no allowance for settlement relative to the
girders.

Detailed calculations by the Contractor showing the stresses

deflections, and camber necessary to compensate for said deflections in
all load supporting members shall be supplied.

4.1.6.2 Falsework Construction

The falsework shall be constructed to conform to the falsework

drawings. The materials used in the falsework construction shall be of
the quantity and quality necessary to withstand the stresses imposed.
The workmanship used in falsework shall be of such quality that the
falsework will support the loads imposed on it without excessive
settlement or take-up beyond that shown on the falsework drawings.

When falsework is supported on piles, the piles shall be driven in a

bearing value equal to the total calculated pile loading as shown on the
falsework drawings.

Suitable jacks or edges shall be used in connection with falsework to

set the forms to their required grade and to take up any excessive
settlement in the falsework either before or during the placing of
concrete.

4.1.6.3 Removing Falsework

Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, or permitted by the Engineer,

falsework supporting any span of a supported bridge shall not be
released.

Falsework supporting deck overhangs and deck slabs between girders

shall not be released until 7 days after the deck concrete has been
placed.

160
 In addition to the above requirements, falsework for place pre-stressed
portion of structure shall not be released until after the pre-stressing
steel has been tensioned.

All falsework materials shall be completely removed. Falsework

piling shall be removed at least 50 cm below the surface of the original
ground or stream bed. When falsework piling is driven within the
limits of ditch or channel excavation areas, the falsework piling within
such areas shall be removed to at least 50 cm below the bottom and
side slopes of said excavated area.

All debris and refuse resulting from work shall be removed and the site
left in a neat and presentable condition.

4.1.6.4

Formwork Design and Drawings

The Contractor shall prepare drawings and material data for the
formwork and shutters to be submitted to the Engineer for approval
unless otherwise directed.

The requirements for design of formwork are the same as described

under Section 4.1.6.1.

4.1.6.5

Formwork Construction

Concrete forms shall be mortar-tight, true to the dimensions, lines and

grades of the structure and with the sufficient strength, rigidity, shape
and surface smoothness as to leave the finished works true to the
dimensions shown on the Drawings or required by the Engineer and
with the surface finish as specified.

Formwork and shutters are to be constructed in accordance with the

approved Drawings.

The inside surfaces of forms shall be cleaned of all dirt, mortar and
foreign material. Forms which will later be removed shall be
thoroughly coated with form oil prior to use. The form oil shall be of
commercial quality form oil or other approved coating which will
permit the ready release of the forms and will not discolor the concrete.

Concrete shall not be deposited in the forms until all work in

connection with constructing the forms has been completed, all
materials required to be embedded in the concrete have been placed
before the unit is to be poured, and the Engineer has inspected and
approved said forms and materials. Such work shall include the
removal of all dirt, chips, sawdust and other foreign material from the
forms.

161
 The rate of depositing concrete in forms shall be such to prevent
bulging of the forms or form panels in excess of the deflections
permitted by the Specification.

Forms for all concrete surfaces which will not be completely enclosed
or hidden below the permanent ground surface shall conform to the
requirements herein for forms for exposed surfaces. Interior surfaces
of underground drainage structures shall be considered to be
completely enclosed surfaces.

Formwork for concrete place under water shall be watertight. When

lumber is used, this shall be planed, tongued and grooved.

Forms for exposed concrete surfaces shall be designed and constructed

so that the formed surface of the concrete does not undulate
excessively in any direction between studs, joists, form stiffeners, form
fasteners, or wales. Undulations exceeding either 2 mm or 1/270 of the
center to center distance between studs, joists, form stiffeners, form
fasteners, or wales will be considered to be excessive. Should any
form of forming system, even though previously approved for use,
produce a concrete surface with excessive undulations, its use shall be
discontinued until modifications satisfactory to the Engineer have been
made. Portions of concrete structures with surface undulations in
excess of the limits herein specified may be rejected by the Engineer.

All exposed surfaces of similar portions of a concrete structure shall be

formed with the same forming material or with materials which
produce similar concrete surface textures, color and appearance.

Forms for exposed surfaces shall be made of form materials of even

thickness and width and with uniform texture. The materials shall
have sharp edges and be mortar-tight.

Forms for exposed surfaces shall be constructed with triangular fillets

at least 20 mm wide attached so as to prevent Mortar runs and to
produce smooth straight chamfers at all sharp edges of the concrete.

Form fasteners consisting of form bolts, clamps or other devices shall

be used as necessary to prevent spreading of the forms during concrete
placement. The use of ties consisting of twisted wire loops to hold
forms in position will not be permitted.

Anchor devices may be cast into the concrete for later use in
supporting forms or for lifting pre-cast members.

The use of driven types of anchorage for fastening forms of form

supports to concrete will not be permitted.

4.1.6.6 Removal of Forms and Falsework

162
Forms and falsework shall not be removed without the consent of the
Engineer. The Engineer‟s consent shall not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for the safety of the work. Blocks and bracing shall be
removed at the time the forms are removed and in no case shall any
portion of the wood forms be left in the concrete.

Supporting forms of shoring shall not be removed until structural

members have acquired sufficient strength to support safely their own
weight and any construction and/or storage load to which they may be
subjected, but in no case shall they be removed in less than 7 days, nor
shall forms used for curing be removed before expiration of curing
period except as specified in paragraph CURING. Care shall be taken
to avoid spalling the concrete surface or damaging concrete edges.
Wood forms shall be completely removed.

a) Control Tests

Results of suitable control tests will be used as evidence that concrete

has attained sufficient strength to permit removal of supporting forms.
Cylinders required for control tests shall be provided in addition to
those otherwise required by the Specifications. Test specimens shall
be removed from molds at the end of 24 hours and stored near to the
structure as practicable the same protection from the elements during
curing. Supporting forms or shoring shall not be removed until
control-test specimens have attained strength of at least 15.68 MPa.
The newly unsupported portions of the structure shall not be subject to
heavy construction or materials loading.

b) Tie-rods to be entirely removed from the wall shall be loosened

24 hours after concrete is placed, and form ties, except for a sufficient
number to hold forms in place, may be removed at that time. Ties
wholly withdrawn from wall shall be pulled toward the face that will
be concealed from view in the permanent work.

Filling of tie-rods or bolt holes as specified herein or approved by the

Engineer.c)

Falsework removal for continuous or cantilevered structures shall be as

directed by the Engineer or shall be such that the structure is gradually
subjected to its working stress.

When concrete strength tests are used for removal of forms and
supports, such removal should not begin until the concrete has attained
the percentage of the specified design strength shown in the table
below.

Minimum Time Minimum %age Design Strength

Centering under
Girders, beams
Frames or arches 14 days 80%

163
 Floor slabs 14 days 70%
Walls 1 day 70%
Columns 2 days 70%
Sides of beams and
all other vertical
surfaces 1 day 70%

In continuous structures, falsework shall not be released in any span

until the first and second adjoining spans on each side have reached the
strength specified or as approved by the Engineer.

In order to determine the condition of column concrete, forms shall be

removed from columns before releasing supports from beneath beams
and girders.

Forms and falsework shall not be released from under concrete without
first determining if the concrete has gained adequate strength without
regard to the time element. In the absence of strength determination,
the forms and falsework are to remain in place until removal is
permitted by the Engineer.

The forms for footings constructed within cofferdams or cribs may be

left in place when, in the opinion of the Engineer, their removal would
endanger the safety of the cofferdam or crib, and when the forms so
left intact will not be exposed to view in the finished structure. All
other forms shall be removed whether above or below the ground line
or water level.

4.1.6.7 Concrete Surfaces To Be Smooth

Form surfaces that will be in contact with concrete shall be of materials

that is non-reactive with concrete and that will produce concrete
surfaces equivalent in smoothness and appearance to that produced by
new 1.2 x 2.4 meters plywood panels. Smaller size panels shall be
used only where required on joints, with each area less than 1.2 meters
wide formed with single panel accurately cut to the required
dimensions. Cut surfaces shall be smooth and treated with form
coating. Panel joints that will be in contact with concrete with defects
that will impair the texture and appearance of finish surfaces shall not
be used. Form lining, if used, shall be installed over solid backing.
Column forms shall be made with a minimum number of joints.

4.1.6.8 Concrete Surfaces To Be Exposed

Form surfaces that will be in contact with concrete shall be sound, tight
lumber or other material producing equivalent finish.

4.1.6.9Form Ties

Form ties shall be factory-fabricated, removal or snap-off metal ties of

design that it will not allow form deflection and will not spill concrete

164
 upon removal. Solid backing shall be provided for each tie. Ties shall
be fitted with devices that will leave holes in the concrete surface not
less than 9 mm nor more than 25 mm in diameter and of depth not less
than 25 mm.

4.1.6.10 Chamfering

External corners of columns, girders, beams, foundation walls

projecting beyond overlaying masonry, and other external corners that
will be exposed shall be chamfered, beveled or rounded, not less than
19 mm, by molding in the forms unless the drawings specifically state
that chamfering is to be omitted.

4.1.6.11 Coating

Forms for exposed surfaces shall be coated with form oil or form-
release agent before reinforcement is placed. The coating shall be a
commercial formulation of satisfactory and proven performance that
will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will
not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces depending upon
bond or adhesion nor impede the wetting of surfaces to be cured with
water or curing compounds. The coating shall be used as
recommended in the manufacturer‟s printed or written instructions.
Forms for unexposed surfaces may be wet with water in lieu of coating
immediately before placing of concrete. Surplus coating on form
surfaces and coating on reinforcement steel and construction joints
shall be removed before placing concrete.

4.1.7 REINFORCEMENT

4.1.7.1 Reinforcement Steel

1) Fabricated to shapes and dimensions shown and shall be placed

where indicated. Reinforcement shall be free of loose or flaky rust and
mill scale, or coating, and any other substance that would reduce or
destroy the bond. Reinforcing steel reduced in sections shall not be
used. After any substantial delay in the work, previously placed
reinforcing steel for future bonding shall be inspected and cleaned.
Reinforcing steel shall not be bent or straightened in a manner
injurious to the steel or concrete.

Bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings shall not be
placed. The use of heat to bend or straighten reinforcing steel shall not
be permitted. Bars shall be moved as necessary to avoid interference
with other reinforcing steel, conduits, or embedded items. If bars are
moved more than one bar diameter, the resulting arrangement of bars
including additional bars necessary to meet structural requirements
shall be approved by the Engineer before concrete is placed. In slabs,
beams, and girders, reinforcing steel shall not be spliced at points of
maximum stress unless otherwise indicated.

165
 The nominal dimensions and unit weights of deformed bar designation
shall be in accordance with the following table.

Unit Weight
Bar No. Diameter (mm) Area (mm2)
(Kg/m)
2 6mm 28.27 0.222
3 10mm 78.54 0.616
4 12mm 113.10 0.888
5 16mm 201.10 1.579
6 20mm 314.20 2.466
8 25mm 491.90 3.854
9 28mm 615.75 4.833
10 32mm 804.25 6.313
11 36mm 1,017.90 7.991

2) The Contractor may provide the reinforcing steel bars based on

commercial standard available in the Philippines provided that
equivalent strength requirements can be supplied in accordance with
the above nominal dimensions and unit weights and subject however,
to the approval of the Engineer.

4.1.7.2 Wire and Wire-Mesh

Wire and wire mesh shall conform to AASHTO M 55. The type of
mesh shall be as indicated on the drawings and approved by the
Engineer. The wire shall conform to AASHTO M 32.

Wire-mesh reinforcement shall be continuous between crack control

joints in slabs on grade and shall be continuous between expansion
joints in other slabs. Laps shall be at least one full mesh plush 50 mm
staggered to avoid continuous lap in either direction and securely wired
or clipped with standard clips.

4.1.7.3 Bar-Mat Reinforcement

Bar-mat reinforcement for concrete shall conform to AASHTO M 54.

4.1.7.4 Dowels and Tie-Bars

Dowels in slabs on grade shall be installed at right angles to

construction joints and expansion joints. Dowels shall be accurately
aligned parallel to the finished surface, and shall be rigidly held in
place and supported during placing of the concrete. One end of dowels
shall be oiled or greased.

4.1.7.5 Tie-Bars

Tie bars on grade shall be placed at right angles to construction joints.

Tie bars shall be accurately aligned parallel to the finished surface, and

166
 shall be rigidly held in place and supported during placing of the
concrete.

4.1.7.6 Supports

Supports shall be provided in conformity with ACI 315 and ACI 318
unless otherwise indicated or specified. Wire, ties, when used, shall be
rigidly held in place and supported during placing of the concrete.

1) For Slabs on Grade

Reinforcement shall be supported on precast structure units spaced at

intervals required by size of reinforcement used, to keep reinforcement
the minimum height specified or indicated above the underside of slab
or footing.

2) For Slabs other than on Grade

Supports for which any portion will be less than 25 mm concrete

surface that will be exposed to view or painted shall be plastic-coated
steel conforming to ACI 315, stainless steel, pre-cast concrete units, or
plastic. Pre-cast concrete units shall be wedge-shaped, not larger than
90 mm by 90 mm, and of thickness equal to that indicated for concrete
protection of reinforcement. The pre-cast units shall have cast-in
galvanized tie wires hooked at top for anchorage and shall blend with
concrete surfaces after finishing is completed. Concrete shall be of the
same quality as for slabs, but with coarse aggregate reduced. Plastic
supports shall be of strength and spaced so as not to deform weight to
which it is subjected.

4.1.7.7 Welding Reinforcing Bars

Welding of reinforcing bars shall only be permitted where shown. All

welding shown shall be performed in accordance with AWS D 12.1 or
equivalent.

4.1.7.8 Exposed Reinforcement Bars, Dowels, Etc.

Exposed reinforcement bars, dowels and plates intended for bonding with future extensions
shall be protected from corrosion.

4.1.7.9 Concrete Protection For Reinforcement

1) The minimum cover of reinforcement shall be as indicated on

the Drawings or as specified in the other Sections and as shown in the
table below.

2) Tolerance for concrete cover of reinforcing steel other than

tendons:

MINIMUM COVER MAXIMUM VARIATION

75 mm or more 9 mm

167
 less than 75 mm 6 mm
4.1.8 CLASSES OF CONCRETE AND USAGE

4.1.8.1 Strength Requirement

1) Concrete of various classes unless specified in other Sections or

indicated on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer shall be
proportioned and mixed for the strengths as required herein.

Six classes of concrete are provided for in this Work, namely:

A, B, C, D, P and Seal. Each class shall be used in that part of the
structure as called for on the Drawings.

4.1.8.2 Usage

The concrete of various classes to be used unless otherwise specified in

other Sections or indicated on the Drawings or directed in writing by
the Engineer shall be as follows:

Class A – All superstructures. The notable parts of the structure

included are slabs, beams and girders.

Class B – For heavily reinforced substructures. The important parts of

the structure included are columns, arch ribs, box culverts and other
drainage structures, reinforced abutments, retaining walls, reinforced
footings, pre-cast piles and cribbing.

Class C – Footings, pedestals, massive pier shafts, pipe bedding, and

gravity walls, unreinforced or with only a small amount of
reinforcement.

Class D – Thin reinforced sections, railings, and for filler in steel grid
floors.

Class P – Pre-stressed concrete structures and members.

Seal – Concrete deposited in water.

4.1.8.3 Materials

4.1.8.3.1 Coarse Aggregate

It shall conform to all the requirements of Subsection4.1.3.3,

except that gradation shall conform to Table 4.1.3.4.

Table 4.1.3.4 Grading Requirement for Coarse Aggregate

Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing for

Standard Alternate Class
Class A Class B Class C Class D Class P
Mm US Standard Seal
63 2 1/2" 100

168
 50 2" 95-100
37.5 1 1/2" 100 95-100 100
25 1" 95-100 35-70 95-100 100
19.0 3/4" 35-70 90-100 100
12.5 1/2" 25-60 10-30 25-60 90-100
9.5 3/8" 10-30 20-55 40-70
4.75 No. 4 0-10+ 0-5 0-5 0-10+ 0-10* 0-15*
*The measured cement content shall be within plus (+) or minus (-) 2 mass percent of the
design cement content.

4.1.8.3.2 Expansion Joint Materials

Expansion joint materials shall be:

1. Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork, conforming to

AASHTO M 153.
2. Hot-Poured Elastic Type, conforming to AASHTO M
173.
3. Preformed Fillers, conforming to AASHTO M 213.
4.1.8.3.3 Elastomeric Compression Joint Seals

These shall conform to AASHTO M 220.

4.1.8.3.4 Elastomeric Bearing Pads

These shall conform to AASHTO M 251.

4.1.8.4 Sampling and Testing of Structural Concrete

As work progresses, at least one (1) sample consisting of three (3)

concrete cylinder test specimens, 150 x 300 mm (6 x 12 inches), shall
be taken from each seventy five (75) cubic meters of each class of
concrete or fraction thereof placed each day.

Compliance with the requirements of this Section shall be determined

in accordance with the following standard methods of AASHTO:

Sampling of fresh concrete T 141

Weight per cubic meter and
air content (gravimetric)
of concrete T 121
Sieve analysis of fine and
coarse aggregate T 27
Slump of Portland Cement
concrete T 119
Specific gravity and absorption
of fine aggregate T 84
Tests for strength shall be made in accordance with the following:
Making and curing concrete
compressive and flexural tests
specimens in the field T 23

169
 Compressive strength of molded
concrete cylinders T 22

4.1.9 PRODUCTION REQUIREMENTS

4.1.9.1 Proportioning and Strength of Structural Concrete

The concrete materials shall be proportioned in accordance with the

requirements for each class of concrete as specified in Table 4.1.3.5
using the absolute volume method as outlined in the American
Concrete Institute (ACI) Standard 211.1, “Recommended Practice for
Selecting Proportions for Normal and Heavy-weight Concrete”. Other
methods of proportioning may be employed in the mix design with
prior approval of the Engineer. The mix shall either be designed or
approved by the Engineer. A change in the source of materials during
the progress of work may necessitate a new mix design.

The strength requirements for each class of concrete shall be as

specified in Table 4.1.3.5.

Table 4.1.3.5 Composition and Strength of Concrete for Use in Structures

Minimum
Designated Size
MinimumCe Consistency CompressiveStrength
Class MaximumWate ofCoarse
mentContent Rangein of150 x 300mmConcrete
Of r/CementRatio AggregateSquare
per Slump CylinderSpecimen at 28
Concrete 3 Kg/kg Opening
m kg(bag**) mm(inch) days,
Std. Mm
MN/m2(psi)
360 0.52 50-100 37.5 - 4.75 23.5
A
(9 bags) (2 - 4) (3400)
360 0.53 50-100 37.5 - 4.75 20.7
B
(9 bags) (2 - 4) (1 1/2" - No. 4) (3000)
320 0.58 50-100 50- 4.75 16.5
C
(8 bags) (2 - 4) (2" - No. 4) (2400)
380 0.55 50 – 100 12.5 - 4.75 20.7
D
(9.5 bags) (2 - 4) (1/2" - No. 4) (3000)
P 440 0.49 100 max. 19.0 - 4.75 37.7
(11 bags) (4 max.) (3/4" - No. 4) (5000)
380 0.58 100 – 200 25 - 4 75 20.7
Seal
(9.5 bags) (4 - 8) (1" - No. 4) (3000)
** Based on 40 kg/bag

4.1.9.2 Consistency

Concrete shall have a consistency such that it will be workable in the

required position. It shall be of such a consistency that it will flow
around reinforcing steel but individual particles of the coarse aggregate
when isolated shall show on coating of mortar containing its
proportionate amount of sand. The consistency of concrete shall be
gauged by the ability of the equipment to properly place it and not by

170
 the difficulty in mixing and transporting. The quantity of mixing water
shall be determined by the Engineer and shall not be varied without his
consent. Concrete as dry as it is practical to place with the equipment
specified shall be used.

4.1.9.3 Batching

Measuring and batching of materials shall be done at a batching plant.

1. Portland Cement

Either sacked or bulk cement may be used. No fraction of a

sack of cement shall be used in a batch of concrete unless the cement is
weighed.

All bulk cement shall be weighed on an approved weighing device.

The bulk cement weighing hopper shall be properly sealed and vented
to preclude dusting operation. The discharge chute shall not be
suspended from the weighing hopper and shall be so arranged that
cement will neither be lodged in it nor leak from it.

Accuracy of batching shall be within plus (+) or minus (-) 1 mass

percent.

2. Water

Water may be measured either by volume or by weight. The

accuracy of measuring the water shall be within a range of error of not
more than 1 percent.

3. Aggregates

Stockpiling of aggregates shall be in accordance with

Subsection 4.1.9.5. All aggregates whether produced or handled by
hydraulic methods or washed, shall be stockpiled or binned for
draining at least 12 hours prior to batching. Rail shipment requiring
more than 12 hours will be accepted as adequate binning only if the car
bodies permit free drainage. If the aggregates contain high or non-
uniform moisture content, storage or stockpile period in excess of 12
hours may be required by the Engineer.

Batching shall be so conducted as to result in a 2 mass percent

maximum tolerance for the required materials.

4. Bins and Scales

The batching plant shall include separate bins for bulk cement,
fine aggregate and for each size of coarse aggregate, a weighing
hopper, and scales capable of determining accurately the mass of each
component of the batch.

171
 Scales shall be accurate to one half (0.5) percent throughout the range
used.

5. Batching

When batches are hauled to the mixer, bulk cement shall be

transported either in waterproof compartments or between the fine and
coarse aggregates. When cement is placed in contact with moist
aggregates, batches will be rejected unless mixed within 1 ½ hours of
such contact. Sacked cement may be transported on top of the
aggregates.

Batches shall be delivered to the mixer separate and intact. Each batch
shall be dumped cleanly into the mixer without loss, and, when more
than one batch is carried on the truck, without spilling of material from
one batch compartment into another.

6. Admixtures

The Contractor shall follow an approved procedure for adding

the specified amount of admixture to each batch and will be
responsible for its uniform operation during the progress of the work.
He shall provide separate scales for the admixtures which are to be
proportioned by weight, and accurate measures for those to be
proportioned by volume. Admixtures shall be measured into the mixer
with an accuracy of plus or minus (3) percent.

The use of calcium chloride as an admixture will not be permitted.

4.1.9.4 Mixing and Delivery

Concrete may be mixed at the site of construction, at a central point or

by a combination of central point and truck mixing or by a
combination of central point mixing and truck agitating. Mixing and
delivery of concrete shall be in accordance with the appropriate
requirements of AASHTO M 157 except as modified in the following
paragraphs of this section, for truck mixing or a combination of central
point and truck mixing or truck agitating. Delivery of concrete shall be
regulated so that placing is at a continuous rate unless delayed by the
placing operations. The intervals between delivery of batches shall not
be so great as to allow the concrete in place to harden partially, and in
no case shall such an interval exceed 30 minutes.

When volumetric measurements are authorized, the weight proportions

shall be converted to equivalent volumetric proportions. In such cases,
suitable allowance shall be made for variations in the moisture
condition of the aggregates, including the bulking effect in the fine
aggregate. Batching and mixing shall be in accordance with ASTM C
685, Section 6 through 9.

172
For batch mixing in the site of construction or at a central point, a
batch mixer, or an approved type shall be used. Mixer having a rated
capacity of less than one bag batch shall not be used. The volume of
concrete mixed per batch shall not exceed the mixer‟s nominal
capacity as shown on the manufacturer‟s standard rating plate on the
mixer except that an overload up to ten percent above the mixer‟s
nominal capacity may be permitted, provided concrete test data from
strength, segregation and uniform consistency are satisfactory and
provided no spillage of concrete takes place. The batch shall be so
charge into the drum that a portion of water shall enter in advance of
the cement and aggregates. The flow of water shall be uniform and
shall be in the drum by the end of the first 15 seconds of the mixing
period. Mixing time shall be measured from the time all materials,
except water, are in the drum. Mixing time shall not be less than
60 seconds for mixers having a capacity of 1.5 m3 or less. For mixers
having a capacity greater than 1.5 m3, the mixing time shall not be less
than 90 seconds. If timing starts, the instant the skip reaches its
maximum raised position, 4 seconds shall be added to the specified
mixing time. Mixing time ends when the discharge chute opens.

The mixer shall be operated at the drum speed as shown on the

manufacturer‟s name plate on the mixer. Any concrete mixed less than
the specified time shall be discarded and disposed off by the
Contractor at his own expense.

The timing device on stationary mixers shall be equipped with a bell or

other suitable warning device adjusted to give a clearly audible signal
each time the lock is released. In case of failure of the timing device,
the Contractor will be permitted to continue operations while it is
being repaired, provided he furnished an approved timepiece equipped
with minute and second hands. If the timing device is not placed in
good working order within 24 hours, further use of the mixer will be
prohibited until repairs are made.

Re-tempering concrete will not be permitted. Admixtures for

increasing the workability, for retarding the set, or for accelerating the
set or improving the pumping characteristics of the concrete will be
permitted only when specifically provided for in the Contract, or
authorized in writing by the Engineer.

1. Mixing Concrete: General

Concrete shall be thoroughly mixed in a mixer of an approved

size and type that will insure a uniform distribution of the materials
throughout the mass.

All concrete shall be mixed in mechanically operated mixers. Mixing

plat and equipment for transporting and placing concrete shall be
arranged with an ample auxiliary installation to provide a minimum
supply of concrete in case of breakdown of machinery or in case the
normal supply of concrete is disrupted. The auxiliary supply of

173
concrete shall be sufficient to complete the casting of a section up to a
construction joint that will meet the approval of the Engineer.

Equipment having components made of aluminum or magnesium

alloys, which would have contact with plastic concrete during mixing,
transporting or pumping of Portland Cement concrete, shall not be
used.

Materials shall be measured by weighing. The apparatus provided for

weighing the aggregates and cement shall be suitably designed and
constructed for this purpose. The accuracy of all weighing devices
except that for water shall be such that successive quantities can be
measured to within one percent of the desired amounts. The water
measuring device shall be accurate to plus or minus 0.5 mass percent.
All measuring devices shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Scales and measuring devices shall be tested at the expense of the
Contractor as frequently as the Engineer may deem necessary to insure
their accuracy.

Weighing equipment shall be insulated against vibration or movement

of other operating equipment in the plant. When the entire plant is
running, the scale reading at cut-off shall not vary from the weight
designated by the Engineer more than one mass percent for cement, 1
½ mass percent for any size of aggregate, or one more mass percent for
the total aggregate in any batch.

2. Mixing Concrete at Site

Concrete mixers may be of the revolving drum or the revolving

blade type and the mixing drum or blades shall be operated uniformly
at the mixing speed recommended by the manufacturer. The pick-up
and throw-over blades of mixers shall be restored or replaced when
any part or section is worn 20 mm or more below the original height of
the manufacturer‟s design. Mixers and agitators which have an
accumulation of hard concrete or mortar shall not be used.

When bulk cement is used and volume of the batch is 0.5m3 or more,
the scale and weigh hopper for Portland Cement shall be separate and
distinct from the aggregate hopper or hoppers. The discharge
mechanism of the bulk cement weigh hopper shall be interlocked
against opening before the full amount of cement is in the hopper.
The discharging mechanism shall also be interlocked against opening
when the amount of cement in the hopper is underweight by more than
3 mass percent of the amount specified.

When the aggregate contains more water than the quantity necessary to
produce a saturated surface-dry condition, representative samples shall
be taken and the moisture content determined for each kind of
aggregate.

174
The batch shall be so charged into the mixer that some water will enter
in advance of cement and aggregate. All water shall be in the drum by
the end of the first quarter of the specified mixing time.

Cement shall be batched and charged into the mixer so that it will not
result in loss of cement due to the effect of wind, or in accumulation of
cement on surfaces of conveyors or hoppers, or in other conditions
which reduce or vary the required quantity of cement in the concrete
mixture.

The entire content of a batch mixer shall be removed from the drum
before materials for a succeeding batch are placed therein. The
materials composing a batch except water shall be deposited
simultaneously into the mixer.

All concrete shall be mixed for a period of not less than 1 ½ minutes
after all materials, including water, are in the mixer. During the period
of mixing, the mixer shall operate at the speed for which it has been
designed.

Mixers shall be operated with an automatic timing device that can be

locked by the Engineer. The time device and discharge mechanics
shall be so interlocked that during normal operation no part of the
batch will be discharged until the specified mixing time has elapsed.

The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer shall contain a
sufficient excess of cement, sand, and water to coat the inside of the
drum without reducing the required mortar content of the mix. When
mixing is to cease for a period of one hour or more, the mixer shall be
thoroughly cleaned.

3. Mixing Concrete at Central Plant

Mixing at central plant shall conform to the requirements for

mixing at the site.

4. Mixing Concrete in Truck

Truck mixers, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer,

shall be of the revolving drum type, watertight, and so constructed that
the concrete can be mixed to insure a uniform distribution of materials
throughout the mass. All solid materials for the concrete shall be
accurately measured and charged into the drum at the proportioning
plant. Except as subsequently provided, the truck mixer shall be
equipped with a device by which the quantity of water added can be
readily verified. The mixing water may be added directly to the batch,
in which case a tank is not required. Truck mixers may be required to
be provided with a means of which the mixing time can be readily
verified by the Engineer.

175
The maximum size of batch in truck mixers shall not exceed the
minimum rated capacity of the mixer as stated by the manufacturer and
stamped in metal on the mixer. Truck mixing shall, unless otherwise
directed be continued for not less than 100 revolutions after all
ingredients, including water, are in the drum. The mixing speed shall
not be less than 4 rpm, nor more than 6 rpm.

Mixing shall begin within 30 minutes after the cement has been added
either to the water or aggregate, but when cement is charged into a
mixer drum containing water or surface-wet aggregate and when the
temperature is above 32 deg. C, this limit shall be reduced to 15
minutes. The limitation in time between the introduction of the
cement to the aggregate and the beginning of the mixing may be
waived when, in the judgment of the Engineer, the aggregate is
sufficiently free from moisture so that there will be no harmful effects
on the cement.

When a truck mixer is used for transportation, the mixing time

specified in Subsection 4.1.9 at a stationary mixer may be reduced to
30 seconds and the mixing completed in a truck mixer. The mixing
time in the truck mixer shall be as specified for truck mixing.

5. Transporting Mixed Concrete

Mixed concrete may only be transported to the delivery point in

truck agitators or truck mixers operating at the speed designated by the
manufacturers of the equipment as agitating speed, or in non-agitating
hauling equipment, provided the consistency and workability of the
mixed concrete upon discharge at the delivery point is suitable for
adequate placement and consolidation in place.

Truck agitators shall be loaded not to exceed the manufacturer‟s

guaranteed capacity. They shall maintain the mixed concrete in a
thoroughly mixed and uniform mass during hauling.

No additional mixing water shall be incorporated into the concrete

during hauling or after arrival at the delivery point.

The rate of discharge of mixed concrete from truck mixers or agitators

shall be controlled by the speed of rotation of the drum in the discharge
direction with the discharge gate fully open.

When a truck mixer or agitator is used for transporting concrete

to the delivery point, discharge shall be completed within one hour, or
before 250 revolutions of the drums or blades, whichever comes first,
after the introduction of the cement to the aggregates. Under
conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete or when the
temperature of the concrete is 30 deg. C, or above a time less than one
hour will be required.

6. Delivery of Mixed Concrete

176
 The Contractor shall have sufficient plant capacity and
transportation apparatus to insure continuous delivery at the rate
required. The rate of delivery of concrete during concreting operations
shall be such as to provide for the proper handling, placing and
finishing of the concrete. The rate shall be such that the interval
between batches shall not exceed 20 minutes. The methods of
delivering and handling the concrete shall be such as will facilitate
placing of the minimum handling.

4.1.9.5 Storage of Cement and Aggregate

All cement shall be stored, immediately upon delivery at the Site, in

weatherproof building which will protect the cement from dampness.
The floor shall be raised from the ground. The buildings shall be
placed in locations approved by the Engineer. Provisions for storage
shall be ample, and the shipments of cement as received shall be
separately stored in such a manner as to allow the earliest deliveries to
be used first and to provide easy access for identification and
inspection of each shipment. Storage buildings shall have capacity for
storage of a sufficient quantity of cement to allow sampling at least
twelve (12) days before the cement is to be used. Bulk cement, if used,
shall be transferred to elevated air tight and waterproof bins. Stored
cement shall meet the test requirements at any time after shortage
when retest is ordered by the Engineer. At the time of use, all cement
shall be free flowing and free of lumps.

The handling and storing of concrete aggregates shall be such as to

prevent segregation or the inclusion of foreign materials. The
Engineer may require that aggregate be stored on separate platforms at
satisfactory locations.

In order to secure greater uniformity of concrete mix, the Engineer

may require that the coarse aggregate be separated into two or more
sizes. Different sizes of aggregates shall be stored in separate bins or
in separate stock piles sufficiently remote from each other to prevent
the material at the edges of the piles from becoming intermixed.

4.1.10 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

4.1.10.1 Handling and Placing Concrete: General

Concrete shall not be placed until forms and reinforcing steel have
been checked and approved by the Engineer.

In preparation for the placing of concrete all sawdust, ships and other
construction debris and extraneous matter shall be remove from inside
the formwork, struts, stays and braces, serving temporarily to hold the
forms in correct shape and alignment, pending the placing of concrete
at their locations, shall be removed when the concrete placing has
reached an elevation rendering their service unnecessary. These

177
temporary members shall be entirely removed from the forms and not
buried in the concrete.

No concrete shall be used which does not reach its final position in the
forms within the time stipulated under “Time of Hauling and Placing
Mixed Concrete”.

Concrete shall be placed so as to avoid segregation of the

materials and the displacement of the reinforcement. The use of long
troughs, chutes, and pipes for conveying concrete to the forms shall be
permitted only on written authorization of the Engineer. The Engineer
shall reject the use of the equipment for concrete transportation that
will allow segregation, loss of fine materials, or in any other way will
have a deteriorating effect on the concrete quality.

Open troughs and chutes shall be of metal or metal lined; where steep
slopes are required, the chutes shall be equipped with baffles or be in
short lengths that reverse the direction of movement to avoid
segregation.

All chutes, troughs and pipes shall be kept clean and free from coatings
of hardened concrete by thoroughly flushing with water after each run.
Water used for flushing shall be discharged clear of the structure.

When placing operations would involve dropping the concrete more

than 1.5m, concrete shall be conveyed through sheet metal or approved
pipes. As far as practicable, the pipes shall be kept full of concrete
during placing and their lower and shall be kept buried in the newly
placed concrete. After initial set of the concrete, the forms shall not be
jarred and no strain shall be placed on the ends of projecting
reinforcement bars.

The concrete shall be placed as nearly as possible to its final position

and the use of vibrators for moving of the mass of fresh concrete shall
not be permitted.

4.1.10.1.1 Placing Concrete by Pneumatic Means

Pneumatic placing of concrete will be permitted only if

specified or authorized by the Engineer. The equipment shall
be so arranged that vibration will not damage freshly placed
concrete.

Where concrete is conveyed and placed by pneumatic means.

The equipment shall be suitable in kind and adequate in
capacity for the work. The machine shall be located as close as
practicable to the work. The discharge lines shall be horizontal
or inclined upwards from the machines. The discharge end of
the line shall not be more than 3 m from the point of deposit.

178
 At the conclusion of placing the concrete, the entire equipment
shall be thoroughly cleaned.

4.1.10.1.2 Placing of Concrete by Pumping

The placing of concrete by pumping will be permitted only if

specified or if authorized by the Engineer. The equipment shall
be so arranged that vibration will not damage freshly placed
concrete.

Where concrete is conveyed and placed by mechanically

applied pressure the equipment shall be suitable in kind and
adequate in capacity for the work. The operation of the pump
shall be such that a continuous stream of concrete without air
pockets it produced. When pumping is completed. The
concrete remaining in the pipeline. If it is to be used, shall be
ejected in such a manner that there will be no contamination of
the concrete or separation of the ingredients. After this
operation, the entire equipments shall be thoroughly cleaned.

4.1.10.1.3 Placing Concrete in Water

Concrete shall not be placed in water except with approval of

the Engineer and under his immediate supervision. In this case
the method of placing shall be hereinafter specified.

Concrete deposited in water shall be Class B concrete with a

minimum cement content of 400 kg/m3of concrete. The slump
of the concrete shall be maintained between 10 and 20 cm. To
prevent segregation, concrete shall be carefully placed in a
compact mass, in its final position , by means of a tremie, a
bottom-dump bucket, or other approved means, and shall not be
disturbed after being placed.

A tremie shall consist of a tube having a diameter of not less

than 250 mm constructed in sections having flanged couplings
fitted with gaskets with a hopper at the top. The tremie shall be
supported so as to permit free movement of the discharge and
over the entire top surface of the work and so as to permit rapid
lowering when necessary to retard or stop the flow of concrete.
The discharge end shall be closed at the start of work so as to
prevent water entering at al times; the tremie tube shall be kept
full to the bottom of the hopper. When a batch is dumped into
the hopper, the flow of concrete shall be induced by lightly
raising the discharge end, but always keeping it in the placed
concrete. The flow shall be continuous until the work is
completed.

When the concrete is placed with a bottom-dump bucket, the

top of the bucket shall be open. The bottom doors shall open
freely downward and outward when tripped. The buckets shall

179
 be completely filled and slowly lowered to avoid backwash. It
shall not be dumped until it rests on the surface upon which the
concrete is to be deposited and when discharged shall be
withdrawn slowly until well above the concrete.

4.1.10.2 Compaction of Concrete

Concrete during and immediately after placing shall be thoroughly

compacted. The concrete in walls, beams, columns and the like shall
be placed in horizontal layers not more than 30 cm thick except as
hereinafter provided. When less than a complete layer is placed in
one operation, it shall be terminated in a vertical bulkhead. Each layer
shall be placed and compacted before the preceding layer has taken
initial set to prevent injury to the green concrete and avoid surfaces of
separation so as to avoid the formation of a construction joint with a
preceding layer.

The compaction shall be done by mechanical vibration. The concrete

shall be vibrated internally unless special authorization of other
methods is given by the Engineer or is provided herein. Vibrators shall
be of a type, design, and frequency approved by the Engineer. The
intensity of vibration shall be such as to visibly affect a mass of
concrete with a 3 cm slump over a radius of at least 50 cm. A
sufficient number of vibrators shall be provided to properly compact
each batch immediately after it is placed in the forms. Vibrators shall
be manipulated so as to thoroughly work the concrete around the
reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into the corners and angles
of the forms and shall be applied at the point of placing and in the area
of freshly placed concrete. The vibrators shall be inserted into and
withdrawn from the concrete slowly. The vibration shall be of
sufficient duration and intensity to compact the concrete thoroughly
but shall not be continued so as to cause segregation and at any one
point to the extent that localized areas of grout are formed.

Application of vibrators shall be at points uniformly spaced, and not

farther apart than twice the radius over which the vibration is visibly
effective. Vibration shall not be applied directly or thru the
reinforcement to sections or layers of concrete that have hardened to
the degree that the concrete ceases to be plastic under vibration. It
shall not be used to make concrete flow in the forms over distances so
great as to cause segregation, and vibrators shall not be used to
transport concrete in the forms of troughs or chutes.

4.1.10.3 Casting Sections and Construction Joints

The concrete in each form shall be placed continuously. Placing of

concrete on any such form shall not be allowed to commence unless
sufficiently inspected and approved materials for the concrete is at
hand, and labor and equipment are sufficient to complete the pour
without interruption.

180
 Joints in the concrete due to stopping work shall be avoided as much as
possible. Such joints, when necessary, shall be constructed to meet the
approval of the Engineer.

When the placing of concrete is temporarily discontinued, the concrete,

after becoming firm enough to retain its shape, shall be cleaned of
laitance and other objectionable material to a sufficient depth to expose
sound concrete. Where a “faster edge” might be produced at a
construction joint, as in the sloped top surface of a wingwall, an inset
formwork shall be used to produce an edge thickness of not less than
15 cm in the succeeding layer. Work shall not be discontinued within
50 cm of the top of any face, unless provision has been made for a
coping less than 50 cm thick, in which case if permitted by the
Engineer, the construction joint may be made at the underside of
coping.

Immediately following the discontinuance of placing concrete, all

accumulations of mortar splashed upon the reinforcing steel and the
surfaces of forms shall be removed. Dried mortar chips and dust shall
not be puddle into the unset concrete. Care shall be exercised, during
the cleaning of the reinforcing steel, not to injure or break the concrete-
steel bond at and near the surface of the concrete.

4.1.10.4 Casting Box Culverts

In general, the base slab of box culverts shall be placed exercised in

order to secure bonding in the construction joint and appropriate keys
shall be left in the sidewalls for anchoring the top slab. Each wingwall
shall be constructed, if possible, as a monolith. Construction joints
where unavoidable, shall be horizontal and so located that no joints
will be visible in the exposed face of the wingwall above the ground
line.

Vertical construction joints shall be at right angles to the axis of the

culverts.

4.1.10.5 Casting Columns, Slabs and Girders

Concrete in columns shall be placed in one continuous operation,

unless otherwise directed. The concrete shall be allowed to set for at
least 20 hours before the caps are placed.

Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, no concrete shall be

placed in the superstructure until the column forms have been stripped
sufficiently to determine the condition of the concrete in the column.
The load of the superstructure shall not be allowed to come upon the
bents until they have been in place at least 14 days, unless otherwise
permitted by the Engineer.

Concrete in slab spans shall be placed in one continuous operation for

each span unless otherwise provided.

181
 Concrete in T-beam or deck girder spans shall be placed in one
continuous operation unless otherwise directed. If it is permitted to
place the concrete in two separate operations, each of the operations,
shall be continuous: first, to the top of the girder stems, and second, to
completion. In the latter case, the bond between stem and slab shall be
secured by means of suitable shear keys which may be formed by the
use of timber blocks approximately 50 mm x 100 mm in cross-section
having a length of 100 mm less than the width of the girder stem.
These key blocks shall be placed along the girder stems as required,
but the spacing shall not be greater than 300 mm center to center. The
blocks shall be beveled and oiled in such a manner as to insure their
ready removal, and they shall be removed as soon as the concrete has
set sufficiently to retain its shape. If the Contractor wishes to place the
concrete in two separate operations, he shall, with his request for
permission to do so, submit plans and proposals shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.

In box girders, the concrete in the bottom slab shall be poured first, as
a separate operation.

The concrete in the webs and the top slab shall be placed in one
continuous operation unless otherwise specified. If it is permitted to
place the concrete in more than one operation, the requirements for T-
beam shall apply.

4.1.10.6 Construction Joints

Construction joints shall be made only where shown on the Drawings

or called for in the pouring schedule, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer. Shear keys or reinforcement shall be used, unless otherwise
specified, to transmit shear or to bond the two sections together.

Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete which has

hardened, the forms shall be retightened. The surface of the hardened
concrete shall be roughened as required by the Engineer, in a manner
that will not leave loose particles of aggregate or damage concrete at
the surface. It shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter and
laitance. When directed by the Engineer the surface of the hardened
concrete which will be in contact with new concrete shall be washed
with water to this satisfaction, and to insure an excess of mortar at the
juncture of the hardened and the newly deposited concrete, the cleaned
and saturated surfaces, including vertical and inclined surfaces shall
first be thoroughly covered with a coating of mortar of the same
proportion of sand and cement as the class of concrete used against
which the new concrete shall be placed before the grout or mortar has
attained its initial set.

The placing of concrete shall be carried conti nuously from joint

to joint. The face edges of all joints which are exposed to view shall
be carefully finished true to line and elevation.

182
4.1.10.7 Concrete Surface Finishing

Surface finishing shall be classified as follows:

Class 1. Ordinary Finish

Class 2. Rubbed Finish

Class 3. Floated Finish

All concrete shall be given Class 1, Ordinary Finish and additionally

any further finish as specified.

Unless otherwise, specified, the following surfaces shall be given a

Class 2, Rubbed Finish.

1. The exposed faces of piers, abutments, wingwalls, and

retaining walls.

2. The outside faces of girders, T-beams, slabs, columns, brackets,

headwalls and parapets.

Excluded, however, are the tops and bottoms of floor slabs, and
sidewalks, bottoms of beams and girders, sides of interior beams and
girders, backwalls above bridge seats or the underside of the copings.
The surface exposed surfaces below the bridge seats to 20 cm below
low water elevation or 50 cm below finished ground level when such
ground level is above the water surface. Wingwalls shall be finished
from the top to 50 cm below the finished slope lines on the outside face
and shall be finished on top and for a depth of 20 cm below the top on
the back sides.

Unless otherwise specified, the surface of the traveled way shall be

Class 3, Floated Finish.

Class 1, Concrete Ordinary Finish

Immediately following the removal of forms, all fins and irregular

projections shall be removed from all surface except from those which
are not to be exposed or are not to be waterproofed. On all surfaces the
cavities produced by form ties and all other holes, honeycomb spots,
broken corners or edges and other defects shall be thoroughly cleaned,
and after having been kept saturated with water for a period of not less
than three hours shall be carefully pointed and made true with a mortar
of cement and fine aggregate mixed in the proportions used in the
grade of the concrete being finished. Mortar used in pointing shall not
be more than one old. The mortar patches shall be cured as specified
under Subsection 4.1.10.8. All construction and expansion joints in the
completed work shall be left carefully tooled and free of all mortar and
concrete. The joint filler shall be left exposed for its full length with a
clean and true edges.

183
The resulting surface shall be true and uniform. All repaired surfaces,
the appearance of which is not satisfactory to the Engineer, shall be
“rubbed” as specified below.

Class 2, Concrete Rubbed Finish

After removal of forms, the rubbing of concrete shall be started as soon

as its condition will permit. Immediately before starting this work, the
concrete shall be kept thoroughly saturated with water for a minimum
period of three hours. Sufficient time shall have elapsed before the
wetting down to allow the mortar used in the pointing of road holes
and defects to thoroughly set. Surfaces to be finished shall be rubbed
with a minimum coarse carborumdum stone using a small amount of
mortar on each face. The mortar shall be composed of cement and fine
sand mixed in the proportions used in the concrete being finished.
Rubbing shall be continued until all form marks, projections and
irregularities have been removed, all voids have been filled, and a
uniform surface has been obtained. The face produced by this rubbing
shall be left in place at this time.

After all concrete above the surface being created has been cast, the
final finish shall be obtained by rubbing with a fine carborundum stone
and water. This rubbing shall be continued until the entire surface is of
smooth texture and uniform color.

After the final rubbing is completed and the surface has dried, it should
be rubbed with burlap to remove loose powder and shallbe left free
from all unsound patches, paste, powder and objectionable marks.

Class 3, Concrete Floated Finish

After the concrete is compacted as specified in Subsection 4.1.10.2

Compaction of Concrete, the surface shall be carefully struck off with
a strike board to conform to the cross-section and grade shown on the
Drawings. Proper allowance shall be made for camber if required.
The strike board may be operated longitudinally or transversely and
shall be moved forward with a combined longitudinal and transverse
motion, the manipulation being such that neither is raised from the side
forms during the process. A slight excess of concrete shall be kept
infront of the cutting edge at all times.

After striking off and consolidating as specified above, the surface

shall be made uniform by longitudinal or transverse floating or both.
Longitudinal floating will be required except in place where this
method is not feasible.

The longitudinal float, operated from foot bridges, shall be worked

with a sawing motion while held in a floating position parallel to the
road centerline and passing gradually from one side of the pavement to
the other. The float shall then be moved forward one-half of each
length and the above operation repeated. Machine floating which

184
 produced equivalent result may be substituted for the above manual
method.

The transverse float shall be operated across the pavement by starting

at the edge and slowly moving to the center and back again to the edge.
The float shall then be moved forward one-half of each length and the
above operation repeated. Care shall be taken to preserve the crown
and cross-section of the pavement.

After the longitudinal floating has been completed and the excess
water removed, but while the concrete is still plastic, the slab surface
shall be tested for trueness with a straight-edge. For this purpose, the
Contractor shall furnish and use an accurate 3m straight-edge swung
handless 1m longer than one-half the width of the slab.

The straight-edge shall be held in successive positions parallel to the

road centerline and in contact with the surface and the whole area gone
over from one side of the slab to the other as necessary. Advancement
along the deck shall be in successive stages of not more than one-half
the length of the straight edge. Any depression found shall be
immediately filled with freshly mixed concrete, struck off,
consolidated and refinished. The straight-edge testing and refloating
shall continue until the entire surface is found to be free from
observable departure from the straight-edge and the slabs has the
required grade and contour, until there are no deviations of more than
3mm under the 3m straight-edge.

When the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the surface shall be given
a broom finish. The broom shall be an approved type. The strokes
shall be square across the slabs from edge to edge, with adjacent
strokes slightly overlapped, and shall be made by drawing the broom
without tearing the concrete, but so as to produce regular corrugations
not over 3 mm in depth. The surface as thus finished shall be free from
porous spots, irregularities, depressions and small pockets or rough
spots such as may be caused by accidental disturbing, during the final
brooming of particles of coarse aggregate embedded near the surface.

4.1.10.8 Curing Concrete

All newly placed concrete shall be cured in accordance with this

Specification, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The curing
method shall be one or more of the following:

1. Water Method

The concrete shall be kept continuously wet by the application

of water for a minimum period of 7 days after the concrete has been
placed.

The entire surface of the concrete shall be kept dump by applying

water with an atomizing nozzle. Cotton mats, rugs, carpets, or earth or

185
sand blankets may be used to retain the moisture. At the expiration of
the curing period the concrete surface shall be cleared of the curing
medium.

2. Curing compound

Surfaces exposed to the air may be cured by the application of an

impervious membrane if approved by the Engineer.

The membrane forming compound used shall be practically colorless

liquid. The use of any membrane-forming compound that will alter the
natural color of the concrete or impart a slippery surface to any
wearing surface shall be prohibited. The compound shall be applied
with a pressure spray in such a manner as to cover the entire concrete
surface with a minimum film and shall be of such character that it will
harden within 30 minutes after application. The amount of compound
applied shall be ample to seal the surface of the concrete thoroughly.
Power-operated spraying equipment shall be equipped with an
operational pressure gauge and means of controlling the pressure.

The curing compound shall be applied to the concrete following the

surface finishing operation immediately after the moisture sheen
begins to disappear from the surface, but before any drying shrinkage
or craze cracks begin to appear. In the event of any delay, in the
application of the curing compound, which results in any drying or
cracking of the surface, application of water with an atomizing nozzle
as specified under “Water Method”, shall be started immediately and
shall be continued, until the application of the compound is resumed or
started, however, the compound shall not be applied over any resulting
free standing water. Should the film of compound be damaged from
any cause before the expiration of 7 days after the concrete is placed in
the case of structures, the damaged portion shall be repaired
immediately with additional compound.

Curing compound shall not be diluted or altered in any manner after

manufacture. At the time of use, the compound shall be in a
thoroughly mixed condition. If the compound has not been used
within 120 days after the date of manufacture, the Engineer may
require additional testing before the use to determine compliance to
requirements.

An anti-setting agent or a combination of anti-setting agents shall be

incorporated in the curing compound to prevent caking.

The curing compound shall be packaged in clean barrels or steel

containers or shall be supplied from a suitable storage tank located on
the Site. Storage tanks shall have a permanent system designed to
completely redisperse any settled material without introducing air or
any other foreign substance. Containers shall be well-sealed with ring
seals and lug type crimp lids. The linings of the containers shall be of
a character that will resist the solvent of the curing compound. Each

186
container shall be labeled with a manufacturer‟s name, specification
number, batch number, capacity and date of manufacture, and shall
have label warning concerning flammability. The label shall also warn
that the curing compound shall be well-stirred before use. When the
curing compound is shipped in tanks or tank trunks, a shipping invoice
shall accompany each load. The invoice shall contain the same
information as that required herein for container labels.

Curing compound may be sampled by the Engineer at the source of

supply and on the Site.

3. Waterproof Membrane Method

The exposed finished surfaces of concrete shall be sprayed with water,

using a nozzle that so atomizes the flow that a mist and not a spray is
formed until the concrete has set, after which a curing membrane of
waterproof paper or plastic sheeting shall be placed. The curing
membrane shall remain in place for a period of not less than 72 hours.

Waterproof paper and plastic sheeting shall conform to the

specification of AASHTO M 171.

The waterproof paper or plastic sheeting shall be formed into sheets of

such width as to cover completely the entire concrete surface.

All joints in the sheets shall be securely cemented together in such a

manner as to provide a waterproof joint. The joint seams shall have a
minimum lap of 100 mm.

The sheets shall be securely weighed down by placing a bank of earth

on the edges of the sheets or by other means satisfactory to the
Engineer.

Should any portion of the sheets be broken or damaged within 72 hours

after being placed, the broken or damaged portions shall be
immediately repaired with new sheets properly cemented into place.

Sections of membrane which have lost their waterproof qualities or

have been damaged to such an extent as to render them unfit for
curing, the concrete shall not be used.

4. Forms-in-Place Method

Formed surfaces of concrete may be cured by retaining the form-in-

place. The forms shall remain place for a minimum period of 7 days
after the concrete has been placed, except that for members over 50 cm
in least dimensions, the forms shall remain in place for a minimum
period of 5 days. Wooden forms shall be kept wet by watering during
the curing period.

5. Curing Cast-in-Situ Concrete

187
All newly placed concrete for cast-in-situ structures, other than
highway bridge deck, shall be cured by the water method, the forms-
in-place method, or as permitted herein, by the curing compound
method, all in accordance with the requirements of Subsection 4.1.10.8
Curing Concrete.

The curing compound method may be used on concrete surfaces which

are to be buried under ground and surfaces where only Ordinary
Surface Finish is to be applied and which a uniform color is not
required and which will not be visible from public view.

The top surface of highway bridge decks shall be cured by either the
curing compound method or the water method. The curing compound
method or the water method. The curing compound shall be applied
progressively during the deck finishing operations. The water cure
shall be applied not later than 4 hours after completion of the deck
finishing.

When deemed necessary by the Engineer during periods of hot

weather, water shall be applied to concrete surface being cured by the
curing compound method or by the forms in-place method until the
Engineer determine that a cooling effect is no longer required.

6. Curing Pre-Cast Concrete (except piles)

Pre-cast concrete members shall be cured for not less than 7 days by
the water method or by steam curing. Steam curing for pre-cast
members shall conform to the following provisions:

a. After placement of the concrete, members shall be held for a

minimum 4-hour pre-steaming period.

b. To prevent moisture loss on exposed surfaces during the pre-

steaming period, members shall be covered immediately after casing or
the exposed surface shall be kept wet by fog spray or wet blankets.

c. Enclosures for steam curing shall allow free circulation of

steam about the member and shall be constructed to contain the live
steam with a minimum moisture loss. The use of tarpaulins or similar
flexible covers will be permitted, provided they are kept in good
condition and secured in such a manner to prevent the loss of steam
and moisture.

d. Steam at jets shall be low pressure and in a saturated condition.

Steam jets shall not impinge directly on the concrete, test cylinders, or
forms. During application of the steam, the temperature rise within the
enclosure shall not exceed 20 deg. C per hour. The curing temperature
throughout the enclosure shall not exceed 65 deg. C and shall be
maintained at a constant level for a sufficient time necessary to
develop the required compressive strength. Control cylinders shall be
covered to prevent moisture loss and shall be placed in a location

188
 where temperature of the enclosure will be the same as that of the
concrete.

e. Temperature recording devices that will provide an accurate

continuous permanent record of the curing temperature shall be
provided. A minimum of one temperature recording device per 50 m
of continuous bed length will be required for checking temperature.

f. Curing of pre-cast concrete for pre-cast concrete will be

considered completed after the termination of the steam curing cycle.

7. Curing Pre-Cast Concrete Piles

All newly placed concrete for pre-cast concrete piles,

conventionally reinforced or prestressed shall be cured by the “Water
Method” as described in Subsection 4.1.10.8 Curing Concrete, except
that the concrete shall be kept under moisture for at least 14 days. At
the option of the Contractor, steam curing may be used in which case
the steam curing provisions of Subsection 4.1.10.8 (6) Curing Pre-Cast
Concrete (except piles) shall apply except that the concrete shall be
kept wet for at least 7 days including the holding and steaming period.

4.1.11 PRECAST PRESTRESSED POST-TENSIONED STRUCTURAL

CONCRETE GIRDER

4.1.11.1 Scope

This work shall consist of furnishing, placing and finishing Precast

Prestressed, Post-Tensioned girder conforming to the line, grades and
dimension shown on the drawing.

4.1.11.2 Materials

(1) Postland Cement shall conform to the requirement of ASTM

C150 and or ASTM 595 or specified in section 4.1.3.1.1 of this
specification.

(2) Admixture shall conform to the requirement of this

specification, section 4.1.3.2.

(3) Aggregate shall conform to the requirement of this

specification as per section 4.1.3.3.

(4) Reinforcement:

a) Reinforcing bars shall conform to the requirement of ASTM

A615/A615 M.

b) Prestressing strands shall conform to the requirement of seven

wire stressed relieved ASTMA416/A416 M for low relaxation wire.

(5) Water shall be clean, fresh and potable.

189
4.1.11.3 Design Requirement:

(1) Concrete mix shall be class P with minimum compressive

strength at

28 days of 5000 psi.

For normal prestressing a release strength of 23 mpa, 3500psi shall (2)

be used unless the design requires a higher release strength.
Some release strengths are indicated in the PCI design handbook for
selected prestressed members based on different load conditions,
strand patterns, and span lengths. Do not transfer prestressing forces
during de-tensioning until concrete has reach a minimum compressive
strength of 24mpa 3500psi, unless a higher strength is required by the
Engineer.

(3) Loads

Loading for members and connections shall include all dead load, live
load, applicable lateral loads such as wind and earthquake, applicable
construction loads such as handling, erection loads, and other
applicable loads.

(4) Design Calculations

Design calculations for members and connections not shown in the

contract drawings shall be made by a registered professional engineer
experienced in the precast-prestressed concrete.

4.1.11.4 Performance Requirement

Perform the following testing to ensure the materials and method used
meet the requirements and will produce precast-prestressed concrete
members which are suitable for their intended use.

(1) High-Strength Steel Tendons

a. Testing shall be as specified for the STEEL STRESSING

TENDONS AND ACCESSORIES FOR PRESTRESSED
CONCRETE.

b. Anchorages for postensioning tendons will not interfere with

the placement of the member such that adequate compaction of the
concrete in the anchorage zone is impeded.

(2) Concrete

Concrete shall be sampled and cylinders made in accordance

with ASTM C 172 and ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Concrete Test Cylinders. A minimum of two concrete test

cylinders per bed shall be made to verify the strength of concrete at the

190
 time of stress transfer and a minimum of two test cylinders, shall be
made for each mix design to verify the attainment of the specified
strength.

b. Cylinder Making. Cylinders shall be made as near as possible

to the location where they will be cured and shall not be disturbed in
any way from 1/2 hour after casting until they are either 24 hours old
or ready to be tested. Concrete in cylinders may be consolidated by
rodding or by vibration as specified in ATSM C 31/C 31M.

c. Cylinder Curing

(1) Test cylinders shall be cured with similar methods as the

members they represent. In lieu of actual curing with the members,
cylinders may be cured in curing chambers correlated shall be
constantly verified by use of recording thermometers in the curing
chambers and comparison with the temperature records of beds and by
use of the same methods of moisture retention for curing chambers and
casting bads.

(2) For beds cured by steam or radiant heat, cylinders shall be

place at random points along the bed. If there is any indication of
variable heat, cylinders shall be placed in the coolest area.

(3) Test cylinders to indicate compliance with specified 28-day or

earlier strength shall remain in the bed with the member until the
member is removed. At that time, the cylinders shall be removed from
their molds and place in storage in a moist condition at 23 degrees plus
or minus 1.5 degrees C.

d. Testing of Cylinders

(1) Testing of cylinders to determine compressive strength shall be

performed in accordance with ASTM C 39. The strength of concrete at
any given age shall be determined as the average of two cylinders,
except a single cylinder test can be used to determine stress transfer
strength or predictive strengths at less than 28 days.

(2) Testing machines shall be calibrated in accordance with ASTM

C 39.

(3) Air Content

The air content tests shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM C

231. At least one air content test shall be conducted on the concrete
from which each member is cast.

4.1.11.5 Execution

(1) Inspection

191
 Comply with requirements of ACI 301, Section 9 – Prestressed
Concrete.

(2) Preparation

Comply with requirements of ACI 301, Section 9 – Prestressed

Concrete, as follows:

2.1 Grouting; and

2.2 Tendons and concrete.

(3) Placement

Comply with requirements of ACI 301, Section 9 – Prestressed

Concrete, as follows:

3.1 Tendons and accessories; and

3.2 Grout

(4) Tensioning and other operations involving tendons

Comply with requirements of ACI 301, Section 9 – Prestressed

Concrete, as follows:

4.1 Sequence;
4.2 Tensioning multiple;
4.3 Prestressing force;
4.4 Prestress loss;
4.5 Formwork;
4.6 Prevention of damage to tendons, and
4.7 Trimming of tendons.

4.1.12 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.1.12.1 Measurement

Concrete shall be measured by the cubic meters of various kind and

classes of respective items of work required as shown in the Drawings
or as specified and as installed and accepted in completed work.

a) Reinforcing steel and anchor bolts.

b) Space required for or occupied by expansion/construction

joints, joint fillers, waterstops, chambers and like detail of relatively
small size.

Setting out of the work to be paid for shall not be measured separately,
the cost shall be deemed as part of and incidentals to the foundation
works.

Formworks/Falseworks shall not be measured separately for payment.

The cost is deemed as part and incidentals to the concrete works.

192
4.1.12.2 Payment

The quantities measured as provided above, shall be paid for at the

contract price according to the class of concrete for the pay item shown
in the Bill of Quantities. The unit price shall be considered to
construction and expansion joints, vapor barrier and sealant, form oil
coating, necessary accesses for pipes, conduits, sewer drains and the
like and work required for placing concrete in the final position
including material, batching, mixing. Transporting, handling, placing,
compacting, curing, protection and finishing of concrete surfaces.

The quantity of reinforcing steel bars to be paid for shall be measured

by the weight of reinforcing steel bars fabricated and installed
completely and certified by the Engineer for payment. The cost shall
constitute full compensation for furnishing materials, labor, equipment,
tools, and incidentals necessary to complete reinforcing steelworks as
indicated in the Bill of Quantities.

193
4.2 PREFORMED JOINT FILLER AND JOINT SEALING FILLER

4.2.1 SCOPE

This work shall consist of furnishing and application of a resilient joint filler
and joint sealing material in connection with the construction of bridges in
accordance with these specifications and drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.

4.2.2 MATERIAL

Poured filler for joint shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M

173(ASTM D 1190). Preformed fillers for joints shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M 153(ASTM D 1752), AASHTO M 220.

4.2.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

Preparation of Joints. Immediately before sealing, the joints shall be

thoroughly cleaned of all laitance, curing compound, and other foreign
material. Cleaning shall be accomplished by sandblasting, wire brushing, or
high pressure water blast. Upon completion of cleaning, the joints shall be
blown out with compressed air. The joint faces shall be dry when the seal is
applied.

Prior to resealing of joints, the existing joint material shall be removed to the
depth shown on the drawings. If joint sealer other than that originally used is
specified, all existing joint sealer shall be removed.

4.2.4

Installation of Sealants. Joints shall be inspected for proper width, depth,

alignment, and preparation, and shall be approved by the Engineer before
sealing is allowed. Sealants shall be installed in accordance with the
following requirements:

Hot Poured Sealants. The joint sealant shall be applied uniformly solid from
bottom to top and shall be filled without formation of entrapped air or voids.
A backing material shall be placed which shall be non-adhesive to the concrete
or the sealant material. The sealant shall not be heated to more than 11 deg. C
below the safe heating temperature. The safe heating temperature can be
obtained from the manufacturer‟s shipping container. A direct connecting
pressure type extruding device with nozzles shaped for insertion into the joint
shall be provided. Any sealant spilled on the surface of the concrete shall be
removed immediately.

Preformed Joint Fillers. Preformed joint filler shall be placed using equipment
capable of installing the filler in the upright position, without cutting, nicking,
distorting, or otherwise damaging the seal. Lubricant shall be applied to the
concrete or the preformed filler, or both, and the seal shall be installed in a
substantially compressed condition and at the depth below the surface of the
concrete. The joint filler shall be installed in the longest practicable length in

194
 longitudinal joints and shall be cut at the joint intersections for continuous
installation in the transverse joint.

4.2.5 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.2.5.1 Method of Measurement

The joint sealing material shall be measured by the number of liter of

sealer, and square meter of filler material installed in place and
accepted.

4.2.5.2 Basis of Payment

Payment for the joint sealing material shall be made at the contract unit
price per liter and square meter as shown in the Bill of Quantities. The
payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, and for
all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the
work.

195
 PART 5
TRACKWORKS

5.1 SCOPE

This work shall consist of the following:

(a)Double tracking from Sucat to Alabang

5.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

5.2.1 SECTION BETWEEN SUCAT AND ALABANG

a. Clearing and grubbing, removal and disposal of trees, stumps, brush,

roots, vegetation, rubbish, etc; and other objectionable matter as directed by
the Engineer.

b. Preparation of subbase with selected borrow to include rolling up to

required degree of compaction.

c. Spreading of sub-ballast along weak or submerged sections.

d. Track laying using new 37 kg ASCE rails with new fishplates or angle
bars, trackbolts, prestressed concrete sleepers, rail fastenings and ballasting
with crushed rocks on prepared sub-base/sub-ballast.

e. Welding of rails into 60 meter panel.

f. Installation of new turnout 4 sets of No. 10for new 37 kg rails for the
station yard (300meters third track each at Sucat and Alabang complete with
accessories and wood sleepers.

g. Tamping, aligning leveling and stabilizing of tracks to the required

elevation with the use of a track tamping machine.

5.3 TRACK MATERIALS REQUIRED

5.3.1 RAILS

a. Supply of Rails

The Contractor shall supply new 37 kg rails. The Contractor shall also use re-
conditioned 37 kg ASCE rail as directed by the Engineer.

b. Inspection of rails to be reconditioned.

The Contractor shall thoroughly inspect the existing rails, and those rails
having the following defects shall not be reconditioned.

(1) Breaks, cracks and wear more than 11mm at the top of rail

(2) Shortage in cross section of more than 20%.

196
 (3) Excessive corrosion.

(4) Bends or wear at the ends, and excessive deflection or distortion.

(5) Length of less than 5m. In case of welding, 3.0m rails can be used.

c. The Contractor shall weld the rails in situ into a 60 m panel using the
Thermit Welding or gas pressure and flash but welding process.

d. For specifications for rails, see DRAWINGS.

5.3.2 JOINT BARS (ANGLE BARS/FISHPLATES)

a. Supply of Joint Bars

Joint bars for 37kg ASCE and for 40 Kg N rails shall be supplied by the
Contractor. Compromise angle bars for 37kg ASCE rails and 32kg ASCE rails
shall also be supplied by the Contractor.

b. The materials for compromise angle bars for 37kg ASCE and 32kg
ASCE rails shall be manufactured from rolled steel or cutting in accordance
with the requirements of JIS E-1102 (Carbon Steel for Machine Structural
Use) S45C or equivalent standards (Refer to the attached drawing).

c. For specification for joint bars, see “Part 7 Track Materials”

5.3.3 TRACK BOLTS

a. Trackbolts for 40N rails or 37kg rails shall be supplied by the

Contractor.

b. For specification for track bolts, see “Part 7 Track Materials”.

5.3.4 SPRING WASHERS

a. Spring washers shall be supplied by the Contractor.

b. For specifications for spring washers, see “Part 7 Track Materials”

5.3.5 TRACK SPIKES (SQUARE)/SCREW SPIKES

a. Trackspikes and screw spikes shall be supplied by the Contractor.

b. For specification for trackspikes, see “Part 7 Track Materials”.

5.3.6 PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE SLEEPERS & RAIL FASTENERS

Rail clips shall be used for new pre-stressed concrete sleepers as shown in the
drawings. It shall conform to standards acceptable PNR and shall include all
parts and fittings for the various types of sleepers as shown in the drawings
and as instructed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit technical data
from the manufacturer for the Engineer‟s approval.

197
A. CONCRETE SLEEPERS

1. SCOPE

This specification covers all the requirements for the size, shape
and quality for the supply of Prestressed Concrete Sleepers including
Complete Sets of Rail Fastening Components.

1.1

Concrete sleeper shall be prestressed monoblock concrete

sleepers suitable for used with 37 kg/m rails. The concrete
sleepers shall be of a standard acceptable to PNR,
manufactured at local factories approved by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall test the quality of the concrete sleepers and
submit test result as indicated by the Engineer for approval.

The dimensions of concrete sleepers are as follows.

Length Width Thickness

Concrete Sleepers 200 cm 22.5 cm As per drawing

1.2

The rail fastening system shall be the e type 2000 or the latest
equivalent with anti-vandal mechanism to thwart the
unauthorized removal of the clips. The Supplier shall provide
PNR with the drawings of the rail fastening components
indicating the detailed measurements.

1.3 Spacing of Concrete Sleepers

The spacing of concrete sleepers shall be 0.714 meters on

center.

2.

2.1 PERFORMANCE

When tested in accordance with Section 9.2, the sleepers shall

have neither cracks nor other deformations.

2.2

When tested in accordance with Section 9.2 sleeper shall be not

less than those shown in Table 1.

Table 1

Section of Rail Seat : Section of Center

198
 Lower Flange : Upper Flange
13.0 ton : 11.5 ton
Span : 700 mm

2.3 Shapes and Dimensions

When tested in accordance with Section 9.2, shall have no

cracks or deformation with the pull – out load of 3 tons being
applied to the tie plug, and the pull out breaking load of the tie
plug shall not be less than 5 tons.

3. SHAPES AND DIMENSIONS

The shape and dimensions of the sleepers shall conform to the drawing
unless otherwise specified in this standard. However, dimensions
shown in the drawings shall be used as standard if the tolerance are not
specifically indicated.

4. QUALITY

4.1 Cement

Cement shall be Portland cement or high – early – strength

cement conforming to JIS R 5210 (Portland Cement) or
equivalent.

4.2 Aggregate

The maximum size of the coarse aggregate shall be 20mm, and

the use of sea sand will not be permitted.

4.3 Strength

The standard compressive for the design of concrete s hall

be 500 kg/cm2

5. STEEL MATERIAL FOR PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

Steel material for prestressed concrete shall be indented steel wire. The
steel wire for prestressed concrete shall conform to JIS G 3532
(Uncoated Stress – Relieved Steel Wire and Standard Wire for
Prestressed Concrete) or equivalent and this material shall be used after
being cold drawn, bluing in the final process for stress relieving. The
quality of the wire shall meet the requirements shown in Table 2. The
deformed steel standard wire for the prestressed concrete sleepers shall
be capable to provide sufficient bonding performance and fatigue
strength.

Table 2

Nominal Section Tensile Load for Elongation Relaxation

Size Area Load 0.2 % (%)

199
3 – 2.90 36.61 Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum
3,900 3,450 kg 3.5 3.5

6. STEEL WIRE

Plain wire for reinforcement shall be low Carbon Steel Wire

conforming to JIS G3532 (Low Carbon Steel Wires) or equivalent.

7. EMBEDDED STEEL MATERIALS

The plugs shall be suitably resistant to corrosion and be able to

withstand repeated loads within the railway track environment without
fatigue failure or excessive maintenance requirements, and conform to
JIS 02401 – 3 (Fastening Devices for Prestressed Concrete Sleepers).
To protect against corrosion, the ends of tendons shall not protrude
beyond the ends of the sleepers and shall have a minimum cover of 20
mm (3/4 in).

8. MANUFACTURING METHOD

8.1 Relative position between Form and Prestressing

Steel Wire.

The deviation in the relative position between the form and

prestressing steel wire shall be less than 2 mm.

8.2 Preliminary Stretching

Prestressing Steel Wire of Prestressed Concrete Sleepers.

8.3 Tensile Force of Steel Wire

The tensile force to be applied to the steel wire for Prestressed

concrete after fixing both ends shall be 3,090 + 50 kg for curing
I air, and 3,240 + 50 kg.

8.4 Accelerated High Temperature Curing

When performing accelerated high temperature curing, steam

with sufficient humidity content shall be used, and at least 3
hours shall elapsed from the mixing of concrete to the
application of heat. The rate temperature rise and lowering shall
be less than 15 degrees centigrade per hour. The maximum
temperature shall not exceed the temperature of steel plus 40
degree centigrade and in addition it shall be less than 60
degrees centigrade. However, in the case of accelerated high
temperature curing with equipment in which curing
temperature will not affect the tensile force of the steel wire,
the maximum temperature shall be 60 degrees centigrade.

200
 8.5

The compressive strength of concrete when prestressing is

allowed shall be not less than 400kg/cm2.

8.6 Treatment at Ends of Sleeper

Ends of strips of steel wire shall be cut – off to the same length
as the sleepers so as to prevent any projection of steel wire
beyond the ends of sleeper and shall be properly treated for
preventing corrosion.

9. TESTING

9.1 Compressive Strength Test for Concrete

The compressive strength test for concrete shall be conducted

in accordance with JIS A 1108 (Method of Test for
Compressive Strength of Concrete) or equivalent.

Specimens shall be Making Test Specimens for Concrete

Strength Tests. Cylindrical test pieces with 10 cm diameter x
20 cm shall be used, and concrete of test pieces shall be
compacted under the same conditions as those of sleepers.
Curing of test pieces shall be the standard curing of test pieces
with the design standard strength, and shall be conducted under
the test confirming the appropriate time of transfer.

9.2 Testing Sleepers

9.2.1 Test for Guaranteed Bending Strength of

Sleepers

Test for Guaranteed bending strength of sleepers shall

be conducted with the load shown in Table 3 below, in
accordance with the procedure shown in Figure1.

Table 3

Section of Rail Seat Section of Center

Lower Flange Upper Flange
7.9 ton 6.4 ton

9.2.2 Test for Flexural Strength of Sleepers

Test for flexural strength of sleepers shall be conducted

by the procedure shown in (i) and (ii) of figure 1.

201
 9.2.3 Test for Guaranteed Pullout Strength and
Test for Pullout Breaking Strength of cast
shoulder.

Test for guaranteed pullout strength and test for pullout

breaking strength of cast shoulder shall be conducted
with the tension load gradually applied to bolts in
conformity with the procedure shown in Figure 2.

10. INSPECTION

10.1 Frequency of Inspection for the Compressive

Strength of Concrete

The frequency of inspection for the compressive strength of

concrete shall conform to the following:

a. Inspection for conforming to the design standard

strength shall be conducted at least once in every four hours of
concrete mixing work if the mix proportion is not changed. But
in inspection must be reformed each time the mix proportion is
changed.

b. Inspection for confirming the compressive strength of

concrete to determine the appropriate time of transfer shall be
performed at least once for all sleepers in a lot which will be
prestressed at the same time. However, inspection is required
each time for the lot when the mix proportion is changed.

10.2 Acceptance

a. If the minimum compressive strength of 3 test pieces

meets the provisions in Section 9.2, the lot representative by
such test pieces shall be deemed to have successfully passed the
test.

Should sufficiently reliable test results be available

which indicate the relation between the compressive strength of
concrete at the ages of 28 days and 7 days, the compressive
strength at the age of 28 days may be received by conversion
from the compressive strength at the age of 7 days
predetermined by the test.

b. Guaranteed Flexural Strength of Sleepers and

Guaranteed Pullout Strength of cast shoulder.

Inspection for the guaranteed flexural strength of

sleepers and the guaranteed pullout strength of cast shoulder
shall be conducted for the group of sleepers as one lot which
was prestressed at the same time, and one specimen per lot
shall be subjected to the test in this inspection. If the specimen

202
 is found to be conforming to the test requirements for
guaranteed flexural strength and guaranteed pullout strength set
forth in Section 9.2, the specimen shall be deemed to have
successfully passed the test.

c. Flexural Strength of Sleepers and Pullout Breaking

Strength of cast shoulders.

Inspection of flexural strength of sleepers and pullout

breaking strength of cast shoulder shall be conducted at the rate
of one specimen per lot consisting of 1,000 sleepers arranged in
the order of manufacturing. If the specimen meets the test
provisions of flexural strength and pullout breaking strength set
forth in Section 9.2 then all sleepers represented by the
specimen shall be deemed to have successfully passed the test.

d. Marking

Each sleeper shall be marked by indented lettering stamped

below on its top surface near the end, and any marking other
than those listed below will not be allowed.

i. Name of Manufacturer or its symbol mark

ii. Year of production (last 2 digits)

iii. Symbol indicating the kind of sleeper.

e. Quality Control Requirements

Prestressed concrete sleepers shall meet the quality control

requirements for Concrete Sleepers specified in the AREA
Manual for Railway Engineering or equivalent Specifications
as approved by the Engineer.

B. RAIL FASTENING SYSTEM

1.0 GENERAL

1.1

The rail fastening system consisting of clips, shoulders,

insulators, and rail pads or equivalent shall have a minimum
diameter of 20mm with anti-vandal mechanism on the clips to
prevent its pilferage.

1.2

The anti-vandal rail fastening system shall have locking

features where only special tools can remove the clips, which
shall be provided by the Supplier to PNR for maintenance use.

203
 .

1.3

The supplier of the rail fastening system shall provide the

nominal positions of the cast iron settings in the concrete
sleeper and shall supply the rail fastening components.

1.4

Track gauge shall be nominal 1,067 mm +/- 2 mm measured at

14mm below the rail head with the rails inclined at 1 in 40 +/- 2
degrees.

1.5

The rail fastening system shall be designed to suit 37 kg ASCE

rail

1.6

The rail fastening system shall incorporate a 6 mm thick HIGH

density Polyethylene rail pad of proven performance similar
with the climate in the Philippines.

1.7

Toe load shall be minimum of 1,000 kgf +/- 10% when

measured in a clip driving fixtures. The clip deflection shall be
at least 11 mm at the nominal deflection.

1.8

The rail fastening system shall meet the current track

performance requirements of the European norm, EN 13481-2

1.9

The rail fastening components per sleeper sets shall consist of

the following:

1) 4 Nos type 2000 Anti-Vandal elastic rail clips.

2) 4 Nos Glass Reinforced Nylon Insulators

3) 4 Nos Spheroidal Graphite Iron shoulder inserts

4) 2 Nos HDPE Rail Pads 6mm thick.

1.10

The chemical and Mechanical Properties of the Rail fastening

components shall be within the following ranges:

204
 Spheroidal Graphite Iron Shoulder:
Carbon 3.1% – 4%
Silicon 1.8% – 3%
Phosphorus 0.05% maximum
Sulphides 0.02% maximum
Manganese 0.02% - 0.06%
Hardness 235 – 285 HB
Tensile Strength 650 – 850 mpa
Elongation 7% - 14.5%

Rail Clip:
Carbon 0.50% – 0.65%
Silicon 1.7% – 2.1%
Phosphorus 0.05% maximum
Sulphides 0.05% maximum
Manganese 0.70% - 1.0%
Hardness 44 – 48 HRC scale
Load Deflection 1250 kgf

Insulator:
Hardness ≥105 HRR
Shearing Test ≥4.5 kN
Resistivity ≥1 x 108 Ohms
Impact test 6 x without crack
Density Without air hole in section

Rail Pad:
Density ≥0.95gm per cu.m.
Hardness 45 – 70 SHORE D
Tensile Strength ≥ 25kN
Elongation at broken
point ≥180%
Melt flow index 5.2 – 2 dl/g
Volume resistivity ≥1x108 Ohms

1.11

The acronym of the Philippine National Railways (PNR) shall

be embossed on the surface of each rail fastening components
where appropriate.

1.12

The Supplier shall provide PNR with the drawings of the rail
fastening components indicating the detailed measurements.

1.13

Rail fastening components which are found to be not

complying with these Specifications, even after shipment may

205
 be subject to return or disposal and replacement by the
Supplier.

2.0 TESTING

2.1

All tests must be done in accordance with ASTM, BS, National

Standard Specifications or equivalent.

2.2

All test results must be furnished by the supplier to PNR, and

PNR reserves its rights to have the rail fastening components
tested by appropriate private or government agency.

2.3

If the test sample made fails to meet the International Standard

requirements, a further three (3) samples from the batch shall
be subjected to the same test. If two of these samples, meet the
test requirements the batch shall be accepted. If less than two
samples meet the test requirements, the batch shall be rejected.

C. WOODEN SLEEPERS

1 QUALITY OF SLEEPERS

Wooden sleepers shall be furnished by the Contractor, and shall be in

accordance with the standard specifications for wooden sleepers and
turnout sleepers of hardwood specified by the Philippine National
Railways. Imported wooden sleepers shall likewise conform to the
PNR specifications for imported wooden sleeper.

1.1 Dimensions of sleeper is as follows:

Length Width Thickness

Turnout Sleeper 220-370cm 23 cm 14 cm
Joint Wooden Sleeper 7 ft 10” 5”

For specification for imported and local wooden sleepers see Drawings

D. TURNOUT, NO 10 FOR 37 KG OR 40 N RAILS

a. Turnouts to be used shall be of the type as specified and as shown in

the drawings.

b. The means of transporting of the turnouts to the site, the exact

locations of their installation and the way of turnout laying shall be
approved by the Engineer in advance.

206
 c. Turnout laying shall comprise the installation of all components of the
turnout consisting of (frog), straight and curve leading portions,
movable portion including tongue rails, and guard rails assemblies.
Rail braces shall be either fixed or adjustable type or per standard
manufacture. Switch stand shall consist of switching assemblies with a
throwing lever, a connecting bar, a switch lock and a movable switch
sign, and shall be manually operated.

d. All tongue rails, frogs and guard rails shall be placed in accordance
with the drawings and track work plan approved by the Engineer.

e. Switches shall be left in proper adjustment, special care being given to

avoid the bending of the tongue rails for which appropriate protective
measures should be taken by the contractor before they are installed in
place.

f. All movable parts of turnouts shall be kept in well-cleaned condition

by removing floating rusts and applying lubricant oil thereto so as to
keep them movable freely.

g. Once turnouts are installed in place they shall be inspected by the

Engineer.

h. For specification for turnouts, see “PART 7 TRACK MATERIALS” ”.

E. CRUSHED ROCK BALLAST

a. Ballast shall be supplied by the contractor.

b. For specifications for ballast, see “PART 7 TRACK MATERIALS”

F. FILLING MATERIALS (ITEM 204 DPWH, EMBANKMENT)

a. Filling materials for embankments shall be supplied by Contractor

G. THERMIT WELDING

a. Rails shall be completely welded by and with the Contractor supplying

all the requirements for welding of rail by thermit process.

b. For thermit welding of rails, see section 5.7.

207
5.4 PREPARATION AND HANDLING OF TRACK MATERIALS

5.4.1 PREPARATION

a. The Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Engineer on the track
work schedule including the force to be employed and the speed with
which the work will proceed. Prior to commencement of the work, the
Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least five working days in
advance so that adequate arrangements can be made by the Engineer
for the execution of the work.

b. The Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Engineer on the

centerline stakes for track improvement purpose before the
commencement of track work. After the stakes for the track
improvement have been approved by the Engineer the Contractor shall
follow the stakes in the track laying, lining and surfacing.

c. No material shall be placed nor shall the track be laid on the subgrade
until the sub-grade has been constructed and finished true to the line
and planes according to the stakes set by the Contractor on the
completed subgrade as approved by the Engineer.

d. When the prepared subgrade is used for the purpose of transporting

materials and equipment by trucks and/or for the operation of heavy
equipment it shall be with the approval of the Engineer. The sub-grade
shall be restored to the original state by grading and compacting to the
satisfaction of the Engineer at the Contractor‟s own cost before the
track construction is commenced.

5.4.2 HANDLING OF TRACK MATERIALS

The Contractor shall take all precautions for the transport of track materials to
the site of work and shall coordinate fully with the Engineer in advance on the
locations and times of loading and unloading the track materials.

a. At the site, it is necessary to load or convey the rails by the rail carrier
with derrick crane. When handling rails by hand using rail tongs, no
attempt shall be made to throw the rails. Special care shall be taken in
handling the tongue rails of turnouts so as not to cause any damage
thereon.

b. Distribution of Rails

The Contractor shall distribute rails so that they can be laid without
unnecessary additional handling taking care of the following:

Place rails base down, parallel with the track and with sufficient bearing to
prevent bending or swinging.

To minimize the cutting of new full-length rails, short rails shall be distributed
in proper places to provide for proper spacing on the curved track and
locations for connections to switches.

208
c. Handling of Wooden Sleepers

Preservative Treatment of Wooden Sleepers

(1) Any fabricating such as end trimming and, if required, adzing and
boring or application of anti-cracking devices shall be performed at
manufacturing plants of wood sleepers.

(2) As the turnout sleepers are not uniform in length, location of the switch
components cannot be predicted, and they shall not be adzed or bored in
advance.

d. Unloading and Stacking of Wooden Sleepers

Wooden sleepers shall not be unloaded by dropping or throwing them onto

rails, rock or hard surfaces. Sleepers shall be handled with tongs and not with
bars or sharp tools to avoid any damage.

e. Handling of Ballast

In loading and unloading ballast, the Contractor shall take precautions to

prevent intrusion of soil or dust into the ballast.

(1) The ballast shall be loaded and unloaded by the Contractor. Care shall
be taken not to destroy or disturb the grade stakes. The Contractor shall trim
the ballast to conform to the standard ballast cross section plans. Any surplus
ballast after trimming shall be disposed of as directed by the Engineer.

f. Handling of Concrete Sleepers

Care shall be taken in the transport, handling, placing, and tamping of ballast
beneath the sleepers so as to avoid chipping and cracking of the concrete
sleepers. Any sleeper which has been so damaged, and in the judgment of the
Engineer is unserviceable, shall be removed and replaced.

209
5.5 TRANSPORT AND STORAGE OF TRACK MATERIALS

a. The Contractor shall fully coordinate with the Engineer and obtain has
approval on locations, methods and times of storage of track materials.

b. Rails and turnouts shall be placed on appropriate supports so as to prevent any

damage or bents thereto. In station grounds, rails shall be stacked properly not
to cause any hazard to train passage and off the tracks in a place convenient
for distribution.

c. Joint bars, track bolts, spring washers and track spikes and accessories of
turnouts shall be stored in the warehouses or sheds. If they are required to be
stored outdoors, appropriate protective measures shall be taken against
rainwater and other foreign matters that may cause any damage thereto.

d. Stacks of sleeper shall be appropriately supported and likewise protected from

sparks or other fire hazards and undue damage by covering with appropriate
tarpaulins. Concrete sleepers shall be protected inserts by means of a plastic
cap wooden planks plug or other suitable device approved by the Engineer.

e. Caps or plugs shall be placed in position at the time of manufacture, left in

place during shipping and not removed until fastenings are affixed to the
sleepers.

f. Handling and transporting of concrete sleepers shall be done with utmost care
so as not to incur undue cracks and/or chipping at edges. Sleepers shall not be
unloaded by dropping or throwing unto rails, rocks or hard surfaces. Sleepers
shall be handled with tongs and not with bars or sharp tools to avoid any
damage. Any damaged sleeper resulting from mishandling shall be replaced.

g. In the case where the ballast is stored in the stockyard, the surface shall be
graded, and vegetation and rubbish shall be removed prior to the stacking of
ballast materials.

h. Quantities of materials classified by respective types stored at the site shall be

ensured by the Contractor for the approval of the Engineer.

i. The Contractor shall be responsible for the security to prevent any Pilferage or
damage to the materials stored at the site.

j. Other means of transport required to move track and other construction

Materials rail shall furnished by the Contractor

210
5.6 USE OF TRACK MATERIALS

a. Use of Rails

Specified short rails on the ordinary fish plates joint should be used on the curved
track, in order to ensure even rail joints on both rails to connect with the turnouts.
Rails less than 5 meters in length shall not be used.

Rails to be used on sharp curves shall be bent prior to the laying work.

When short rails are used on the curved track, the arrangement of short rails shall be
approved by the Engineer in advance.

b. Cutting and Drilling of Rails

When available, the Contractor shall use a friction type rail saw for the cutting of
rails. The surface to be cut shall be square to the centerline of rail. No rail shall be cut
with gas torches under any circumstances.

When drilling a new bolt hole on the rail web as required to prepare the short rails, the
drilling shall be carried out in accordance with the standard drilling practices.

Accurate positions in correct dimension of holes as specified on the drawings. No

hole shall be punched or burned with a torch in the rails under any circumstances.
After drilling, all the chips and burrs shall be neatly removed. No hole shall be drilled
between the existing holes.

c. Laying of Sleepers

Concrete sleepers shall be laid only on track sections where specified or as directed by
the Engineer. Use of concrete sleepers under rail joints shall be avoided.

Sleepers shall be laid square to the rail on the straight track and concentrically on the
curved track in a uniform interval. Sleepers shall be laid at spacing as specified on the
drawings. The bottom of the rail, the rail pad and the rails seats shall be ensured that
all fastening components such as rail clips, ferrules, rail pads, etc. are complete and
properly installed.

The centerline of the sleeper length shall coincide with the centerline of track
alignment.

d. Laying of Rails

In laying the rails, the Contractor shall take the following precautions:

Use mechanical devices whenever possible and take utmost care to protect the
workers from possible hazards.

In laying second hand rails, care shall be exercised to prevent a gap of more than
2mm and to align the rail within allowable gauge tolerance.

211
Gauging of the track shall be carried out at least every third sleeper when the second
line of rails is laid against the requisite track gauge plus required slack on the curved
track.

The following are the radius of gauge on curve track:

RADIUS (m) SLACK (mm)

300 m - 0

300 – 175 m - 8 mm

<175 m - 15 mm

The increase or decrease of slack shall be at the transaction area, 5 m length

minimum.

The required super elevation for curves shall be:

C = 8.40 V2/R

Cmax = 90 mm

e. Rail Joints (On location without welding)

Joints in the opposite rails shall be located evenly unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer. In laying the rails on curves, care shall be taken to place the short rails on
the location of inside rails so as to maintain even rail joints throughout the curves.

Rail joints on prestressed concrete sections shall be of the supported type and rail
joints on wooden sections shall be of the suspended type.

Rail joints shall be provided at locations remote from road crossings, at least 5 m
before crossing.

Provision of space allowance for expansion of rails shall follow the criteria to be
made by the Engineer. Approved expansion shims of metal or fibre shall be used to
provide for the proper space allowance between adjacent rail ends, and a rail
thermometer shall be used to determine the proper thickness of shims to be inserted in
accordance with rail temperature. After laying the rails and setting up rail joints, all
records of expansion spaces set up on the rack shall be submitted to the Engineers for
review and approval.

Contact surfaces between the rails and joint bars shall be greased, and those between
joint bars and track bolts and on the threads of track bolts shall be lubricated just
before laying the rails.

All rail joints shall be firmly bolted and fitted with approved spring washers. All bolts
shall be tightened to the following torque before track is turned over to train
operation:

Common Trackbolts 2,000 kg-cm (80 lb. rails)

212
 2,000 kg-cm (73 lb. rails)

1,600 kg-cm (65 lb. rails)

Bolts shall be tightened in the proper sequence to seat joints, beginning at the center
of the joint and working both ways to the ends of the joint. When bolts are tightened,
the surfaces of rail heads and gauge line of both rails shall be set coinciding with one
another.

f. Track Spikes

Two (2) track spikes shall be used for fastening the rail to the sleeper. The existing
sleepers of insufficient bearing for the track spikes shall be reworked and the holes
shall be plugged with wooden inserts. Track spikes shall be provided as shown in the
drawings.

g. Screw Spikes

Four (4) screw spikes shall be used for fastening rails to bridge sleepers.

213
5.7 WELDING OF RAILS

a. Inspection and Classification of Existing Rail for Welding

A field inspection shall be made on rails in service, and all rails containing severe
engine drive burns, anchor nicks, excessive wear on the rail base or other visible flaws
shall be rejected for welding. It is recommended that the rail selected for welding be
picked up in such a manner that the rail wear pattern in the continuous welded rail
(CWR) string will remain approximately the same as it was in original service. One
method to keep the rails in an orderly manner with respect to their wear pattern is to
mark the north or west rail 2-4-6 etc.

Remove jointed rail in sections 60 meter long, then the joint bars are removed. Joint
bars, bolts and washers may be salvaged as repair material or the rail may be cropped
as a unit. The rail is carefully inspected after cropping, and rail not suitable for
welding is removed. Some engine drive burns may be oxyacetylene welded to
upgrade the rail.

When the rail arrives at the welding site, a qualified rail inspector shall carefully
inspect the rail for head wear, corrosion, base wear, sweeps, kinks or any other defect
that may have escaped detection in the previous inspection. Rail for each CWR string
must be matched to have the same height and width within 1.6 mm (1/16 in.).

The Contractor has the option for any methodology to achieve efficient welding
operation while continuing to maintain rail traffic, subject however to the approval of
the Engineer. The Engineer will not allow the use of a Holland-in-Track flash butt
welder.

It is recommended that the rail be stored straight and level on a firm base and each tier
stripped in four places.

(1) Minimum rail length should be 59 meter after cropping.

(2) Excess oils, grease, tars, etc., must be removed from the rail before welding.

(3) Maximum head flow should be 6.4mm (1/4 in.) on each side of the rail if
shears are used to remove the upset metal.

(4) Grade crossing rails must be free of corrosion or rejected for welding except
for yards or similar tracks.

(5) Bolt holes and bond holes must be eliminated by cropping.

(6) After cropping, both ends of the rail should be inspected for piped condition.

Recommended Rail Grading Classification:

Recommended Rail Grading Classification

MAXIMUM RAIL WEAR General Rail Use and

Rail Weight
Top Gauge Condition

214
 Main Line use – Very
Class 1
3.2 mm.(1/8 in.) 3.2 mm.(1/8 in.) minor engine burns and
37 kg, 65 Lb
corrugation
Branch Lines – Small
Class II
6.4 mm.(1/4 in.) 4.8 mm.(3/16 in.) engine burns and
37 kg, 65 Lb
corrugation
Light Branches Lines–
Class II Medium Engine burns and
6.4 mm.(1/4 in.) 4.8 mm.(3/16 in.)
37 kg, 65 Lb corrugations, may be pitted
and show some oxidation
Class IV Yards – Any burns not
9.5 mm.(3/8 in.) 9.5 mm(3/8 in.)
37 kg, 65 Lb mashed or fractured

b. Thermit Welding

The basic requirements for thermit welds are:

(1) Moisture and all foreign substances as dirt, grease, loose oxide, slag, etc.,
should be removed from the weld area.

(2) Rail ends should be aligned properly. Proper joint gap and lateral and vertical
positioning of the ends is imperative.

(3) Mold should be applied in exact location over rail gap and properly sealed.

(4) Detailed manufacturer‟s instructions for the specific thermit process being
used should be followed without deviation.

(5) It is assumed that flotation of impurities in the crucible and the mold, and
proper gating and feeding, are provided for in the equipment and instruction supplied
with the thermit package.

(6) The luting or sealing of the molds to the rail should be performed with care so
that the luting material is not introduced into the weld chamber. It has been found
practical to use sand mixed with bentonite in proper proportions with a minimum of
moisture in the mixture as a luting material.

(7) Molds and charges for excessive lengths of time may absorb detrimental
moisture. Manufacturer should be consulted for maximum recommended shelf life
and charges stored beyond that time should not be used. Molds should be stored in
such a manner and environment as to prevent moisture contamination. Care should be
taken when transporting from storage to the work site to protect charges and molds
from the elements.

(8) The crucible or reaction chamber must be made and kept dry and clean at all
times.

(9) Partial welding portions should never be used because of the possibility of
material segregation and the need for proper metal supply to the weld. Two weld
charges should never be mixed.

215
(10) It is recommended that welding not be performed during precipitation of any
kind unless adequate precautions are taken to completely protect the crucible, mold,
and adjacent rail from moisture.

(11) If temperature conditions are such that rapid contraction or expansion of rail is
taking place, welding should be avoided unless a rail puller/expander is used to
maintain the gap spacing and hold the rails in position until the weld metal is below
371 deg. C (700 deg. F).

(12) If compromise welds are being made, only molds and charges designed for the
specific transition in rail size shall be used.

(13) In the case of the processes in which the filler material is tapped manually, the
metal shall not be tapped until the reaction is completed and the slag has separated
from the filler material.

(14) The period of time immediately following the pouring of the metal is critical
to production of a good weld. During the first three minutes the rail should not be
disturbed in any manner. After that, at a time recommended by the manufacturer of
the charge used, the slag basin and mold may be removed, and the excess Ballast shall
be well packed with metal removed. If chisel cutting is performed, the rail must be
adequately supported; however, it is recommended that excess metal be removed by
shearing. Finish grinding the contours should be performed only after weld metal has
cooled below 316 deg. C (600 deg. F).

In order to minimize mechanical strains and stresses on the weld metal, it is

recommended that a rail puller/expander be used to hold the rails in place on either
side of the new weld. They should be left in place until the weld metal has cooled to
below 371 deg. C (700 deg. F).(15)

(16) If strap bars are used on the joint after welding, only bars designed with proper
clearance of cast-on fins should be used.

216
5.8 TRACK LAYING

Track laying shall be performed by the Contractor conforming with alignment,

profile, track structure, and gauge of track specified in the drawings. Track laying
shall be carried out by the following method as directed by the Engineer.

a. Once the formation is ready for track laying, ballast shall be unloaded and
spread to a design of 200 mm after which it shall be rolled.

b. PC sleeper hooked to a spreader which pre-sets the spacing of the sleepers

shall then be laid over the ballast. After aligning the running sleepers, the
speaker shall be detached.

c. Parts which shall be welded into 60 meter panels shall be laid on top of the
sleepers and later fastened to the sleeper with slips. Rails shall be fasten
temporarily together using fish plates and bolts.

d. More ballast shall be unloaded and evenly spread using a ballast regulator.

e. A tamping machine shall tamp the ballast and align and level the tracks.

f. More ballast shall be unloaded and spread by the ballast regulator where it is
needed.

g. The tamping machine shall make another pass over the track to further tamp,
align and level the tracks.

h. Spot unloading of ballast shall be done where it is required.

i. Final tamping, aligning and leveling of the tracks to the final grade shall be
undertaken after which ballast is trimmed to conform to the standard ballast
section in the drawings. The Contractor shall dispose of any surplus ballast
after trimming as directed by the Engineers.

j. The rails shall be welded into 120 m panelafter removing the fish plates.

5.9 STORAGE OF MATERIALS DERIVED FROM THE WORK

Various track materials derived as the consequence of the work shall be properly
stored in the location as directed by the Engineer for which proper inventories shall be
made and kept until proper turnover of such materials has been made to PNR.

5.10 CONDITIONING OF TRACKS

After track laying, the overall conditioning of the tracks shall be carried out to finish
the track construction by overall tamping and trimming of ballast in accordance with
the specified alignment, cross-sections, grade based on grade stakes, super elevation,
track gauge and slack.

217
5.11 TOLERANCE OF TRACK CONSTRUCTION WORK AND TRACK
REHABILITATION WORK

The measurement of irregularities of tracks constructed in place shall conform to the

following conditions:

a. Measuring instrument to be used shall be calibrated and approved by the

Engineer in advance.

b. Track irregularities shall be measured in the static condition.

c. The measurement of track irregularities shall be conducted every 5 meters

along the track centerline.

d. The irregularities are indicated by the expressions as shown in the following

where measuring unit it is in millimeter (mm). Irregularities in super elevation,
slack of track gauge and ordinates from grade lines are the measured value
minus the specified value.

5.11.1 TRACK GAUGE

Excessive values are expressed with (+) sign, while values in shortage are
expressed with (-) sign.

5.11.2 CROSS LEVEL

The left hand side rail on the straight track and the inner rail on the curved
track are used as the base of leveling; a (+) sign expenses the higher and a (-)
sign expenses the lower irregularities of the opposite rail.

5.11.3 ALIGNMENT

Measurement shall be conducted by 10 m. base at the gauge line on the left

hand side rail on the straight track and on the outer rail on the curved track
where the (+) sign expresses outward irregularities and the (-) sign expresses
the inward irregularities of track alignment.

5.11.4 LONGITUDINAL LEVEL

Measurement shall be conducted by a 10 m. base at the surface of rail

expressing upward irregularities with a (+) sign and downward irregularities
with a (-) sign.

5.11.5 MEASUREMENT

The measurement of alignment and longitudinal level shall be conducted using

a string with an effective length of 10 meters to be extended with a tension of
2 kg, and the measurement of irregularities shall be made at the middle of the
string. In measuring the longitudinal level, 1.0 millimeter shall be deducted
from the measured value as the sag of the string.

218
 The tolerance of newly constructed tracks and rehabilitated tracks at the time
of inspection to be conducted prior to the actual operation are shown as
follows:

TRACK TOLERANCES
Allowable Track Tolerance
Wearing Items Main Track Side Track
Track Gauge +4 to -3 +2 to -4
Cross Level 4 5
Longitudinal Level 5 6
Alignment 4 5
Deviation of Sleeper
+20 to -20 -
Spacingfrom the Standards
Track Gauge at Frog Portion +2 to -2 -

219
5.12 TRIAL TRAIN OPERATION ON NEWLY CONSTRUCTED AND
REHABILITATED TRACKS

In the case where trial operation is carried out on the newly constructedtracks, the
operation shall be performed by assigning a person responsible for the operation
under the following guidelines:

a. Prior to the trial run, track irregularities under various items as specified
elsewhere shall be measured by the Contractor, and the records of the result
shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for review.

b. Prior to the trial run, instruments to measure the settlement of track thereof
shall be installed by the Contractor according to the instructions given by the
Engineer, and their installations shall be examined by the Engineer for
approval.

c. Upon the trial run, the Contractor shall measure the settlement of track by the
aforementioned instruments installed. The records of the result shall be
submitted to the Engineer again for review.

d. After the trial run has been conducted, the Contractor shall carry out the track
conditioning again only at such locations instructed by the engineer as the
results of the trial run, the second trial run shall be carried out and the records
of second measurements shall be submitted to the Engineer again for review.

e. After the results of measurements are approved as being satisfactory to the

Engineer, all temporary structures and measuring instruments provided for the
trial run shall be removed by the Contractor under the direction of the
Engineer.

220
5.13 ADJUSTMENT FOLLOWING RELAYING OF PERMANENT WAYS

a. Final adjustment of permanent ways will be performed after all the ballast has
been placed. Any loose sleepers or low spots which develop under traffic will
be tightened, and final re-alignment will be performed at this stage using the
on-track tamping machine. The track shall be left in a first class condition for
the PNR to take over.

The condition of the track shall be inspected using the Standard Values (See TS-5-
51), and the Contractor‟s record of his finished work turned over to PNR.b.

c. After the final inspection has been performed and there should the be any need
to make adjustments to the tracks, tighten any fastenings, or pack any loose
sleepers, etc., the Contractor shall be required to make the necessary
adjustments within thirty (30) days

d. The newly laid track shall be thoroughly inspected by the Contractor using
roving patrols, to insure that there is no pilferage of materials, and that the
track is in as good a condition as possible.

If any deficiencies as discovered that cannot be corrected, the problems shall be

discussed with the Engineer.

Allowable tolerance for final inspection stipulated herein, for deficiencies discovered
within 30 days after test runs have been made, are as follows:

Allowable Tolerances (mm)

Wearing Items Main Track Side Track
a. Track Gauge +6 to -4 +6 to -4
b. Cross Level 9 11
c. Longitudinal Level 9 11
d. Alignment 9 11
e. Deviation of Sleeper
Spacing from the standards +20 to -20 +20 to -20
f. Track Gauge at
Frog portion +1 to -2 +1 to -2

221
5.14 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

5.14.1 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

5.14.1.1

The quantity of new or reconditioned rails to be paid shall be the

number of pieces of installed 37 kg/m x meter complete with angle
bars, track bolts and washers.

5.14.1.2

The quantity of PC sleepers to be paid shall be the number of pieces

installed complete with rail fasteners which shall be supplied by the
winning bidder.

5.14.1.3

The quantity of turnout sleepers to be paid shall be the number of sets

installed complete with track spikes.

5.14.1.4

The quantity of ballast to be paid shall be the number of cubic meters

unloaded at site and accepted by the Engineer. The ballast while still
on the ballast-wagons shall be inspected and checked for its “water
level” volume which shall be the basis for measurement. Prior to
unloading the Contractor shall level the top surface of the ballast on the
wagons to facilitate volume calculation. The costs incurred in hauling
the ballast from the approved source or crushing plant is construed to
have included in the unit price offered by the Contractor. The
distribution cost and, after installation of tracks, the tamping, lifting,
leveling and aligning costs are likewise presumed to have been
included in the unit price of ballast as offered.

5.14.1.5

The quantity of rail welding to be measured for payment shall be the

number of welded rail joints completed and accepted by the Engineer.
The work includes all collection, transport, handling, assembly and
laying of all necessary materials in positions. The works also include
all cutting of closure and joining to abutting sections, all welding,
trimming and grinding procedures.

5.14.1.6

The quantity of new turnouts/diamond crossings to be measured for

payment shall be number of sets supplied and installed which shall
include the supply and installation of sleepers, angle bars, track spikes,
track bolts and washers. The cost of tamping using hand tampers shall
be included in the unit price per set as offered by the Contractor.

222
5.14.1.7 Basis of Payment

The quantities, determined as provided above, shall be paid for at the

Contract Unit Price for the pay items listed and shown in the Bill of
Quantities. The prices and payments shall be full compensation for
furnishing and placing all materials including all labor, fools,
equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the works prescribed
in this Section.

223
 PART 6
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS

6.1 FENCING

6.1.1 SCOPE

This work shall consist of furnishing and constructing concrete pile and
concrete panel for fencing in accordance with the details, and at the locations,
shown on the Drawings or as required by the Engineer.

6.1.2 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

6.1.2.1 Concrete

Concrete pile and concrete panel shall be made of Class “B” Concrete,
in accordance with Section 4.1, Concrete Works. The concrete pile
posts shall be cast to the length shown on the detailed Drawings, and
shall have a smooth surface finish. Concrete panel shall be cast to the
sections or dimensions shown on the detailed Drawings and shall have
a smooth surface finish.

6.1.2.2

Steel Reinforcement - Steel reinforcement for concrete pile posts and

concrete panel shall conform to the provisions of Subsection 4.1.7.1,
Reinforcing Steel.

6.1.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

The contractor shall perform such clearing and grubbing as may be necessary
to construct the fence to the required grade and alignment. Fence shall
generally follow the contour of the ground. Grading shall be performed where
necessary to provide a neat appearance.

6.1.3.1

Erection of Pile PostThe pile post shall be driven and erected in

vertical position true to line and grade and shall be adequately
supported prior to driving. The pile posts shall be erected to the height
and location shown on the Drawings or as ordered by the Engineer.
After driving is completed, all loose and displaced materials shall be
cleaned and removed from around the piles with method approved by
the Engineer. The driving of concrete pile post shall be done in
accordance with Section 4.1, Piling.

6.1.3.2

Concrete panel shall be installed and constructed as shown on the

Drawings and the method approved by the Engineer.

224
6.2 CEMENT MORTAR

6.2.1 SCOPE

a. General

This work shall consist of preparing and furnishing mortar in accordance with
these Specifications for masonry and for any other incidental work. The work
under this section shall also be in accordance with Section 4.1 – Concrete
Works for Structures.

b. Composition

Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, masonry mortar shall be

composed of one part Portland cement and two parts fine aggregate by volume
to which hydrated lime may be added in an amount equal to 10 percent of the
cement by weight. An air-entraining admixture may be used.

6.2.2 MATERIALS

Type 1 portland cement conforming to AASHTO M85 may be used.

Masonry cement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C91.

Fine aggregate shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO T71.

Hydrated lime shall meet the requirements for residue, popping and pitting,
and water retention shown for type N lime in ASTM C207.

Water shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO T26.

Air-entraining agents shall be as approved by the Engineer.

6.2.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

All the materials except the water shall be mixed, either in a tight box or in an
approved mortar mixer, until the mixture assumes a uniform color, after which
the water shall be added and the mixing continued.

Mortar shall be mixed only in those quantities required for immediate use.

Mortar that is not used within 45 minutes after the water has been added shall
be discarded.

225
6.3 STONE MASONRY

6.3.1 SCOPE

This work shall consist of stone masonry in minor structures, slope protection
around the drainage structures, in the retaining walls, and in other places
where called for on the drawings or ordered in writing by the Engineer. The
masonry shall be constructed on the prepared foundation bed in accordance
with these Specifications and the specifications for other work items involved
and in conformity with the lines, grades, sections, and dimensions shown on
the drawings or required by the Engineer.

6.3.2 MATERIALS

a. Stone

The stone shall be clean, hard, and of a kind known to be durable, and shall be
subject to the Engineer‟s approval. Adobe blocks shall not be used unless
otherwise specified.

Unless other sizes are shown on the drawings, stones shall have thicknesses of
not less than 15 cm, widths of not less than one and one half times their
respective thicknesses, and lengths of not less than one and one half times
their respective widths.

Each stone shall be of good shape and free of depressions and projections that
might weaken or prevent it from being properly bedded.

The stone shall be dressed to remove any thin or weak portions. Face stones
shall be dressed to provide bed and joint lines that do not vary more than 2 cm
from true lines and to ensure the meeting of bed and joint lines without the
rounding of the corners of the stones in excess of 3 cm in radius. Bed surfaces
of face stones shall be approximately normal to the faces of the stones for
about 8 cm and from this point may depart from a normal plane not to exceed
5 cm in 30 cm.

Face stones shall be pitched to line along all beds and joints. The maximum
projections of rock faces beyond pitch lines shall not be more than 5 cm.

b. Mortar

The mortar shall conform to the requirements of Section 6.4.

6.3.3 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

a. Selection and Placing

When the masonry is to be placed on a prepared foundation bed, the bed shall
firm and normal to, or in steps normal to, the face of the wall, and shall have
been approved by the Engineer before any stone is placed.

226
Care shall be taken to prevent the bunching of small stones or stones of the
same size. Large stones shall be used in the corners.

All stones shall be cleaned thoroughly and wetted immediately before being
set, and the bed which is to receive them shall be cleaned and moistened
before the mortar is spread. They shall be laid with their longest faces
horizontal in full beds of mortar, and joints shall be flushed with mortar.

The exposed faces of individual stones shall be parallel to the faces of the
walls in which the stones are set.

The stones shall be so handled as not jar or displace the stones already set.
Suitable equipment shall be provided for setting stones larger than those that
can be handled by two men. The rolling or turning of stones on the walls will
not be permitted. If a stone is loosened after the mortar has taken initial set, it
shall be removed, the mortar cleaned off, and the stone relaid with fresh
mortar.

b. Beds and Joints

Bed for face stones may vary from 2 cm to 5 cm in thickness. They shall not
extend in an unbroken line through more than five stones. Joints may vary
from 2 cm to 5 cm in thickness. They shall not extend in an unbroken line
through more than two stones. They may be at angles with the vertical from 0
to 45. Face stone shall bond at least 15 cm longitudinally and 5 cm vertically.
At no place shall corners of four stones be adjacent to each other.

Cross beds for vertical faced walls shall be level, and for battered walls may
vary from level to normal to the batter line of the face of the wall.

c. Headers

Headers shall be distributed uniformly throughout the wall of structures so as

to form at least one fifth of the exposed faces. They shall be of such lengths as
to extend from the front face of the wall into the backing at least 30 cm.

When a wall is 45 cm or less in thickness, the headers shall extend entirely

from front to back face.

d. Backing

The backing shall be built chiefly of large stones and in a workmanlike

manner. The individual stones composing the backing and hearting shall be
wall bonded with the stones in the face wall and with each other. All openings
and interstices in the backing shall be filled completely with mortar or with
spalls surrounded completely by mortar.

e. Pointing

Both bed and vertical joints shall be finished as shown on the drawings or as
directed by the Engineer. The mortar in joints on top surfaces shall be
crowned slightly at the center of the masonry to provide drainage.

227
f. Coping

Copings, if called for, shall be as shown on the drawings. Where copings are
not called for, the top of the wall shall be finished with stones wide enough to
cover the top of the wall from 45 cm to 1 meter in length, and of random
heights, with a minimum height of 15 cm. Stone shall be laid in such a
manner that the top course is an integral part of the wall. The tops of the top
courses of stone shall be pitched to line in both vertical and horizontal planes.

g. Weep Holes

All walls and abutments shall be provided with weep holes. Unless otherwise
shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer, the weep holes shall be
placed at the lowest points where free outlets can be obtained and shall be
spaced not more than 2 meters center to center.

h. Cleaning Exposed Faces

Immediately after laid, and while the mortar is fresh, all fresh stones shall be
thoroughly cleaned of mortar stains and shall be kept clean until the work is
completed.

i. Curing

In hot or dry weather the masonry shall be satisfactorily protected from the
sun and shall be kept wet for a period of at least three days after completion.

228
6.4 DEMOLITION WORK

6.4.1 DESCRIPTION

This section shall be applied to the general demolition work of structures, such
as concrete, steel structure, timber and drainage and others to be executed
under the Contract

6.4.2 GENERAL PROVISIONS

The contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself as to the site

condition and others whatsoever, and to include in his unit prices to cover all
risk for any contingencies that may arise during or in connection with the
work.

The demolition work shall be carried out by the approved method and
equipment such as concrete breaker, gascutter, hydraulic jack, compressed air
disconnector, or manpower but no blasting shall be used unless approved in
writing by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall provide suitable equipment, skillful labors and

appropriate temporary works such as scaffoldings to ensure the safety in his
demolition works as well as the adjacent area.

The Contractor shall demolish all the structural members above the formation
level, on which the subsequent and permanent works under this Contract will
be constructed. To this end, the temporary work such as excavation shall be
conducted by the Contractor.

6.4.3 MATERIALS REQUIREMENT

a. Reusable Steel Structures

The Contractor shall, prior to the dismantling work of any steel members
classified as reusable, submit his scheme or method of operation in
disconnecting any members of the steel structures for the approval of the
Engineer.

The Contractor shall not be allowed to cut the steel members by gas cutter but
to disconnect the bolts, or rivets with due care thereby avoiding any damage to
the steel parts. If any difficulty in disconnecting the steel members are
encountered, the Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer about his
methodology before any dismantling activity is to be undertaken by him.

All the reusable steel structures, shall be after dismantling operation, sorted in
a proper manner, transported and unloaded with care to Caloocan stockyard
upon the instructions of the Engineer.

b. Unusable Steel Structures

229
 The Contractor shall be responsible for the dismantling of steel structures
classified as scrap and shall be removed from the site, transported and
unloaded at the Caloocan stockyard.

The Contractor will be allowed to cut the steel members considered as scrap,
to facilitate for the easy and convenient dismantling and transporting
operation.

c. Concrete and Other Members

a. After demolishing, these members as debris shall be removed from the

site as soon as possible and dumped at the disposal area approved by the
Engineer.

b. These demolished members shall be broken to small pieces not more

than 50 cm, before disposal.

d. Pavement and Earth

Pavement and excessive earth in the area shown on the Drawing shall be
removed in a proper manner and method approved by the Engineer and
dumped at the disposal area designated by the Engineer.

6.4.4 CONSTRUCTION METHOD

The Contractor shall prior to the commencement of any work herein submit
his proposal of work method for the Engineer‟s approval, including temporary
works such as formwork, support, scaffolding, etc.

The Contractor shall perform the work described above, within and adjacent to
the railway, on the right-of-way as shown on the drawings or as directed by
the Engineer. All materials recovered from demolition shall remain the
property of the Employer unless specifically provided otherwise in the
Contract Documents except materials resulting from the demolition structures.
All designated salvageable material shall be removed, without unnecessary
damage, in sections or pieces which may be readily transported, and shall be
stored by the Contractor at specified places on the project as directed by the
Engineer. Basements or cavities left by structure removal shall be filled with
acceptable material to the level of the surrounding ground.

6.4.4.1 Performance of this work under the Contract shall be measured by

payment

The obligation will also include salvage of materials, removed, their

custody, preservation, storage on the right-of-way, and disposal as
provided herein, except for the substructure materials.

230
 PART 7
TRACK MATERIALS

SPECIFICATIONS FOR BALLAST

1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Prepared ballast shall furnished by the Contractor, and shall be crushed stone
composed of hard stone and durable particles free from injurious amounts of
deleterious substances and conforming to the requirements of these specifications.
The type and sizes of prepared ballast shall be as shown in paragraph (3) below.

2. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

Deleterious substances shall not be present in prepared ballast in excess of the

following amounts:

Soft and friable pieces : less than 3%

Fines : less than 1%
Dirt or clay lumps : less than ½%

Los Angeles value shall not exceed 25%.

3. GRADING REQUIREMENTS

The grading shall be determined by test with laboratory sieves having square openings
and conforming with the requirements as given below:

4. HANDLING OF BALLAST

In loading and unloading the ballast, the Contractor shall take precautions to prevent
intrusion of soil or dust into the ballast.

The ballast shall be unloaded by the Contractor. Care shall be taken not to destroy or
disturb the grade stakes. The contractor shall trim the ballast to conform to the
standard ballast cross section plans. Any surplus ballast after trimming shall be
disposed as directed by the Engineer.

231
 SPECIFICATION FOR RAILS
(JISE 1101 or Equivalent)

1. SCOPE

This standard covers railway rails: 40 kg rail and 37 kg rails which are used for tracks
in general (hereinafter referred to as “the rail”).

2. CLASSIFICATION

Rails are classified into two classes according to their weights and existence or
absence of fish – bolt holes as shown in Table 1.

Table 1

Classification Calculated weight (kg/m)

40 kg N rail With fish – bolt holes 40.9
Without fish – bolt holes

37 kg N rail With fish – bolt holes 37.2

Without fish – olt holes

3. MATERIAL

3.1 The chemical composition on the steel shall be with the limits in Table 2. It is
desired that the number of heats in which the carbon content exceeds the
average value shown in Table 2 will not be less than the half of the total
number of heats.

Table 2

KIND C (%) Si (%) Mn (%) P (%) S (%)

40 N 0.6 – 0.75 0.10 – 0.30 0.70 – 1.10 0.035max 0.40 max
37 kg 0.55 – 0.70 0.07 – 0.35 0.60 – 0.95 0.045 max 0.050 ma

3.2 The mechanical property of the steel shall be as specified in Table 3.

Table 3

KIND Tensile Strength (kg/mm²) Elongation

40 N 80 min. 8% min.
37 kg 70 min. 9 %min.

4. MANUFACTURING PROCESS

4.1 Steel ingot intended for the manufacturer of rails shall be produced either by a
pure oxygen converter or by a basic open hearth furnace.

232
 4.2 The ingot shall not be solidified while it is tumbled or shall not be rolled
before its complete solidification.

4.3 The end of the steel ingot shall be discarded by sufficient lengths to ensure
freedom from interior defects.

4.4 The rail shall be treated properly so that no shatter crack may be present.

4.5 It is desired that the rail‟s camber after rolling and cooling will be as little as
possible and that at both ends the rail will not deviate downward.

4.6 When the rail‟s camber is straightened no such force as may possible have a
bad effect on the material shall be exerted.

4.7 The both ends of rail shall be cut at a right angle to the lengthwise direction
and the burrs made at the cut end shall be removed.

5. SECTION

5.1 The section and dimension of a rail shall conform to the attached drawing.

5.2 The length of a rail shall be 20-25 meters.

5.3 The rail‟s dimensional tolerance at 20 degrees Centigrade shall be as specified

in Table 4.

Table 4

Position of Measurement Tolerance (unit: mm)

Length 12.5 m max 7
12.5 m min 10
Height 1.0
0.5
Width of Head and Web 1.0
0.5
Width of each flange base 1.0
Overall width of base 1.0
Deviation of vertically at rail head 1.0
Out of square by cutting at the ends 1.0
Diameter of a Hole 0.5
Location of Hole 0.8
Clearing between rail and standard outward 1.5
Fish-plate when latter is applied inward 0.5
Deviation from straightness at the ends Lateral 1.0
(measured length 1.5 meters) Upward 1.2
Downward 1.8

6. APPEARANCE AND OTHER ITEMS OF QUALITY

233
 6.1 The rail shall be of uniform shape through the entire length, shall be kept
straight without any unnatural deformation and shall be free from any harmful
twist.

6.2 The rail shall not have any such defects as harmful crack and flaw on its
surface.

6.3 In the cross-section of rail and in the inside surface of fish-bolt hole, there
shall not exist any internal defects such as the harmful pipe and the
segregation of impurities.

6.4 Fish-bolt holes shall be drilled accurately and smoothly in the web at both
ends of rail as shown in the attached drawing.

6.5 The rail with fish-bolt holes shall be chamfered around rail head and upper
fillet at the periphery of fish-bolt hole shown in the attached drawing.

7. TEST AND INSPECTION

7.1

The tools to be used to inspect the shape and dimensions shall be those designated or
approved by PNR.

7.2 Chemical; analysis and inspection:

7.2.1 The specimen to be used in chemical analysis shall be sampled in

accordance with JIS G 0303 “General Rule for Inspection of steel.” or
equivalent.

7.2.2 The method of analysis shall conform to the following and the result of
analysis shall conform to the provisions specified in Table 2.

JIS G 1211 (General rules concerning the method of iron and steel analysis)
JIS G 1211 (Method of carbon analysis of iron and steel)
JIS G 1212 (Method of silicon analysis of iron and steel)
JIS G 1213 (Method of manganese analysis of iron and steel)
JIS G 1214 (Method of phosphor analysis of iron and steel)
JIS G 1215 (Method of sulphur analysis of iron and steel)
JIS G 1202 (General rules concerning the method of emission-spectroscopic
analysis of iron and steel)
JIS G 1252 (Method of emission-spectroscopic analysis of carbon steel and low
alloy steel)
JIS G 1203 (General rules concerning the method of emission-spectroscopic
analysis of photoelectric-photometric system of iron and steel)
JIS G 1253 (Method of the emission-spectroscopic analysis of photoelectric-
photometric system of iron and steel)

7.3 Tensile Test and Inspection:

234
 Ingots obtained from the same heat shall be made one group and one tensile
test piece shall be taken from the rear end of the top-end crop of the rail rolled
from an ingot selected at random out of the group, as illustrated below:

The test and inspection shall be conducted as specified below:

a. The test specimen shall confirm to No.4 stipulated in JIS Z 2201

(“Tensile Test Specimen of Metal”) and the testing method shall be in
accordance with JIS Z 2241(“Method of Tensile Test of Metal”).

b. When the test specimen breaks at a point more than ¼ of the gauge
length farther from the center between the datum marks and the result does not
conform to the provisions of Table 3, the test shall be considered null and void
and further test shall be conducted with respect to the rail from which the test
piece was taken in the beginning.

c. In case the test result conforms to the provision of Table 3, all the rails
that were rolled from the ingots of the group which the test piece represents
shall be accepted. In case the test result is unsatisfactory, the portions
corresponding to 300 kg of metal from the top end of rails represented by the
test piece shall be rejected and the rest shall be retested with the test piece
taken from the rear end of the rejected portion.

d. In case the result of re-test meets the provision, all the test of rails
rolled from the ingots which the test piece represents shall be accepted. In case
the result of re-test does not meet the provision, further test may be conducted
in accordance with item (3) above.

7.4 Drop Test and Inspection:

Ingots from the sane heat shall be made one group and one drop test piece
shall be taken from the rear end of the top end crop of the rail rolled from an
ingot selected at random out of the group other than those from which the
tensile test piece was taken. The test and inspection shall be conducted as
specified below.

a. For the drop test, the testing machine specified in the appendix to JIS E
1101 or equivalent “Ordinary Rail” shall be used.

b. The test piece shall be a 1.5 meter long cut from rail.

c. The test piece shall rest on the supports with head downward and the
test shall be conducted as specified in Table 5.

Table 5
Unit : Meter

Height of Distance Between

Classification
Failing Supports
40 kg N rail 5.1 0.914
37 kg rail 5.0 0.914

235
 d. The test piece shall neither break by a single blow nor shall show any
signs of defective abnormality.

e. The result of the test shall be treated as prescribed in 7.3 (3) and (4).

7.5 Sulfur Print Test and Inspection

Ingots from the same heat shall be made one group and sulfur print test piece
be taken from the rear end of the top end crop of the rail rolled at random
from an ingot selected at random out of the group other than those from which
the tensile test piece or drop test piece was taken. The test and inspection shall
be conducted as specified below:

a. The test piece shall be a piece cut from the rear of 10mm or more in
length.

b. The testing surface of the test piece shall be made smooth and the
photographic printing paper previously impregnated with a 3% solution of
sulphuric acid for 5-10 minutes shall be tightly stuck to the surface for more
than two minutes, thus taking a print, and then the printing paper shall be fixed
and dried.

c. The result of the print shall be inspected on the basis of the limit
sample specified in the appendix and shall be treated as prescribed in (3) and
(4) of 7.3.

7.6 Appearance Test and Inspection:

a. The appearance of the base, head, web and sectional surface of rail
shall be examined visually as a rule; provided that when there is doubt of an
abnormality, detecting tests shall be conducted.

b. The result of appearance test and inspection shall meet the

requirements of 6.2 and 6.3.

8. MARKING

8.1 An arrow mark indicating the direction of the top end of the steel ingot, a mark
showing the type of rail, the manufacturing process, the name or brand of the
manufacturer and the month and the year of manufacture shall be embossed on
one side of the rail‟s web, following the example given below, clearly and
permanently enough to remain legible as long as the rail is in use.

Example:

An arrow Kind of Kind of Name of Year of Month of

mark rail manufacturing brand of manufacturer Manufacturer
Indicating process manufacturer
direction of
ingot top

236
 37 A OH 2000 1111

On the other side of rail web, the serial number showing the order in which the rail
was rolled from an ingot, the mark showing the order of pouring of melt into mold,
the heat number, working gang identification and carbon contents shall be stamped at
a place which is not covered by the fish-plate in accordance with the following
example:

Example:

Serial Mark showing order Heat Working gang Carbon

Number of pouring of melt Number identification Content
into mold
2 B 35281 X C 65

8.2 Both ends of surfaces of rail shall be painted blue.

9. SUPERVISION OF MANUFACTURE

The manufacture of the rail shall be supervised and inspected by the manufacture
supervisor.

10. DATA TO BE PRESENTED

The supplier shall present a statement of results specified in 7.2, 7.3, 7.4 and 7.5 in
duplicate at the time of delivery.

Related Specifications:

JIS G 0303 General rule of inspection of steel

JIS G 1211 Method of carbon analysis of iron and steel
JIS G 1213 Method of manganese analysis of iron and steel
JIS G 1201 Method of analysis of iron and steel
JIS G 1212 Method of silicon analysis of iron and steel
JIS G 1214 Method of phosphor analysis of iron and steel
JIS G 1215 Method of sulfur analysis of iron and steel
JIS G 2201 Tensile test specimen of metal
JIS G 1202 General rule of the method of emission-spectroscopic analysis of
photoelec-photometric system of iron and steel
JIS G 01104-2B-13AR6
Welded Rail (N type)

237
 SPECIFICATION FOR FISHPLATE FOR ANGLE BARS FOR 37A KG RAIL
(JIS E 1102 or equivalent)

1. SCOPE

This standard specifies fishplates to be used for rails of JIS E 1101, JIS E 1120, JIS E
1122 and JRS N.

2. TYPE

Fishplate shall be classified as shown in Table 1:

Table 1

Ordinary fishplate for 30 kg rail

Ordinary fishplate for 37 kg rail
Class 1 Ordinary fishplate for 40 kg N rail
Ordinary fishplate for 50 kg rail
Ordinary fishplate for 50 kg N rail

Heat treated fishplate for 30 kg rail

Heat treated fishplate for 37 kg rail
Class 2 Heat treated fishplate for 40 kg N rail
Heat treated fishplate for 50 kg rail
Heat treated fishplate for 50 kg N rail

Remarks: Fishplates of Class 1 are rolled but not heat-treated, while those of
class 2 are heat-treated (quenched and tempered) after rolling.

3. QUALITY

3.1 Chemical Composition – The chemical composition of fishplates shall be as

shown in Table 2.

Table 2

Chemical Composition, %
Types
C Si Mn P S
0.35
Fishplates for 30 kg and 37 kg Rail
0.50
Fishplates for 40 kg N 50 kg and 0.40 0.40- 0.55- 0.040 0.054
50 kg N Rails 0.55 max. 1.00 max. max.

3.2 Mechanical Properties - The mechanical properties shall be as follows:

3.2.1 The tensile strength and elongation of class 1 fishplates shall be as

shown in Table 3.

238
 Table 3
Types Tensile strength
Kg/sq. mm Elongation, %

Fishplates for 30 kg and 37 kg Rail

Fishplates for 40 kg N, 50 kg and 55 min. 18 min.
50 kg N Rails 58 min. 15 min.

3.2.2 The hardness, tensile strength and elongation of class 2 fishplates shall
be as shown in Table 4.

Table 4
Surface
Tensile Strength, kg/sq. mm Elongation, %
Hardness
HB 262 – 331 70 min. 12 min.

4. MANUFACTURING METHOD AND WORK PROCESS

4.1 Manufacturing Method – The method used in manufacturing the fishplates

shall be as follows:

a. A steel ingot from which shall be rolled only after it has completely solidified;
it shall not be removed to a length sufficient to eliminate any interior defects.

b. The steel ingot shall be rolled only after it has completely solidified; it shall
not be allowed to solidify in a sidewise position.

c. The ends of the steel ingot shall be removed to a length sufficient to eliminate
any interior defects.

4.2 Work Process – The work process for the fishplates shall be as follows:

a. Both ends of the fishplates shall be cut at right angles to the lengthwise
direction and the burrs on the cut ends shall be removed.

b. Fishbolt holes shall be bored and chamfered accurately and holes of fishplates
for 40 kg N and 50 kg N rails shall be chamfered as shown in the attached
figure.

4.3 Heat Treatment – Heat Treatment for Class 2 fishplates shall be conducted by
the following method:

a. The fishplate shall quenched and tempered for heat treatment.

b. Repetition of the treatment shall not be made more than twice.

5. SHAPES AND DIMENSIONS

The shapes and dimensions of the fishplates shall be as follows:

239
 a. The shapes and dimensions of the fishplates shall be as shown in the attached
figure.

b. The tolerance for the dimensions of fishplates are as shown in Table 5.

Table 5
Unit. mm
Measured Place Tolerance
Length ±3
Thickness ±0.5
±1.0+1.0
Hole Diameter
-0.5-0.1
Intervals between holes ±1.0
Dimension of notches ±1.0
Position of notches ±1.5
Intervals between holes and notches ±1.5
Center Upwards ±1.5
Center Downwards +1.0
Camber
Center Outwards to rail 1.5
Center Inwards to rail 1.5
Fishplates for 30 kg, 37 kf, 50 kg ±2
Clearance between fishplate rails 1
and rail template Fishplates for 40 kg N, 50 kg N rails ±1.5
±0.5

6. APPEARANCE

The appearance of the fishplates shall be as follows:

a. All fishplates shall be free from such defects as harmful flaws, cracks and
twists.

b. No internal defects such as pipe marks shall exist in the cross-section of the
fishplates and in the inside surface of the fishbolt hole.

240
 SPECIFICATION FOR TRACKBOLTS (FISHPLATE BOLTS)
(JIS E 1107 or equivalent)

1. SCOPE

The specification covers the bolt use for fishplates for 37 kg A rails.

2. MATERIALS

Materials to be used for bolts and nut shall be as specified in JIS C 2101 (Rolled Steel
for General Structures) particularly SS 41 and SS 50 (Steel Plates, Stripe, flat bars,
bars and shapes).

3. SHAPE, SIZE AND ALLOWABLE ERROR

Shape and size shall be as indicated in the plan with an allowable error in size of bolts
and nuts as follows:

Length + 2 mm
Diameter + 1 mm - 0.5 mm
Threaded Length + 8 mm
Nut None

4. TESTS

4.1 Ultimate tensile stress for bolts and nuts shall be 41 to 52 kg/sq. mm with 20%
elongation.

4.2 Bead Test – shall not show any sign of fraction when cold bent around the bar
equal to the diameter until the sides are parallel.

5. APPEARANCES

The bolts and nuts shall be round, well finished, clean and free from defects of any
kind.

241
 SPECIFICATION FOR SPRING WASHERS
(JIS E 1115 or equivalent)

1. SCOPE

This standard prescribes spring washers for fishbolts (hereinafter called washers) to
be used for rail joints of railroads.

2. KINDS

As shown in Table 1 below, washers shall be of two kinds according to shape and
size.

Table 1

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Kinds : Uses
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No. 1 : For 30 kg, 37 kg, 40 kg N and 50 kg N Rail uses
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No. 2 : For 50 kg rail use
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

3. MATERIALS

Materials to be used for washers shall, as a general rule be of four, five or six kinds
specified in JIS G 3506.

4. MANUFACTURING METHOD

4.1 After forming wire rod into washers of free height about double its diameter,
they are subjected to heat treatment such as hardening and tempering.

4.2 Setting of washers shall be carried out by applying contact load once or over.

5. SHAPE, SIZE AND QUALITY

5.1 Shape, Size and allowable Error in Size

Shape, size and an allowable error in size of washers shall be indicated in the attached
figure and Table 2 below.

Table 2 (in mm)

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Items : Allowable Error in Size
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Inside dia. : + 1.0
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wire rod dia. : + 0.50
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

242
5.2 Standard dimensions of spring washer for 37 kg ASCE rails.

243
 SPECIFICATION FOR TRACK SPIKES
(PNR SPECS)

1. MANUFACTURE

The steel shall be made by the Bessemer or by the open-hearth process, or by both,
having a dimension of 16 mm square by 114 mm length pf grade of steel to be in
accordance with JIS SS 41.

2. CHEMICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS

2.1 Chemical Properties

a. The steel shall conform to the following requirements as to chemical

compositions:

Bessemer Open-Hearth

Carbon, percent 0.06 0.12

Not under

b. Tension Tests

(1) The manufacturer may, at his option, substitute tension test for the chemical
analysis specified in Sec. 2.1 (1), in which case the finished spikes shall
conform to the following minimum requirements as to tensile properties.

Tensile strength, psi …………………………………………….. 55,000

Yield point, psi……………………………………………………. 0.5 tensile
Strength
Elongation in 2 in percent ………………………………………..25

(2) When this option is exercised, one tension shall be made from each 10-ton lot
or fraction thereof.

3. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTS

3.1 The body of the full-size finished spike shall bend cold through 180 degrees
flat on itself without cracking on the outside of the bent portion.

3.2 The head of the full-size finished spike shall bend backward to the line of the
face of the spike, without showing evidence of forging laps on the surface of
the bent portion.

3.3 On bend test of each kind shall be made from each lot of five tons or fraction
thereof.

244
SPECIFICATION FOR TURNOUT SLEEPERS FOR TURNOUT NO. 10 37 Kg Rails

1. SCOPE

This specification shall apply to wooden turnout sleepers (ties) for turnout No. 8 and
10 and diamond crossing sleepers. If imported wooden turnout and diamond sleepers,
the specification to be used shall be for imported wooden ordinary sleeper, except the
dimension. If the wood is purchased locally, such as Yakal, the specification to be
used shall be for local wooden ordinary sleepers, except the dimensions.

2. DIMNESIONS AND NUMBER OF PIECES PER SET

2.1 For No. 10 Turnout, 37Kg Rails.

4 pcs. – 6”x8”x13‟ (150 mm x 200 mm x 4000 mm)

8 pcs. – 6”x8”x12‟
5 pcs. – 6”x8”x 11‟
6 pcs. – 6”x8”x 10‟
7 pcs. – 6”x8”x 9‟
11 pcs. – 6”x8”x 8‟
18pcs. – 6”x8”x 7‟
---------------------
Total 52 pieces per set
============
(150 mm x 200 mm x 3700 mm)
(150 mm x 200 mm x 3400 mm)
(150 mm x 200 mm x 3100 mm)
(150 mm x 200 mm x 2800 mm)
(150 mm x 200 mm x 2500 mm)
(150 mm x 200 mm x 2200 mm)

3. QUALITY OF TURNOUT SLEEPERS

3.1 The timber shall be free from spongy or brittle wood. The ties shall be straight,
square edged and with edges parallel, free from box heart, decay or rot, bark,
sapwood, splits, shakes, hollows, unsound or hallow knots or injurious holes,
or other defects as may be reduce its life, strength and durability.

3.2 All switch ties and diamond crossing ties shall be well sawn on all sides and
cut parallel and square. Dressing with axe shall not be permitted.

3.3 A tie shall be considered not well sawn when its surfaces are not even.

3.4 A tie is not considered, not cut parallel if any difference in the thickness or
breadth exceeds 12 mm.

4. SIZE AND PERMISSIBLE TOLERANCES

The sizes of ties shall be exactly as called for and with the following tolerances
allowed:

Depth - + 10 mm
Width - + 10 mm
Length - + 10 mm

245
 SPECIFICATION FOR TURNOUT NO.10 37 KG RAIL
(JIS E 1303)

1. SCOPE

This standard specifies turnout No. 10 for 37 kg rails to be used on the PNR track.

2. COMPOSITION

Turnout shall consist of switches, Mn-crossing, guard rails other necessary rails,
special tie plates, switch stand, etc.

3. SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS

The shape and dimension of turnout shall be as follows:

3.1 Turnout angle : 1 in 8; 1 in 10

3.2 Track gauge : 1.067 m

3.3 Tongue rails for switch shall be made from 37 kg rail and be hinged type. The
heels ends of tongue rails shall be so shaped as to ensure smooth connection
with lead rail.

3.4 Crossing shall be monoblock type or assembled type.

3.5 Main dimensions turnout shall be in accordance with the Construction

Drawings.

4. DESIGN CONDITION

4.1 Train speed : 90km/h on straight track.

4.2 Maximum axle load : 20 ton

4.3 Rail to be used for the turnout shall be 37 kg rails

5. MATERIALS

5.1 Rails shall be made in accordance with the requirements specified by PNR,
and JIS, or equivalents.

5.2 Mn – crossing shall be made from high manganese cast steel (SCMn113).
Conform to specified in JIS G5131 as below.

Tensile strength : 75kg/mm² min.

Elongation : 35 (%) MIN.
Chemical composition
C : 0.90-1.20 (%)
Si : 0.30-0.80 (%)
Mn : 11.00-14.00 (%)

246
 P : 0.050 (%) max.
S : 0.035 (%) max.

5.3 The Other Parts

5.3.1 Angle bar.

Angle bar shall be made in accordance with the requirements of

specification for angle bar.

5.3.2 Bolt and Nuts

Bolts and nuts for turnout shall be made in accordance with the
requirements of specification for track bolt & nut.

5.3.3 Spring Washer

Spring washer shall be made in accordance with the requirements of

specification for spring washer.

5.3.4 Tie plate, clip, slide plate and spike

Tie plate, clip, slide plate and spike to be used for turnout shall be
made from first class quality steel with tensile strength of 37-48
kg/mm² in accordance with JIS G3101 or equivalent.

5.3.5 Casting blocks

Casting blocks shall be made of quality SC46 or FC20 in accordance

with JIS G310 or JIS G5501 or equivalent.

5.3.6 Track spike

Track spike shall be made of quality SS41 in accordance with JIS G

3101 or equivalent.

5.3.7 Switch ties

Switch ties shall be in accordance with specification for switch ties.

6. MANUFACTURE

Turnout shall be manufactured by first-class method and free from such injuries
defects as to affect the practical performance. The switch stands shall be pre-
assembled in the factory prior to the shipment. The manufacturer shall submit design
drawings and detailed specs to be approved by the Engineer.

7. INSPECTION

7.1 Manufacturer shall inspect turnout in an assembled state at premises,

conforming to the permissible variations below.

247
 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR FUSHION WELDING OF RAILS BY
ALUMINO – THERMIC PROCESS,SKV – F Process

1. INTRODUCTION

1.1 The soundness of the welds produced by aluminothermic process depends on

the quality of (a) aluminothermic mixture, hereinafter referred to as the
„MIXTURES‟ and (b) the technical control exercised during the preparation
for and for and the execution of the welding by this process.

1.2 The quantity of the „Mixture‟ required for welding one rail joint shall be called
a „Portion‟.

1.3 A batch shall consist of a number of „Portions‟ manufactured from similarly

and simultaneously treated raw materials.

1.4 It is necessary to ensure that the „Portions‟ are prepared under proper quality
control and the execution of the sample welds is in strict conformity with the
practice approved by the (the Purchaser) for site welding of rails. No changes
in the analysis of the mixture, its acceptance tests and the methods of welding
shall be made without the consent of the Purchaser.

2. SCOPE

2.1 This standard covers:

a. The technical requirements for the supply of the ‟Mixture‟ for the full fushion
method of welding of rails, and

b. The acceptance tests for such welded rails.

2.2 The acceptance tests specified here are meant for fushion welding of flat
bottom steel rails32 kg ASCE, 37 kg ASCE.

3. MANNER OF SUPPLY OF THE ‘PORTION’.

3.1 The „Portion‟ shall be submitted for acceptance batch wise.

3.2 Every „Portion‟ shall be sealed in a moisture proof container in such a manner
that no changes can be made to the „Portion‟ without damaging the container
or breaking its seal. The container shall indicate the batch number, the date of
manufacture, the section rail for which it is meant and the insignia of the firm.

4. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE SUPPLY OF THE ‘PORTION’

4.1 The following tests shall be conducted for assessing the quality of the
„Portion‟.

a. Reaction tests;

248
 b. Physical tests on test welds.

5. REACTION TESTS.

5.1 The reaction shall be allowed to take place in standard crucibles similar to
those used in site-welding. The alumino-thermic steel shall be poured in
standard moulds so as to obtain bars having a diameter between 25.0 and
35.0mm.

5.2 During the course of the thermic reaction, observations in regard to the
characteristics of the reaction i.e. whether it is quiet normal, vigorous or
boiling shall be made and recorded. The reaction shall at be vigorous or
boiling. The duration of the reaction shall normally be 20 seconds. A deviation
of 5 seconds may be permitted either way at the discretion of the Inspecting
Officer.

5.3 The sample of alumino-thermic steel obtained from above reaction, when
fractured, shall not show a mirror like structure or accretions. The fractured
surfaces shall show a fine grained structure.

5.4 A transverse section shall be cut from the middle third portion of the bar of
alumino-thermic steel obtained from reaction test as laid down in clause 5.1
Aluminum content of the steel shall be determined spectroscopically at two
points located at eh mid-radius of the cross section. The aluminium content so
determined shall not be less than 0.30% and shall not exceed 0.70%.

6. NUMBER OF REACTIONS

6.1 Reaction tests shall not be carried out on one “Portion” for every 250
“Portions” or partthereof of a batch. The frequency of the tests may be
decreased, by the Inspecting Officer or the Purchaser to a maximum of one
„Portion‟ for every 500 „Portions‟ of abatch, based on the past performance of
individual contractors supplying the Portions‟.

7. PHYSICAL TESTS ON TEST WELDS.

7.1 Test weld samples

Tests welds shall be made either on new rails or on old but usable rails of
similar section and conforming to same specification. Two pieces of length not
less than 750mm required for the test weld shall be cut from the same rail. The
rail pieces can be obtained from PNR.

7.2 Spattering

No spattering of the fused „Mixture‟ shall be taken during the test that the
mould surface is free from moisture.

7.3 Casting Defects

The excess of weld metal above the rail table and sides shall be chipped off in
red-hot condition and shall not show any hot shortness (i.e. brittleness of the

249
 metal under red-hot condition, indicated in this case in the process of
chipping). The weld surface perfectly flat along-with the top table of parent
rail and shall not show any porosity or slag inclusions and other casting defect.

7.4 Hardness Tests.

7.4.1 The Brinell Hardness survey shall be carried out on the welded zone,
heat affected zone and the un-affected portion of the rail on the top and
sides of the head of the test-weld using 3000 kg load and 10 mm
diameter ball for 10 seconds. The average hardness numbers
determined for the welded and the heat affected zones shall be not less
than 210 and not more than 250. This stipulation is based on the
assumption that the average hardness of the rail offered for welding is
about 230BHN. In cases where the hardness of the parent rail departs
considerably from this figure the average hardness numbers
determined for the welded and the heat affected zones shall not be less
than 20 points below and 20 points above respectively the harness of
the parent metal of the rail.

7.5 Transverse Test

7.5.1 The test-weld shall be supported on cylindrical or semi-cylindrical

supports having a diameter of 30 to 50 mm and a distance of one meter
between them from center to center. The weld shall be at the center of
the span and loaded in such a manner that the foot of the rail is in
tension. The mandrel diameter shall be between 30 and 50 mm. The
load shall be gradually increased till rupture occurs. The minimum
values of the load at rupture shall be as under:

Rail Section Min. transverse

Breaking load
30 to 32.0 kg/m (60 to 65 lb/yard) 35,000 kg.
32.5 to 41.5 kg/m (66 to 75 lb/yard) 40,000 kg.
37.5 to 41.5 kg/m (76 to 84 lb/yard) 45,000 kg.

7.5.2 Test welds shall show before rupture a deflection of not less than 10
mm measured at the fracture.

7.5.3 If the fracture occurs far outside the weld, a slice may be out
transversely at the weld and etched in boiling 1:1 Hydrochloric acid to
determine the casting defects.

7.5.4 The fractured surfaces of the weld or in cases where macro-etching is

done on transverse slices, shall not show porosity or inclusions aggregating to
more than 5% of the area at the weld. No porosity or inclusion shall be
connected with the outer surface of the weld. The fractured surfaces shall also
not show the presence of either mirror like structure or accretions and shall be
fine grained in appearance.

8. NUMBER OF TEST WELDS.

250
 8.1 The test welds shall be made from one out of every 250 „Portions‟ or part
thereof of a batch. The frequency of the test may be decreased by the Engineer
or the Purchaser to a maximum of one every 500 „Portions‟ of a batch, based
on the past performance of individual contractors supplying the “Portions‟.

9. RETESTS

9.1 Should the results of any of the tests referred to in Clauses 5 to 7 be

unsatisfactory and should the Supplier forth-with give notice in the writing to
the Engineer or the Purchaser that he desires additional tests to be carried out,
these shall be carried out at his own expense. These additional tests shall be
carried out in the same manner in all respects as the tests originally carried out
on another two „Portions‟ from the same batch selected by the Inspecting
Officer or the Purchaser.

9.2 If the results of both these tests are satisfactory, the batch represented by the
„Portion‟ from which these welds were prepared may be accepted. If either or
both the tests show any of the above defects, the batch shall be rejected.

10. ADDITIONAL TESTSAFTER REPROCESSING.

10.1 In the event of any sample „Portion‟ from a batch failing to comply with the
requirement ofClause 5.4 the supplier, if he desired so, may be permitted to
resubmit the batch after necessary reprocessing once only. The reprocessed
„Portions‟ shall be resubmitted under a separate batch and serial numbers.

11. ACCEPTANCE

11.1 Acceptance shall be done batch wise. Every individual batch that satisfies the
conditions prescribed in the specification shall be accepted after an
identification mark has been put on it by the Inspecting Officer.

12. TESTING FACILITIES.

12.1 The supplier shall at his own expense supply all labor and appliances for such
testing as may be carried out in the presence of the purchaser or the Engineer
in his own premises or at any other pace acceptable to the Purchaser in
accordance with this Specification.

13. ACCEPTANCE TESTS FOR WELDED JOINTS

13.1 Fusion welding of rails by this process shall be executed in accordance with
the best practice approved by the Purchaser. Only approved „Portions‟ shall be
used for the work.

13.2 Rail joints welded by a supplier shall be guaranteed by him against failure for
a period of two years from the date of making the welds or from the date such
welded joints are inserted in the track, in case the welding is done outside the
track. Any such welded joint, which fails by cracking within this period of
guarantee, shall be re-welded free of cost by the supplier.

251
 13.3 One out of every 100 welded joints shall be picked up at random and subjected
to hardness and transverse tests as laid down in Clauses 7.4 and 7.5 shall
comply with the provisions laid therein.

13.3.1 In the event of any welded joint failing in any one or more
requirements of this specification, the Railways will be at liberty to
suspend forthwith further welding of joints. The work will remain
suspended until the supplier has improved his welding technique and
the Joints welded by him can stand up to the above tests. Further, the
period of guarantee vide Clause 13.2 above of the Joint already welded
shall be extend for a further period of one year and any such welded
joint which fails within this extended period of guarantee or shows
signs of failure by cracking shall be re-welded free of cost by the
supplier.

13.3.2 The welded joints with the extended period of guarantee shall be
marked „X‟ on the outer side of the head of the rail near the Joint in
addition to the markings prescribed in Clause 14. Such marked joints
shall be kept under careful observation by the Railway.

14. MARKINGS

14.1 All the welded Joint shall be distinctly stamped by the supplier in the
following manner:

(Month, Year, firm‟s insignia) and „X‟ (where necessary).

The markings shall be on the outer side of the rail head within 150 mm from the
welded joints.

252
 SPECIFICATIONS FOR WOODEN JOINT TIES

1.1 SCOPE

This specification covers the requirement for size, shape, quality, physical properties,
inspection, testing, marking and acceptance of joint wood sleepers from acceptable
species.

1.2 GENERAL

All ties shall be cut from mature, healthy live trees and shall be of the following
species:

I. LOCAL WOOD
a. Basilan – Yakal (H. Basilanica Foxw.)
b. Yakal – Kaliot (H. Malibato Foxw.)
c. Yakal – Magasusu (H. Mindanensis Foxw.)
d. Yakal – Saplungan (H. Plagata (Bico) Vid)
e. Yakal – (S. Astylosa Foxw.)
f. Yakal – Gisok (S. Gisok Foxw.)
g. Yakal – Mabolo (S. Ciliata King)
h. Yakal – Malibato (S. Malibato Foxw.)
i. Yakal – Yambak (S. Faloefereides Foxw.)

II. IMPORTED WOOD

All imported timbers are to be merbau, yellow be merbau, yellow Balau, Selangan
Batu No. 1 or Chengal or equivalent imported hard wood that will comply with the
ranges of the mechanical and related properties of Philippine woods as stated in the
tabulation in this Technical Specifications.

a. SELANGAN BATU TIMBER SLEEPER

RANGE: 45 species in Shorea group of this genus from Ceylon and India to
Malaya, Borneo, the Philippines and Moluccas. Sul (S. robusta) in Indian, Guijo (S.
guiso) in Philippine and Bangkirai (Shorea sp. Including S. laevis) in Borneo best
known in this group.

Large amount imported to Japan from Sabah and Sarawak mixed with Meranti. Logs
quite similar to Meranti and careful classification needed.

PROPERTIES: Wood very hard, which distinguishes Seraya.

BARK: Similar to Seraya. Usually fibrous inner bark left on logs when
imported.

WOOD: Yellow, yellow brown or red brown and some greenish on

surface. Heartwood somewhat distinct and sapwood paler.

WEIGHT: A.D.0.84 ~ 1.05.

253
 GRAIN: Interlocked.

TEXTURE: Moderately fine or fine.

1.2.1 The timber shall be free from spongy or brittle wood. Except, as otherwise
permitted in this specification, sleepers shall be straight, square edged, and with edges
parallel, free from boxed heart, decay or rot, bark, sapwood, splits, shakes, hollows,
unsound or hollow knots or injurious holes, scars or any other defects as may reduce
its life, strength and durability.

1.2.2 All sleepers shall be well sawn on all sides and cut parallel and square.
Dressing with axe shall not be permitted.

1.2.2.1 A Sleeper shall be considered not cut parallel if any difference in the thickness
and breadth exceeds 12 mm.

1.2.2.2 A sleeper is considered not cut parallel if any difference in the thickness and
breadth exceeds 12 mm.

1.2.2.3 If the sleeper is longer than specified, it should be reduced to the proper length
before it is offered for inspection.

1.3 PERMISSIBILITY OF DEFECTS

1.3.1

Center or Boxed Heart of Presence of Pith will not be permitted. Sleepers with center
or boxed heart may, however, be accepted but only on molave species if the heart is
sound and tight.

1.3.2 Cracks and Splits

(1) End Splits – Provided a split does not seem likely to extend and is not in the
direction of the spike position and the sleeper is not freshly sawn, a sleeper with this
defect may be accepted if the split does not exceed 150 mm in length and not more
than 1.5 mm in width.

(2) Cross Breaks – Sleepers with cross breaks are not acceptable.

(3) Surface Cracks – Sleepers sawn from sound timber with this defect may be
accepted provided the cracks are light.

(4) Sun or Seasoning Cracks – This is not easy to define. It may be taken to mean
a sleeper which is in existence for at least three months from the date of conversion
from the log. The color of freshly sawn sleepers is usually white and this provides an
indication of probable age. In deciding the age of sleeper, inspecting officers can take
other factors into account such as the time taken to reach the railway depot, period
held in storage at depot from local inquiry, etc. These would be permitted if they are
light.

(5) Miscellaneous Cracks and Splits – Ordinary cracks and splits may be
permitted if they are light.

254
 1.3.3 Crook, Cup, Twist and Bow

(1) Crook – This will be permitted with a maximum deviation of 70 mm. An S –

bend on the width of the sleeper and bend on the depth is not acceptable.

(2) Cup, twist and bow are not acceptable.

1.3.4 Decay

Sleepers containing decay or rot in any form of degree will not be accepted.

1.3.5 Heart Defects – Sleepers with deep heart crack and winding heart crack are
not acceptable.

1.3.6 Hollows, Knots, and Scars

(1) Hollows – Hollows not more than 12 mm in diameter and less than 25 mm
deep and not exceeding three hollows per 300 mm length of the sleeper may be
permissible. No hollow shall be permitted between 450 mm and 750 mm from the
center of the sleeper.

(2) Knots – No sleeper will be accepted with large knots within the section lying
between 450 mm and 750 mm from the center of its length. Large knots are those
with diameter exceeding one – half of the width of the surface on which it appears.
No loose, hollow or unsound knots shall be permitted.

(3) Scars – Any small scar away from the rail seat will be permissible.

(4) Sleepers with ruptured ends will not be accepted.

1.3.7 Sapwood

Presence of sapwood is permissible along one narrow surface of the sleepers only but
shall not exceed 12 mm thick. Sapwood is not permissible in general on undersize
sleepers.

1.3.8 Shakes

(1) Cup Shakes – These will not be permitted under the rail seat. Elsewhere it
may be permitted if less than 50 mm in width and not more than 300 mm from the end
of the sleeper.

1.4 SIZE

a. The standard joint sleeper dimensions are 5” x 10” x 7‟.

1.5 DELIVERY, INSPECTION, MARKING AND ACCEPTANCE

1.5.1

Sleepers shall be delivered and supplied at PNR station yard to be designated by the
Engineer.

255
1.5.2

The inspection of all sleepers will be made by the Engineer‟s Inspection Team and
those that conform to this specification and accepted shall be branded/stamped by the
Inspectors.

1.5.3

All sleepers offered for inspection must bear the Contractor‟s property mark, a
facsimile of which should be furnished to the Engineer who may direct the Contractor
to change it if considered not necessary. This facsimile shall be sleeper for identity of
the Supplier/Contractor.

All sleepers intended for inspection shall be spread with their heart side up in long
lines parallel with one another and supported with at least one support. Sleepers
spread on the ground will not be inspected.

All sleepers must be cleaned of mud and dirt before inspection. The ends must be
plastered at the time of inspection. Previously rejected sleepers should not be spread
for inspection without prior advice unless they are the subject of a complaint to a
higher authority in which case it will have the rejection mark of the Engineer‟s
inspection Team who originally rejected them.

Sleepers of a longer length than actually required should first be cut to desired length
before final/stamped accordingly by the Engineer‟s inspection Team unless sleeper is
thus cut.

Sleepers will be inspected one by one, each sleeper being turned round for inspection,
all sides and ends receiving individual inspection.

Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor to turn over all sleepers one by one for
inspection and branding/tamping by the Engineer‟s inspection Team. All accepted
sleepers will be stamped with big marking hammer at the middle top and clear faces
of the sleepers. Accepted sleepers shall be completely marked with the following:

(1) “M” if Molave, “Y” if Yacal and first letter for named of imported wood.

(2) “L” to indicate properly inspected by representative of General Services Division

(3) “A” to indicate properly inspected by representative of Management Audits of

PNR.

(4) “F” to indicate properly inspected by the representative of the Engineer.

All accepted sleepers after being completely marked shall immediately be stockpiled
again in the same required manner.

All cost due to branding/marking of the sleeper by the Contractor/Supplier, spreading

the sleepers for inspection and stockpiling them and loading on PNR boxcars shall be
at the expense of the Contractor.

1.5.4 FACILITIES FOR PRE-INSPECTION

256
The Contractor shall afford at his own expense all reasonable facilities to satisfy the
Engineer‟s Inspection Team that the sleepers are in accordance with these
specifications.

1.5.5 HANDLING OF JOINT SLEEPERS

Preservative treatment of Wooden Sleepers

(1) Any fabricating such as end trimming and, if required, adzing and boring or
application of anti – cracking devices shall be performed at manufacturing plants of
wood sleepers.

1.5.6 UNLOADING AND STACKING OF JOINT SLEEPERS

Wooden sleepers shall not be unloaded by dropping or throwing them onto rails, rock
or hard surfaces. Sleepers shall be handled with tongs and not with bars or sharp tools
to avoid any damage.

The Contractor shall fully coordinate with the Engineer and obtain his approval on
locations, methods and times of storage of the wooden sleepers.

Stacks of sleepers shall be appropriately supported and likewise protected from sparks
or other fire hazards and undue damage.

1.5.7 MECHANICAL AND RELATED PROPERTIES

When tested, imported hard wood shall meet the minimum ranges of Mechanical and
Related Properties of Philippine Woods shown on Figure 1 .

257
 PART 8
DPWH STANDARDS FOR ASPHALT PAVEMENT OVERLAY AND PAVEMENT
MARKINGS

ITEM 306 – BITUMINOUS ROAD MIX SURFACE COURSE

306.1 Description

This Item shall consist of constructing a bituminous road-mix surface course

on a prepared base in accordance with these Specification and in conformity
with the lines, grades and typical cross-sections shown on the Plans, or as
established by the Engineer.

306.2 Material Requirements

306.2.1 Bituminous Material

The bituminous material shall be either rapid Curing (RC) Cut-back,

Medium Curing (MC) Cut-back or Emulsified Asphalt, whichever is
called for in the Bill of Quantities. It shall conform to the requirements
of Item 702, Bituminous Material. The type and grade will be specified
in the Special Provisions.

306.2.2 Aggregate

The aggregate shall conform to applicable requirements of Item 703,

Aggregates. It will be tested for acceptance immediately preceding
addition of bituminous material to the mix. This Acceptance will be
based on periodic samples from the windrowed materials after all
aggregates have been blended for each layer.

The aggregate may be new or salvaged from the existing surface.

1. New Aggregate

It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 703,

Aggregates.

2. Salvaged Aggregate

Where aggregate required for the road mix surface course is already in
place, the Contractor shall not be responsible for its grading or quality
except for removal of oversize pieces. In general, salvaged aggregate
to be used for road mix surface course will consist of materials meeting
the requirements given in Item 703, Aggregates, for new aggregate or
may consist of selected granular material for other grading. Any
particles of salvaged aggregate appearing in the surface at the time of
lay-down and finishing that will not pass 37.5 mm (1-1/2 inch) sieve
shall be removed by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer.

306.2.3 Proportioning of Mixture

258
 The proportion of bituminous material on the basis of total dry aggregate, shall
be from 4.5 to 7.0 mass percent when cut-back asphalt is used and from 6.0 to
10.0 mass percent when emulsified asphalt is used. The exact percentage to be
used shall be fixed by the Engineer in accordance with the job-mix formula
and the other quality control requirements.

During the mixing operation, one-half to one (0.5 to 1.0) mass percent of
hydrated lime, dry aggregate basis, shall be added to the mixture. The lower
percentage limit is applicable to aggregates which are predominantly
calcareous.

306.3 Construction Requirements

306.3.1 Weather Limitations

The construction of road mix bituminous pavement shall be carried on only

when the surface on which the material is to be placed is dry and when the
weather is not foggy or rainy.

306.3.2 Construction Equipment

The equipment used by the Contractor shall include scarifying, mixing,

spreading, finishing and compacting equipment; a bituminous
distributor; and the equipment for heating bituminous material.

The distributor shall be so designed, equipped, maintained and

operated that bituminous material at even heat may be applied
uniformly on variable widths of surface up to 4.5 m at readily
determined and controlled rates from 0.2 to 10 L/m2, with uniform
pressure, and with an allowable variation from any specified rate not to
exceed 0.1 L/m2. Distributor equipment shall include a tachometer
pressure gauge, accurate volume measuring devices or a calibrated
tank, and a thermometer for measuring temperatures of tank contents.
Distributors shall be equipped with a power unit for the pump, and full
circulation spray bars adjustable laterally and vertically.

Travelling or stationary mixing plants or other equipment of proven

performance may be used by the Contractor in lieu of the specified
equipment, if approved by the Engineer.

Rollers shall be self-propelled steel-wheel tandem or 3-wheel rollers

weighing not less than 8 tonnes each and pneumatic tire rollers having
a total compacting width of not less than 1,520 mm (60 inches) and the
gross mass adjustable within the range of 3,640 to 6,360 kilograms per
metre (200 t0 350 pounds per inch) of compaction width. The
operating mass shall be directed. Tire pressure or contact pressure may
be specified for pneumatic-tire rollers. All tires on pneumatic rollers
shall be equally inflated, exerting equal unit pressure, with a means of
varying the contact pressure to suit project conditions.

306.3.3 Preparation of Base

259
 1. Case 1 (New Aggregate)

When new aggregate is to be used for the road mix surface course, the
existing base shall be scarified lightly and bladed to uniform grade and
to the cross-section shown on the Plans and shall then be rolled or
watered and rolled, as directed. If so ordered by the Engineer,
depressions shall first be filled and weak portions of the base
strengthened with new aggregate.

2. Case 2 (Salvaged Aggregate)

When material in the existing road surface is to be used for mixing, the
surface shall be scarified lightly and bladed to uniform grade and to the
cross-section shown on the Plans. The reshaped surface shall then be
scarified again to the depth ordered by the Engineer and in such
manner as to leave a foundation of undisturbed material parallel, both
in profile and cross-section, to the proposed finished surface. The
loosened materials shall be bladed aside into a windrow at the side of
the road and the undisturbed material rolled or watered and rolled, as
directed.

306.3.4 Placing Aggregates

New aggregates, where required, shall be uniformly spread on the

prepared surface by the use of spreader boxes, or other approved
mechanical spreading devices. When two or more sizes of aggregates
are used, each size of aggregate shall be placed in the proper amount to
provide for surfacing of the required width and thickness. The proper
amounts of the separate sizes of aggregate for each course shall be
blended and shaped into a windrow of uniform cross-section. At least
one day shall be allowed for measuring, sampling and testing for
approval of quantity and gradation before the windrowed material is
spread for application of bituminous material.

If the surface moisture of the aggregate is more than 2 percent of the

dry weight of the aggregate, except when the bituminous material is
emulsified asphalt, the aggregate shall be turned by blades or disc
harrows or otherwise aerated until the moisture content is reduced to 2
percent or less. The aggregate shall then be spread smoothly and
uniformly over half the road or other convenient width of the surface
ready for the application of bituminous material, except that when a
traveling mixing plant is used, the aggregate shall be formed into a
uniform cross-section.

In lieu of aerating and drying the aggregate, the Contractor may use an
approved additive, except where emulsified asphalt is used, which
shall be satisfactorily blended with the bituminous material. The
additive shall permit suitable coating of the wet aggregate and shall
prevent the bituminous coating from stripping in the presence of water.

306.3.5 Application of Bituminous Material

260
 The bituminous material shall be uniformly distributed in successive
application, in such amounts and at such intervals as directed. The
mixing equipment shall follow immediately behind the distributor,
after each application of bituminous material, to partially mix the
aggregate and the bituminous material.

306.3.6 Mixing

After the last application of bituminous material and partial mixing, the
entire mass of bituminous material and aggregate shall be windrowed
on the road surface and then mixed, by blading the mixture from side
to side of the road, or by manipulation producing equivalent results,
until all aggregate particles are coated with bituminous material and
the whole mass has a uniform color and the mixture is free from fat or
lean spots, or balls of uncoated particles. During the mixing operations,
care shall be taken to avoid cutting into the underlying course or
contaminating the mixture with earth or other extraneous matter. When
directed, the mixing process shall be confined to part of the width or
area of the road so as to allow traffic to pass.

Should the mixture show an excess, deficiency or uneven distribution

of bituminous material, the condition shall be corrected by the addition
of aggregate or bituminous material as required and re-mixing. If the
mixture contains excessive amounts of moisture or volatile matter, it
shall be bladed, aerated or otherwise manipulated until the moisture
and volatile content are satisfactory. The spreading of the mix shall not
be done when the surface to be covered is in an unsatisfactory
condition. At the end of each day‟s work, or when the work is
interrupted by weather conditions or otherwise, all loose materials shall
be bladed into a windrow, whether mixing is completed or not, and
shall be retained in a windrow until operations are resumed.

When the mixing operations have been satisfactorily completed, the

mixture shall be formed into a windrow of uniform cross-section.

If the Contractor elects to use traveling or stationary mixing plants in

lieu of the specified equipment, the same requirements regarding
residual moisture and evaporation of volatiles given above shall apply.

306.3.7 Spreading, Compacting and Finishing

The material shall be spread by a self-propelled pneumatic-tire blade

grader or a mechanical spreader of approved type. In spreading from
the windrow, care shall be taken to avoid cutting into the underlying
base.

After the material is spread, the surface shall be rolled. Rolling shall be
parallel to the road center line and shall commence at the outer edges
of the road, overlapping the shoulders and progressing towards the
center, overlapping on successive passes by at least one-half the width

261
 of the roller, except that on superelevated curves, rolling shall progress
from the lower to the upper edge.

Each pass shall terminate at least 910 mm (3 ft) in advance or to the

rear of the end of the preceding pass. During compaction, the surface
shall be dragged or bladed as necessary to fill ruts and to remove
incipient corrugations or other irregularities. Rolling shall continue
until the surfacing is of uniform texture and satisfactory compaction is
obtained. Initial rolling shall be performed with a pneumatic-tire roller
and final rolling with a 3-wheel or tandem type steel wheel roller.
Rolling shall be discontinued whenever it begins to produce excessive
pulverizing of the aggregate or displacement of the mixture.

When the compacted thickness of the road mix surface is to be more

than 50 mm (2 inches), the mixture shall be spread from the windrow
and compacted in two layers, the first layer to be bladed and rolled
before the second layer is spread.

While the surface is being compacted and finished, the Contractor shall
trim the edges neatly to line.

306.3.8 Surface Requirements

Surface requirements shall be as specified in Subsection 307.3.11

except that the permissible surface variance will be 10 mm in 3 m (3.8
inch in 10 ft.).

306.4 Method of Measurement

Bituminous material and aggregate for Bituminous Road Mix Surface Course
will be measured by the tonne (t). The quantity to be paid for shall be the
number of tonnes of bituminous material and aggregate used and accepted in
the completed work. The weight of all moisture in the aggregate will be
deducted from the pay quantity.

Due to possible variations in the specific gravity of the aggregates, the tonnage
used may vary from the proposed quantities. No adjustment in contract unit
price will be made because of such variation.

306.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 306.4 shall be paid

for at the contract unit price for Bituminous Road Mix Surface Course, which
price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing materials,
handling, mixing, hauling, placing, rolling, compacting, labor, equipment,
tools and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Description Unit of

262
Number Measurement

Bituminous Road Mix

306
Surface Course

Aggregate for
306 (1) Bituminous Road Mix
Surface Course ton

Bituminous Material
306 (2) for Bituminous Road
Mix Surface Course ton

263
ITEM 606 – PAVEMENT MARKINGS

606.1 Description

This item shall consist of placing markings on the finished pavement. The
work shall include the furnishing of premixed reflectorized traffic paint or
reflectorized pavement marking paint conforming to the requirements of
AASHTO M 248, whichever is called for in the Contract, sampling and
packing, preparing the surface, and applying the paint to the pavement surface,
all in accordance with this Specification.

The paint shall be applied to the size, shape and location of the markings
shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer.

606.2 Premixed Reflectorized Traffic Paints

Premixed reflectorized traffic paint is a paint in which the glass beads are
mixed in the paint during the process of manufacture, so that upon application
and drying, the paint line is capable of retroreflection of the light beams.

Premixed reflectorized traffic paints which are available in both white and
yellow are paints that provide reflective marking for concrete, bituminous,
bricks or stone surface of highways, bridges, tunnels, streets, parking lots and
airports.

606.2.1 Classification

Premixed reflectorized traffic paint shall be classified according to the

following types based on the vehicles used:

Type I – Alkyd

Type II – Chlorinated Rubber Alkyd

606.2.2 Material Requirements

The paint shall consist of pigments, vehicles and glass beads so

combined as to produce a paint that will conform to the following
requirements.

Condition in container – The packaged material shall be free

from lumps and mixed readily to a smooth homogenous state.

Skinning – The packaged material shall not skin within 48

hours in a ¾ filled, tightly closed container.

Appearance of Dried Film – The paint film shall dry to a

smooth uniform finish.

Flexibility – The dried paint film shall not show cracking or

flaking after being bent about 180 degrees over a 12.7 mm
mandrel.

264
 Resistance to Water – The dried paint film shall not show
blistering, peeling, wrinkling and discoloration when immersed
in water for 18 hours.

The paint shall also conform to the physical properties specified in

Table 1.

Table 1 – Physical Properties

Properties Type I and Type II

Minimum Maximum

Specific Gravity 1.5 -

Drying Time, No Pick

Up,

Minutes - 40

Consistency (Kreb 65 95
Units) at 20 C

Premixed reflectorized traffic paint composition shall conform to the

requirements given in Table 2.

Table 2 – Composition Requirements

Requirements
Paint Composition
Type I Type II

Mini Maxim Mini Maxim

mum um mum um

Total Dry Solids,

Percent by weight 60 - 60 -

Titanium Dioxide, Rutile

Percent by weight 16.0 - 16.0 -

Medium Chrome Yellow,

Percent by weight 12.0 - 12.0 -

Extenders, Percent by

265
weight, 13.0 - 13.0
White - 17.0 - 17.0
Yellow

Non-volatile Content
(based on the vehicle) 40 - 41 -
percent by weight

Glass Beads, percent by 31.0 35.0 31.0 35.0

weight

Glass Spheres or Beads Requirements:

Quantity: The amount of glass beads to be mixed with the paint shall
be 500 grams per liter of paint.

Beads Diameter: The percentage of beads that will pass through the US

Standard Sieves shall be as follows:

Sieve No. (um) Mass Percent

Passing

70 (212 – um) – 100

0.850

80 (186 – um) – 85-100

0.600

140 (106 – um) – 15-55

0.300

230 ( 63 – um) – 0-10

0.150

Index of Refraction: The index of refraction of the beads shall be the

range of 1.50 to 1.60 when tested by the liquid immersion method at
29oC.

Appearance: The glass beads shall be transparent, colorless and the

sum of particles that are fused, plane, angular colored and contains
bubble shall not exceed 20 percent

606.2.3 Construction Requirements

266
 The painting of lane markers and traffic strips shall include the
cleaning of the pavement surfaces, the application, protection and
drying of the paint coatings, the protection of pedestrians, vehicular or
other traffic, the protection of all parts of the road structure and its
appurtenances against disfigurement by spatters, splashes or smirches
of paints or of paint materials, and the supplying of all tools, labor and
traffic paint necessary for the entire work.

The paint shall not be applied during rain or wet weather or when the
air is misty, or when in the opinion of the Engineer, conditions are
unfavorable for thework. Paint shall not be applied upon damp
pavement surfaces, or upon pavement which has absorbed heat
sufficient to cause the paint to blister and produce a porous film of
paint.

The application of paint shall preferably be carried out by a machine

specially made for this purpose but where brushes are used, only round
or oval brushes not exceeding 100 mm in width will be permitted. The
paint shall be so applied as to produce a uniform, even coating in close
contact with the surface being painted.

Traffic paint shall be applied to the pavement at the rate of 0.33 L /m2
and shall dry sufficiently to be free from cracking in from 15 to 30
minutes.

All markings shall present a clean cut, uniform and workmanlike

appearance. Markings that fail to have a uniform, satisfactory
appearance either by day or night, shall be corrected by the Contractor
in a manner acceptable to the Engineer and at no cost to the
Government.

606.2.4 Sampling

The paint shall be sampled in accordance with PNS 484/ISO 1512 or

other Philippine Standard Method of Sampling Paints and Varnishes.

606.2.5 Test Methods

The paints shall be tested in accordance with the methods specified in

PNS 461 or other Philippine Standard Method of Tests for Paints and
Varnishes.

606.2.6 Packing, Packaging and Marking

The paints shall be packed, packaged and marked in accordance with

PNS 140.

606.3 Method of Measurement

The quantity of pavement markings to be paid for shall either be the length as
shown on the Plans of painted traffic line of the stated width or the area as
shown on the plans of symbols, lettering, hatchings, and the like, completed

267
 and accepted. Separate items shall be provided for premixed reflectorized
traffic paint and reflectorized thermoplastic pavement markings.

606.4 Basis of Payment

The quantities measured as determined in Section 606.4, Method of

Measurement, shall be paid for at the appropriate contract unit price for the
Pay Items shown in the Bid Schedule which price and payment shall constitute
full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, samplingand
packing, forthe preparation of the surface, and for all labor, equipment, tools
and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay
Unit of
Item Description
Measurement
Number
606 (1) Pavement markings Square Meter
(Premixed
Reflectorized)
606 (2) Square Meter
Pavement markings
(Reflectorized
Thermoplastic)

268